《Naruto: The Hidden Protector》


 Chapter 1

    Chapter 1


    In Konoha (Konohagakure or The Village hidden in the leaves) it was like your everyday morning. Ninjas were jumping from one rooftops to another. The civilians were doing their usual activities of doing business , Gossiping about some ninja , or criticising the nearby Uchiha police.


    But when no one was expecting it, in the middle of the village a space rift appeared. From it came a masked man who observed the nearby villagers coldly . And without any delay he did a series of hand signs.


    With a huge cloud of smoke that managed to capture almost everyone''s attention, the masked man appeared standing on top of a nine tail fox.


    It took everyone a few seconds to register what happened and when they did they screamed,


    " Help the Kyuubi has escaped the seal. Inform the Hokage immediately"


    And with a roar from now controlled Kurama the nine tails disaster started.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    " Minato, is this truly for the best? " asked an exhausted red haired lady. She was barely able to keep conscience while simultaneously using her Adamantine Sealing Chains to retrain the Kyuubi. Her name is Kushina Uzumaki, the last known living member of the famous Uzumaki clan and 2nd Jinchu?riki of the nine tails, the strongest of all the tailed beasts. She is also the wife of the fourth Hokage although that knowledge is not widespread amongst the villagers for some reason.


    Besides her stood a tall, fair-skinned man. He has blue eyes and spiky, blond hair. Hailed as the Konoha''s Yellow Flash, this here is the present Fourth Hokage of Konoha Minato Namikaze.


    " Yes Kushina , the village cannot lose its tail beast and Naruto will need all the help he can get." Minato said as he did a series of hand signs.


    " But Minato won''t the village discriminate against him just like they did to me. I don''t want him to go through that experience just for some power. " Said Kushina, still not convinced of her husband''s plan.


    Minato gave her a reassuring smile and said softly, " Kushina I understand your concern but I''m doing this for his own good. When I held him I felt my son is very special and no this isn''t me doting on my son, I felt that he is the person Jiraiya sensei was seeking. The one who will bring peace to this chaotic world.


    I believe in my son Kushina so this is why I''m doing this. This is my responsibility as a father, to let my child reach his full potential and achieve his goal. "


    Looking at his eyes Kushina sighed and finally agreed. Although what Minato was doing can be considered selfish, she knew that he only wanted the best for our son.


    "Please don''t make me regret it minato."to her remark he just smiled and said confidently,


    "Don''t worry i''m sure the village would accept him after all he is our son "


    When his words fell he did a series of hand seals. After a dozen or so hand seals later she shouted "forbidden jutsu of Reaper Death Seal."


    A person that is translucent, gaunt spectre with a demonic visage who has a much larger body than an average human, possessing long, shaggy, white hair, from which two red horns protrude, as well as purple-hued skin began to to appear behind Minato. This person is draped in a large white kimono and carries a set of prayer beads. And to top it all off he has a tanto on his mouth.


    When the figure appeared the kyuubi which was trying to break free from the chains felt a chill up his spine. He hurriedly looked around and found Minato summoning the shinigami. And before it could do anything the shinigami with a swift movement swung the blade he had in his mouth and split the kyuubi in half.


    While he was doing so the seals that were placed on the ground began to shine. And still while restraining the shinigami from pulling his soul immediately, MInato activated the formation " Eight Trigrams Sealing Style ".


    Half of the now split nine tail chakra began to flow towards him and while the other half began to flow towards the altar where a baby is placed. Since he is quite near the nine tails the transfer was done almost immediately. And at this crucial moment when all seemed to go according to plan the nine tails which in a semi conscious state suddenly realised something.


    He was about to be sealed again. And what''s more to an infant. How could he, the strongest and arrogant of all the tailed beasts, bear such humiliation. In a last act of struggle he used the opportunity where the adamantine chains were loosen to attack the infant baby.


    "I will not be sealed again " with a mighty roar he swung his claws to kill the baby before the sealing was completed


    "Noooo"shouted both Minato and Kushina as they both used their bodies to shield their child from the attack. .


    Like a paper their bodies were pierced by the nine tails claw. Fortunately for them they managed to save their child by killing the momentum.


    The nine tails roared in anger as his last attempt at freedom was stopped by these damnable humans. It hatefully glared at them as its body was sucked into the seal. After it was fully sealed the couple both sighed in relief. They managed to protect their child.


    As adrenaline that was there vanished making them weak again. Minato coughed up some blood and said weakly, "I''m sorry Kushina, it looks like I won''t be able to hold on much longer. Pour in some chakra to the seal so we can observe Naruto''s growth and help him when he needs it the most and since we won''t be able to meet him for quite a while ...."he didn''t have to finish it as kushina understood what he wanted to say.


    She looked at her son sadly and said lovingly, ""Naruto..


    Don''t be picky.. Eat lots and grow strong..


    Make sure that you bathe every day and stay warm..


    Also.. Don''t stay up late.. You need lots of sleep..


    And make friends.. You don''t need a lot of friends..


    Just a few.. Ones you can really, really trust..


    I wasn''t very good at it, but keep up with your studies and practice your ninjutsu hard..


    Remember that everyone has strengths and weaknesses..


    So don''t get too depressed if you can''t do something well..


    Respect your teachers and upperclassmen at the Academy..


    Oh, and this is important.. It''s about the Three Prohibitions for a shinobi..


    Be extra careful about lending and borrowing money..


    Put your mission wages into your savings account..


    No alcohol until you''re twenty.. Too much can ruin your health, so drink in moderation..


    Another Prohibition is women..


    I''m a woman, so I don''t know too much about this but..


    All you need to remember is that this world is made up of men and women..


    So it''s only natural to take an interest in girls..


    But just don''t get hooked on bad women.. Find someone just like me..


    Speaking of the Three Prohibitions, be wary of Jiraiya Sensei, you know..


    Naruto, from now on, you''re going to face lots of pain and hardship..


    Be true to yourself.. Have a dream and have the confidence to make that dream come true..


    There''s so much.. Oh, so much more that I want to pass on to you.. I wish I could stay with you longer..


    I love you"


    She turned back to face minato and said weakly, "i''m sorry it looks like i took most of your time as well "


    Minato shook his head and said, "don''t worry about is kushina it''s all right "


    He then turned to look at his son for the last time and said, " I love you my son, you and your mother are what''s most precious to me " with his words he finally stopped resisting making the shinigami pull his soul immediately.


    During the pull he thought regretfully ''i wish i could spend more time with my family ''


    { don''t worry your wish shall be granted } an melodious voice said as he felt the pulling of his soul stop for a moment.


    Slowly opening his eyes he saw that he was brought into a black and white world. As he looked around he realised that what he was seeing was the present situation. He also saw his dead body slowly falling down Kushina''s back. He tried to talk with the people but strangely enough they couldn''t hear him or see him.


    Just as he was about to be vexed he again heard that voice," calm down Minato, the dead can''t interact with the living. " Turning around he saw a girl no older than 10 walking towards him.


    "Who are you?" he asked with caution. Although he didn''t know what was happening he didn''t dare let his guard down.


    The girl chuckled at his behaviour and said a bit of sarcasm " why are you so weary you are already dead so it''s not like I could kill you again. "


    At her words Minato felt a bit awkward. True since he is already dead there isn''t anything she could do to harm him. He scratched his face awkwardly and asked , "eh sorry but who are you and is this the belly of the shinigami "


    The girl shook her head and said, "no this is what you could call the pure land. More specifically, this is my domain in the pure land. And as for who am I , well let''s wait a bit for that. It would be a hassle to introduce myself twice after all. "


    While Minato was puzzled he soon got his answer as Kushina began to appear near him. She too looked at her surroundings with confusion but when she saw Minato she threw herself at him. Minato too, with practice ease hugged her and began to console her.


    The girl, although felt touched, decided to stop their union. She couldn''t keep their souls for a long time in her domain after all. She coughed twice to announce her presence.


    Kushina, hearing someone else''s voice, turned around to see a girl with long black hair with silver strands wearing what looked like a kimono which made her too cute. As if something was awakened inside of her, she broke free from Minato''s embrace and hugged the poor little girl.


    "Kyaaa how cute , what is your name sweety, do you want to come with aunty kushina , minato can we keep her "


    Minato smiled wryly at his wife''s behaviour. It seems like having Naruto might have awakened Kushina''s motherly instincts.


    While girl who was now fighting a life and death battle to breath thought internally ,''damn it if i knew this would happen i would have come in my adult form "


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read advance chapters please visit my Patreon /Nauty_Manu?iscover new chapters at novelhall.com

 Chapter 2

    Chapter 2


    There is a saying that says ¡® when one ages the more his intelligence grows ¡® but now I''m seriously doubting this saying.


    Hey there if you haven''t already released already I am your typical novel protagonist. In this life my name is Izanami Otsutsuki, the daughter of Hagoromo O?tsutsuki.


    Yeah shocking right. The sage of six paths is my dad. Well at least in this life l had a decent childhood.


    You see, before I was reborn in this world I was a simple office worker who only managed to get a job at a third rate company that might as well sell us as slaves.


    You see, in my previous life I was an orphan at birth since my parents decided it would be a wise choice to abandon me in the hospital. Shocking right. They used fake ids and fled before even taking me. How that is possible is something I''m curious about. They didn''t even give me a name before going away.


    In my childhood I dreamed of becoming a cop and finding those two but reality is often disappointing. While I have decent athletic talent, my academic skills are not so good. Hell, I was even surprised that I got this job. And to be a cop you need some good grades so there you have it dream shattered.


    Well putting aside my depressing past I died at the age of 35 after saving a dude who jumped to protect his kid. Yeah I know I just don''t want that kid to experience what I experienced after all.


    Although I had some regrets, I''d say my actions are worth it. If that kid gets to have another day with his parents I''d totally be satisfied.


    Too bad I couldn''t finish some of the manga I just bought. Oh right before I forget I''m what you guys call an otaku. Hey, don''t judge me for someone who can only spend most of his day in an office. Manga and anime are the only things that might as well be interesting.


    Well anyway before my soul entered the cycle of reincarnation it was pulled in by this guy who calls himself mr. Joy.


    He said that he is the overseer of the world of naruto and he needed someone to help him manage that world. You see in Naruto world the reincarnation cycle is barely working. Since most of the inhabitants who died with so much regret they are unable to go on. So the pure land was created to make them leave their regrets. But due to that world¡¯s mentality the number of souls who are forever staying in the pure land increased each passing year. Mr. Joy said that it is mainly due to them going to war for the silliest reason. And what¡¯s ,more since ninja¡¯s fight on the borders of each land affecting the lives of the civilians making the death count way higher than it was in the official records.


    So my job is to manage the pure land without letting it overflow. In doing so Mr.Joy said that he will give me three reasonable wishes.


    And when he said reasonably what he meant is that no Op cheat power, no plunder system, no immortality, no mind control superpower. Anything in his acceptable limit will be allowed.


    Seeing that my short cut was cut off, I thought about this for a long time. And for an hour straight I asked about my new job details and such to further think about my options.


    And after careful consideration i told him my wishes,


    My first is for an independent space that has access to the pure land where I could retreat if necessary and do my duties without any security issues. Who knows what I will face when black Zetsu finds out about me.


    My second wish is for me to have a body that is perfect to cultivate any energy I desire. I mainly asked that since in the Naruto verse you must have a natural affinity to master Sage mode. And no sir, I will not leave that to luck.


    ~ Izanami Pov ~


    ¡°Thank you for your help , if you hadn¡¯t helped me I would sure that i would have met my father today ¡° said Izumi as she bowed towards minato.


    Minato waved his hand and said,¡±please don¡¯t think too much about it. In fact I should be the one apologising for my wife¡¯s action. I¡¯m truly sorry for the trouble my wife has caused ¡° saying so he also bowed.


    Izumi lifted her head and said softly ¡°you really are kind. If you were born in little hashi¡¯s era you might be the perfect hokage this village needed.¡±


    ¡°Huh¡±both Minato and Kushina had question marks on top of her heads.


    The girl smiled and said,¡±greetings my name is Izanami Otsutsuki the one who manages the pure land and the cycle of reincarnation¡±


    At first Minato and Kushina were shocked, then their shock turned to caution. They both knew that beings who managed the death are not simple. Take the shinigami for example. He could even divide the nine tails with just a casual swing.


    Looking at their cautious expressions Izunami chuckled and said ¡° don¡¯t worry i¡¯m not here to harm you. And besides, didn''t I tell you before MInato what could I do to a dead person even more to someone I am about to propose a deal with? ¡°


    ¡°A deal ¡°minato frowned as he asked this.


    ¡°Yes this deal would be beneficial for both of you as well as your son, so what you guys say ¡°Izanami asked while smiling like a devil which honestly made her only look cuter.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 3

    Chapter 3


    ¡° What is this deal you offer? Kushina asked after controlling her instinct to lunge at her.


    Izanami smile and replied , ¡° Kushina as someone who is immune the brainwashing konoha is doing how would you define this village ¡°


    Kushina was stunned for a moment before a look of resignation appeared in her face. She faced Minato with a helpless smile and said, ¡°konoha is a village that is full of darkness.¡±


    Minato, hearing her words, was stunned. You should know he is still the hokage you know. And hearing those words from his wife no less made it more impactable for him. Minato may not show it but he would often hear Kushina¡¯s words as reference when he is making decisions. Kushina, as a person who was born from Uzushiogakure, has a different perspective of things which is very helpful for him.


    Izanami, ignoring Minato''s dilemma, continued speaking. For Mianto to truly understand the situation he needed to understand his vallage¡¯s nature more clearly. ¡° Then let me ask you how you would define the higher ups of your village.¡±


    She thought for a while and said, ¡° greedy and hypocritical ¡°.


    Again kushina¡¯s words managed to hurt Minato more. And as the smart person he is he began to realise where this conversation is going .¡±Naruto ¡°he mumbled with a gaze full of worry.


    Izanami nodded and said, ¡±yes it is as you suspected the village would take action against your son. In Fact he is already sent to an orphanage. His inheritance was confiscated and all the people who would want to adopt him were warned not to. And in a few days there would be a rumour going around in Konoha that the demon fox has reincarnated as a child in the village. And by pure coincidence a child will be found who has whiskers in one of the many orphanages in konoha.¡±


    Each word she spoke Kushina and Minato¡¯s faces turned pale. Although they want to disagree with her in their hearts they know what she is saying is very possible to do. But even so ,


    ¡°No, the third hokage won¡¯t allow it, not to mention there is Jiraiya and Kakashi. I¡¯m sure they won¡¯t let Naruto experience such hardships¡± Minato said with hope filling his eyes. Even if the elders want to use Naruto¡¯s inheritance for themselves they have to back off when Jiraiya or the third hokage refuses. But the next moment his hope was shattered.


    ¡° Not necessarily, you see, your third Hokage is a huge hypocrite. He says that he is too old for the hokage position but when asked to hand over the position he spouts some nonsense about not having enough will of fire. This is also why even when you were selected as the hokage he didn¡¯t hand over most of his authorities to you. Hell, even 65% of the anbu is still loyal to him. To solidify his position he even massacred the senju clan. ¡° Izanami said, shaking her head.


    Minato at that moment lost his footing and almost collapsed into the ground if Kushina wasn''t there to catch him. He now realised that he has doomed his son''s future by making him the nine tails Jinchu?riki.Visitt  for the latest updates


    ¡° Well don''t lose hope too soon. Although I can''t directly interfere in Naruto''s life, I can still make sure he is healthy. ¡° Izanami said, making them looked at her with surprise.


    ¡° Why would you do this for us? What is it that you want from us? ¡° Kushina asked, puzzled.


    ¡°Hmm you could say it is an investment for the future.¡± izanami replied with a smile.


    ¡° What do you want us to do? ¡° It was Minato who asked this time. His sunny smile is now gone. Now he looked like a determined father who would do anything for their child.


    ¡° No need to be so worked up. You see, what I want from you is very simple. I want you to train Naruto in secret. Develop his skills for seals and battle instinct. Make him what you always want him to be. A good person ¡°At izanami¡¯s words both MInato and Kushina were once again stunned. Isn¡¯t this offer too great for them? They casted doubtful glances at Izanami asking whether she is trolling them.


    Izanami chuckled and said, ¡° don¡¯t give me such a look. I truly meant it when I said Naruto will be an investment. ¡°


    ¡° but there has to be some catch for this isn''t there. ¡° MInato asked, making Izanami smile again. She truly liked it when someone caught on to her point very quickly.


    Just as Hiruzen was going through the reports and making some very dangerous decisions he heard a knock on his door. Taking his gaze from the paper he called for the person to come in.


    The door opened and the anbu who was in charge of protecting Naruto came in. Looking at the anbu he asked,


    ¡° is there anything unusual to report about Naruto ¡°


    The Anbu replied ¡° No Hokage sama. I just finished my shift and came here in case Hokage sama wanted to inquire about the child. ¡°


    ¡°Oh I see, tell me is the seal holding well. Did any chakra leakage happen? Or did anyone suspicious try to come in contact with Naruto. ¡°


    ¡° No hokage sama the seal is perfectly fine. And no one suspicious came in contact with Naruto. Although some of the Fourth hokage¡¯s friends did come near the orphanage to observe Naruto they all kept their distance. ¡°


    ¡° I see thank you for the hard work you can leave now, ¡° Hiruzen said, dismissing Anbu. Although he didn¡¯t show it, he is displeased with the ones who came to see Naruto. They are going to be a hindrance to his plan for Naruto. ¡® i should properly give them a warning in the next council meeting. We also need to find a way to get some money to rebuild the village. ¡®


    The anbu who was about to leave suddenly thought of something and asked hesitantly ¡°hokage sama there is this necklace around Naruto¡¯s neck. Do we need to remove it ¡°


    ¡®Hmm necklace, when did Naruto have a necklace I should tell them to get it here ...... no i wouldn''t touch that necklace, it was there in the beginning and there is nothing wrong about it. It is just something Naruto was given. It is just a normal looking necklace. Nothing special about it¡¯ Hiruzen thought with a lost look in his eyes for a moment as he thought about that necklace. Once his eyes gained clarity he spoke to the anbu ¡° don¡¯t worry about that necklace it something i gave to Naruto. It is just a necklace I was intending to give him when he was born. ¡°


    The anbu nodded and said his farewells and left the office. He didn¡¯t ask anything about the necklace again like he was in a trance.


    When the anbu left, Hiruzen resumed his paperwork and completely forgot about the mysterious necklace.


    Looking at him in the corner of the room there was a girl who was relaxing on the sofa. She was smiling widely after listening to their conversation. But strangely enough Hiruzen and anbu didn¡¯t sense her even when she was in the same room.


    The girl Izanami stood up from her seat and said softly, ¡° well it looks like my work here is done for today. I am really looking forward to the future now ¡° with her words she simply vanished out of existence like a ghost.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 4

    Chapter 4


    In the land of fire in one of the small towns in one of the many casinos, there was an unusual crowd gathered. Although such a crowd gathering wouldn¡¯t be a surprise for a well known casino in the fire capital but for a third rate casino such as this it certainly is surprising. And what¡¯s more the crowd is just gathering around one gambling table.


    On one side of the table there sat a fair-skinned woman with brown eyes and straight blonde hair that parts above her forehead. Her hair has shoulder-length bangs that frame her face and the rest reaches her lower back. She wears a grass-green haori with the kanji for "gamble" (Ù€, kake) on the back, inside a red circle. Underneath she wears a grey, kimono-style blouse with no sleeves, held closed by a broad, dark bluish-grey obi that matches her pants. Her blouse is closed quite low, revealing her sizable cleavage. She wears open-toed, strapped black sandals with high heels. She has red nail polish on both her fingernails and toenails and uses a soft pink lipstick.


    She is Tsunade Senju the granddaughter of the first hokage Hashirama Senju. Like her grandfather she also has many titles. Such as Konoha''s Slug Princess Tsunade , One of the legendary Sannin, The best as the world''s strongest kunoichi and its greatest medical-nin. Although these titles are super cool, most people don¡¯t recognize Tsunade¡¯s name when hearing it. Because these days she is well known as The Legendary Sucker.


    ¡° 1...2...3... open¡± said the dealer as he showed the dice.


    ¡° Yeah, I won again¡± said one of guys who won the bet.


    ¡° Me too, today is my lucky day¡± said another.


    Similar conversations were taking place in the gambling table except for Tsunade who gritted her teeth in losing again.


    ¡° Tsunade sama please let¡¯s stop for today. You have already spent most of our money. If you gamble even more we would have no money to spend on our food or for the inn. ¡° said a fair-skinned woman of average height and slender build with onyx eyes and jet-black hair; her hair is straight and shoulder-length with bangs that cover her ears and frame her face. She wore a long bluish-black kimono with white trimmings, held closed by a white obi, and open-toed sandals with low heels. In her hand there is a pink pig.


    This girl is Shizune . She is a jo?nin of Konohagakure. An apprentice of Tsunade, Making her a talented medical-nin. She is also the niece of Tsunade¡¯s late lover. In her hand she held her pet Tonton. Due to Tsunade¡¯s irresponsible spending Shizune often had to endure hunger. But even so she didn¡¯t leave Tsunade. She will just beg and cry for Tsunade to stop her irresponsible actions. But sadly Tsunade never listened. Her stubbornness is something she inherited from her grandfather after all.


    ¡° don¡¯t worry about it Shizune, I will definitely win the next match. ¡° Tsunade waved her concerns off like usual and placed another bet.


    The others who saw placing a bet all unanimously placed theirs in the opposite one. This is how they won every match. Everyone who knew about Tsunade¡¯s reputation always placed their bet in the opposite one she placed as she never won a game.


    But surprisingly this time it was different. When the dealer revealed the dice it was Tsunade who won. There were cries of despair as some of them lost a lot of money. The greediest ones even placed everything they had.


    But Tsunade, contrary to what everyone expected, didn''t seem happy. She even had a deep frown on her face. She immediately stood up and said, ¡° Shizune we leaving pack everything quickly ¡°


    Shizune, although surprised, did as she was told without asking for any more details. As someone who went to war and survived, Tsunade''s instinct for danger is not to be underestimated. She immediately collected their prize money and left the casino with Tsunade.


    As soon as they left the casino Tsunade said, ¡° we are leaving town immediately, something terrible is about to happen to us if we stay here today ¡±


    ¡° How rude, speaking as though me visiting you is a bad omen. Little hashi did a poor job educating his favourite grandchild¡± said a voice making both Tsunade and Shizune surprised.


    Turning around they saw a little wearing a black kimono with white floral designs. Her long black hair danced to the wind tune making a serene scene. She walked towards them with an innocent smile on her face.


    But for Tsunade and Shizune this girl is anything but innocent. As ninja¡¯s they are very good at judging an opponent''s strength with their presence and chakra. And the girl in front of them has no presence and no chakra. And this is impossible. Every living being has chakra even if that amount is abysmal. For someone to hide their chakra amount their chakra control and strength must be better than the other person. And Tsunade who prided herself in her excellent chakra control can¡¯t even feel anything from this girl. This shows how dangerous this girl is. If she didn''t take the initiative to reveal herself first Tsunade doubted she can survive a sneak attack from her.


    Even though she is scared shitless Tsunade didn¡¯t dare to show it in her face. She asked arrogantly ¡° huh what is a brat like you doing here? ¡°Geett the latest novels at novelhall.com


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° and that makes it a total of 25 spankings tsuna chan¡± izanami said cheerfully as she eyed the pale Tsunade.


    What she did to Tsunade was simple. She simply conjured a gambling table and made Tsunade gamble with her. If she wins, the number of spankings she receives would go higher, and if by some miracle Tsunade wins she will get 100,000 ryo for each win. This is the same way she disciplined Hashirama, as someone who has a gambling habit he would gamble without looking at the consequences. There was this one time where he got 100 spankings because of his losses.


    ¡° Shizune we are escaping here ¡° suddenly Tsunade shouted as she dropped a smoke bomb. And without any delay she dashed away. Behind her Shizune also followed her as though she is used to this kind of behaviour. But before they could go too far they were restrained by some tree roots that came from the ground.


    Due to her shock Tsunade stopped abruptly making it very easy to restrain her quickly. But she didn¡¯t register what was happening to her. Her mind stopped working after seeing the wood release. It was just after she was covered in wood did she snap out of it. She tried to break free from the restraints with her strength but to her surprise she couldn¡¯t.


    ¡° It¡¯s no use, you cannot break those restraints with just with your chakra. Maybe if you use that seal but if that came to that i will just let the wood use their chakra absorptions property. ¡° came the girl¡¯s reply as she walked towards Tsunade with slow steps.


    ¡° Who are you, how do you have this bloodline release? Are you one of Orochimaru¡¯s test subjects¡± Tsunade asked with anger. The only ones who should be able to use wood release are Senjus. And Tsunade didn¡¯t feel the familiarity one would have if one were a Senju from her. So the only option would be she is an artificially wood release user. And to artificially make a wood release user you would need to use her grandpa''s cells.


    ¡°Calm down girl, My name is Izanami O?tsutsuki and no I¡¯m not one of your teammates'' experiment subjects. As for why I can use wood release it¡¯s quite simple, I am the one who taught little hashi how to perfect his wood release. And to do that I need to have it too you know. And do you seriously believe Hashirama could make that much jutsu on his own. ¡° Izanami asked making Tsunade silent.


    This is something she is curious about too. Hashirama can be many things but he isn¡¯t smart enough to create that much wood release jutsus. Even her Granduncle couldn¡¯t have helped since he has no idea on how wood release worked.


    ¡° How can I believe you are not lying?¡± she asked just to confirm this.


    Izanami didn¡¯t say anything, she just showed Tsunade a necklace she hung on her neck. It was a simple necklace with two angel wings. This should be enough to believe her. And from the look on her face it seems like she believes her now.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 5

    Chapter 5


    Hashirama Senju who was hailed as the God of Shinobi was someone who is respected and feared in the whole world. But even so in his childhood he was just a normal child that hated wars. So how did someone like him become so powerful that all the elemental nations have to bow before his name. The answer was that he had a teacher who guided him.


    Due to his teacher¡¯s instructions he kept her name and identity a secret but as a sign of respect and gratitude towards her he and his fellow student and friend Madara wrote a diary. In the annals of history this is the second time where both he and Madara joined forces in creating something.


    This book had two parts, one which was written by Hashirama while the other was written by Madara. In this book they both wrote their experiences they had during her tutelage. They originally thought it would be better to place it in the Konoha grand library as a sign of good partnership between the Senju and Uchiha clans. But they decided against it as some other clans came to migrate with them.


    At that time they thought these clans would fight over it as the book was written by them. And they couldn''t be blamed as anything Madara or Hashirama used could be a treasure for those clans. So they decided to pass this book on as a family heritage.


    And Tsunade as a direct descendant of Hashirma naturally read through it. At that time she also thought it would be some kind of secret technique her grandpa decided to pass on. And imagine her surprise after she finished reading. At that time she tried to find the other part of the book as it said to contain a surprise if someone brought the two of them together. But she was disappointed when she realised that Madara took the other half away.


    Anyways what Izanami showed them, the necklace was something that was mentioned in the book. It is said that this necklace is also the symbol of this teacher¡¯s clan. So if someone is wearing this necklace that person will also represent the teacher. And this necklace couldn¡¯t be replicated so there would be no frauds.


    ¡° So you are my grandpa''s secret teacher.¡± exclaimed Tsunade in shock.


    ¡° That''s right, I am that mysterious teacher little Hashi mentioned in his book. ¡° Izanami said in a bit of nostalgia.


    As someone who lived a long time she was bored most of the time. So as a hobby she began to teach some students. And in the era where Hashirma and Madara lived she just happened to live near the place where those two boys meet each other secretly.


    So she began to teach them to pass the time while also thinking it would be quite interesting. And she was right. Both of them resembled Ashura and Indra so much that everyday with them was always something to look forward to.


    And the one who benefited most was Hashirma. Due to wood release being very special for a normal human wield there was rarely any user of it in the Senju clan. Even some of Ashura¡¯s reincarnations didn¡¯t have it. So no one bothered to leave any detailed records or instructions about it. Due to that most of the wood release jutsus Hashirama has were given to him by her.


    ¡° So now that you are certain of my identity, let''s finish this punishment. We have a lot of things to discuss after all, ¡° Izanami said with a big smile. No matter how old she is as an otaku, she always wanted to beat some sense into Tsunade who she previously thought was too arrogant.


    ¡°Wait, you are serious about that, ¡° Tsunade asked in horror.


    ¡® She is too skilled in reading people¡¯s expressions ¡® Tsunade thought with a grim look. Izanami here is the natural enemy of all the negotiators in this world as even if they could mask their expressions Izanami would still be able read them like a book.


    ¡° You are simply thinking too much of this Tsunade, if this continues we will be stuck here forever ¡° Izanami complained as she lightly flicked Tsunade¡¯s forehead.


    Tsunade took a deep breath to calm her mind down. Yes she would just stress her mind if she continued to think deeply about everything.


    ¡° So why do you want to meet me? ¡° Tsunade asked finally after sitting in one of the seats Izanami had prepared for this discussion. And to no one¡¯s surprise Izanami was already sitting in hers.


    ¡° Well it¡¯s nothing too big but can you guys come to my hidden Village and stay there? Since the fourth Hokage died yesterday I think some fools would come to eliminate you so you don¡¯t be the next Hokage as you are very suitable for the role ¡° Izanami said.


    ¡° What do you mean eliminate me and how the hell did that Minato brat died, And who the hell wants that stupid position? ¡° Tsunade shouted as she hit the table they were using. She lost her cool very quickly.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 6

    Chapter 6


    ¡° Yesterday after the wife of the fourth hokage gave birth she was attacked by a masked man. His aim was the nine tail inside of her. Fortunately Minato managed to rescue his son before the mask man killed him.


    A series of events happened and the nine tails was released into Konaha making the village suffer heavy damage. At that time some one thought it would be a good idea to give the Uchiha clan a curfew to suppress them. And due to this stupid result the death count went higher due to the ninja¡¯s being unfamiliar with the escape routes.


    Anyway the fourth hokage with help of his weakened wife sealed half of the Kyuubi in his son and half in himself. But as a result of this sealing they were both killed by an angry fox whose pride was stepped on.


    Due to Konaha losing their hokage Hiruzen took his position again making more than one person dissatisfied. So they will hold a high-level meeting today. Most of the clan heads are still quite dissatisfied with Hiruzen so they will urge him to select the Fifth Hokage. But they won¡¯t pressure him too much as they themselves have their handful in dealing the aftermath.


    But in that council there is an idiot whose patience is running low these days. He will eliminate all the obstacles for him to be hokage even if it meant crippling the village even more.


    So you get what I mean now? ¡° Izanami asked Tsunade, whose expression turned sour.


    ¡° Yeah Danzo will come after me due to my position as a possible candidate for the Hokage even if I am against taking the position. ¡° she said with a tired sigh. She left the village hoping to get away from all of this mess but it seems like that is too much to ask for.


    ¡° won''t the third hokage protect master Tsunade if he was notified?¡± Shizune asked in worry. Due to Tsunade¡¯s stubborn nature she didn¡¯t tell the dark things about the village to Shizune so she is mostly unaware how hypocritical their third hokage is.


    Izanami glared at Tsunade and scolded, ¡° why didn¡¯t you tell her Tsunade, do you truly believe your beloved teacher would protect her if she was unaware of the truth? Face the facts Tsunade you can¡¯t run away from reality forever. ¡°


    Tsunade gritted her teeth but she didn¡¯t argue. How could she when all the evidence is right in front of her? After she got Hemophobia she investigated the mysterious deaths from the Senju clan. And she found out that her teacher deliberately issued the most dangerous missions to the Senju clan and even during team missions only the Senju clan member would die by an enemy attack. She further found out that the civilians who had some Senju blood would mysteriously disappear. That¡¯s when she found out about the horrifying truth: her sensei and his three advisers are destroying the Senju and Uchiha clans.


    ¡° Calm down a bit Tsunade, they are in my village which unlike the existing villages is actually hidden. In that village there are numerous clans and civilian families I rescued in the past.


    So I''m going to ask you again will you come to my village until you can protect yourself or is out of danger. ¡° Izanami asked again


    ¡° Of course I will come. How could I not when there are people from my clan there.¡± Tsunade said excitedly.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 7

    Chapter 7


    In the land of hot springs three individuals who wore hoods walked through the crowd towards a rather luxurious area. This area was famous amongst tourists for it is where most could buy souvenirs.


    The three of them didn¡¯t pay any heed to the stalls that sell many unique items. They continued their journey until they arrived at a luxurious building which is called ¡® Takamagahara ¡¯ .


    Without any hesitation they all entered the building. When they arrived at the lobby, a guard came over to ask about their business due to all of them hiding their identity.


    ¡° What can I do to help you, dear guest, are you here to check in or meet someone.¡± the guard respectfully while also secretly signalling to his colleagues to help him if these guests just turned out to be troublemakers.


    The shortest of the three stepped forward and showed her necklace while also showing the red ring in her hand. She said ¡° we would like a private room for a week. Since we are tired, can we get some rest before doing the necessary procedures?¡±


    The guard paused and bowed respectfully to her and said ¡° yes i will see to that, would you require me to escort you¡±


    ¡°Nah i know the way, i hope my usual room is still available. ¡° She asked as she walked forward.


    ¡° Yes madam, that room will always be reserved for you, ¡° said the guard with a smile. He watched as the guests disappeared into the building.


    His colleagues who were waiting for any signal to intervene if necessary relaxed their muscles. One of them came to guard and asked, ¡° so why did you all formal all of a sudden ¡°


    The guard smiled and said, ¡° of course i have to be formal to our leader¡±


    Understanding what his friend said the other also showed a smile, ¡° well that¡¯s a surprise, i thought she never used this way to go there ¡°


    The latter shrugged and said, ¡° well we are too young to imagine what kinds of thoughts run through her head, maybe she came because she wanted to see us or maybe she came here on a whim who knows¡±


    ¡° hahaha that¡¯s true for someone like her, our normal thinking can¡¯t fathom her motives ¡° like the guards began to talk back and forth about how abnormal their leader is.


    While the said leader Izanami was twitching her eye every time she heard those two dimwits talk about her abnormal ways of life. She made a mental note to punish those two when they are off of their shift.


    The moment they went outside they were stunned. What they came out with was a building that looked like a shrine which means it is situated in a very high place. Because of this they could see the village scenery more clearly.


    They were no longer in the land of hot springs, no in fact they were longer on land. They were now on a floating island. How did they find that out, well da the clouds that a normal human couldn¡¯t is now just in their arms reach now.


    ¡° Well I would close my mouth if i were you, just to be safe in case a fly goes in there ¡° hearing this remark they turned to Izanami who was smiling at them.


    Looking at Izanami they saw she had taken off her hood. Her black hair danced to the blowing wind. She spread her hands and said , ¡° Girls I welcome you to Japan the land of the rising Sun¡±


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 8

    Chapter 8


    ¡° So did you enjoy the view? ¡° Izanami asked cheekily. She always liked to see the looks of surprise in the ones that come here for the first time. Tsunade and Shizune didn¡¯t answer her. They were too tired and shocked to answer her right now.


    Seeing them like this Izanami shook her head and said aloud, ¡° sigh it looks like they are too shocked to hear me, hey Nanami can you bring us a car, I¡¯m thinking of letting them rest soon ¡°


    Hearing her words a girl appeared in front of Izanami. She wore a black clothings that covered most of her features. She also wore a mask that looked like a fox. She answered Izanami¡¯s request , ¡° I shall see to it matriarch ¡°. Saying so she disappeared like she was never there to begin with.


    Tsunade, who was listening to their conversation, had cold sweat running down her back. She could barely sense the girl and if she didn¡¯t appear in front of her she might as well not realise about her. ¡® This village is scary ¡® she thought internally.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡® I love this village ¡® Tsunade thought as she drank a huge wine barrel. After they went to the village in what Izanami called a car, they arrived at a place which looked like a Daimyo''s castle. And from what Izanami was saying it might be one since this place is her home.


    When they arrived at their rooms the first thing Tsunade did when she was asked in what she wanted do was say, ¡° I need a drink to cool my head down ¡°


    Izanami nodded and asked a maid to give her what she wanted. The maid went and soon came with a barrel that had a few runes carved on it. When asked what it was she explained,


    Since the villagers are not coming forward to challenge her position she thought it would be a good idea to hold an election so maybe she can go home. But no she won the election by securing 99% percent of the total votes. And that 1% was her vote .


    ¡° Sigh hey Nanami how is the world taking Minato¡¯s and Kushina¡¯s death. Izanami asked, hoping to change the subject.


    Nanami¡¯s expression turned serious as she typed a few words in her phone a few times before answering. ¡± Hidden cloud and Hidden stone are keeping it low for now. They would try poking Konaha to gauge their reaction. But ultimately they wouldn¡¯t do anything too brazen since they are still recovering from the aftermath of the Third Ninja War. As for the other nations they are laying low on this one. Most are too weak to do anything now. But Konoha ninja bounties seemed to have increased. ¡±


    ¡° Sigh, typical, those nations would in courage the bounty hunters to do their dirty work. I think the most likely culprits are the Daimyos. Sigh little Hashi it seems like everyone wants a part of your village ¡° Izanami said with a tired sigh.


    ¡° Let the Yokai unit know that they are allowed to bring any victims who would be caught in this mess¡± Izanami ordered. This was her usual order when these types of things happened.


    A ninja village thought to test the waters and attacks a part of the enemy nation. The civilians in those nearby areas sometimes died without knowing why. So Izanami usually rescues those people with her elite guard unit Yokai. So on this island most of the people are civilians who were rescued by Izanami.


    But unlike the civilians in Konoha where they only know how to complain, here civilians are allowed to create clans if they have suitable qualifications. For example there are a group of civilians who are very good at making a unique licker then they could apply to register themselves as a clan that specialises in making Likers. After they were officially registered they could use that clan name to promote their goods and make huge businesses with other clans. If they are lucky they may be able to sell their goods outside.


    Because of this rule there are numerous clans in Japan. Some are clans specialised in fighting like the Yuki, Hagoromo, Senju. Some specialise in sealing like the Uzumaki. There are some who specialise in blacksmithing like Kagutsuchi, Masamune or Go?ka.


    Due to this unique culture the life of a civilian or a clan member was not much different. The only difference they have is that clan members could ask for guidance in their matters from the clan while civilians have to find suitable people for guidance.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 9

    Chapter 9


    ~ 1 week later ~


    In Japan there stood a building that has a history as old as the island itself. This building is quite special for residents in Japan. This is all due to one simple reason which is , This is the place where the important decisions would be made every month. They call this building the Jade palace.


    The Jade palace has numerous rooms for different purposes such as Meeting rooms, guest rooms, dining rooms etc. Due to it holding a significant value to the Village most of the time it is guarded by Shadow garden, a unit that is tasked in protecting the Village in the shadows.


    Today the Jade palace is quite lively. Since the monthly meeting would be held today, various clan heads and department heads came to the Jade palace to participate in the meeting.


    Although any party can participate in this meeting they usually send their representatives to speak on behalf of them . For the major clans the clan heads take this responsibility. For the smaller clans they will not participate until they want to ask for permission for something their respective department heads couldn''t do.


    There are various departments in Japan. Most of the time these departments are managed by the clans such as the Sealing department by the Uzumaki. Of course non Uzumaki can also join this department or even become a department head. But that rarely happens as most clans usually are specialised in their respective fields.


    Anyway even though this is an unorthodox way of governing the village with izanami¡¯s leadership skills the village was thriving . This is also one of the reasons why no one fights for Village head position as they don¡¯t have the confidence to lead the people as smoothly as she could.


    In the room where the meeting was supposed to be held the atmosphere was quite lively. Various clan heads who were mostly busy due to their busy schedules often come early to catch up with each other. So most clan leaders and department heads are busy partying with each other. And if someone from earth looked at how they party they will most likely say that this is a yakuza gathering.


    ¡° say Kazuma how is the recent project going, the one the matrach wanted. ¡° asked a middle aged man with a black hair and a beautiful face.


    He is the clan head of the Yuki clan which was said to be wiped out in The Land of Water. Similar to the Uzumaki, they were rescued by Izanami and were tasked in running the public security department. Due to their good looks they were quite famous in the village.


    ¡° Oh I already delivered that to the matriarch already. I gotta say using seals to create a pocket dimension and then anchoring it to a necklace is something only she can think of. Don¡¯t you agree with me Haruko? ¡° said Kazuma while drinking some sake from his cup.


    Kazuma is the clan leader of the Uzumaki clan and also the head of the Sealing department. His age is similar to Minato but with his red beard he appeared much older. Due to coming to the village with similar situations he and Haruko who is also known as Haruko Yuki got along together. And both of them are quite good friends.


    Soon the door that led to this meeting room opened and Iznami came in. Beside there were Nanami and another man who was dressed like a young master. He had hair quite similar to Iznami but unlike her he didn¡¯t have any silver strands in her hair.


    Looking at his expression, Izanami''s expression softened. When Kazuma came to the village he was just barely 7 years old. So Izanami saw him as one of her own children. And looking at his expression she said softly , ¡° Kazuma ¡°


    Kazuma turned to her. His eyes had lost most of its light. Izanami, unable to bear it said, ¡° Kazuma although I know it is cruel for me to say but you must move on. You have a nephew you know. Remember the necklace I asked you to make. I gave it to him. And also all hope is not lost you know. I managed to anchor part of their souls to the necklace. If we are lucky they could regenerate their souls and be able to have a chance to be reborn again. ¡°


    Hope began to come back into his eyes as he thought of what he just heard. Yes with seals it is possible for someone to stay in this world if they have a suitable body and a full soul. This is the same principle Orochimaru uses.


    ¡° Matriarch, can I meet my nephew?¡± Kazuma suddenly asked. Since that child is in Konoha without anyone to look after him. He wanted to confirm his well being.


    Izanami didn''t speak but her aide Nanami spoke on behalf of her , ¡° That would be difficult for now. And you calm down first . This matter is also related to what we are about to discuss ¡°


    She looked at Vali who nodded and changed the content on everyone''s screens. There instead of a report about the nine tails attack. There is a report on what happened in the high level meeting in Konoha. In that report there is something mentioned about a child that would not be adopted by anyone due to him being the Jinchu?riki.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 10

    Chapter 10


    ¡° Konoha can¡¯t be this foolish right? ¡° asked a man who looked like he didn''t want to be here. This man is Akira Kurokage. He is the clan leader of the Kurokage clan and also holds the position of captain commander. His duty is to rate the missions that would be given to the Yokai unit. And like the Nara clan , the Kurokage clan are born strategists. So he could easily guess what Konoha wanted to do with their Jinchu?riki .


    ¡° Yes, they want to isolate him. Although this might have high risks, the rewards are equally high for them not to try this option, ¡° said another man who was drinking his wine without any care. His name is Sachiko Takahashi, the master strategist of the village. Although he looks lazy, that couldn¡¯t be farther from the truth. In fact he is someone who could be considered a master at strategists. So his brain always tends to strategize even the little details. So he is usually busy with his time drinking to not over exhaust his brain.


    ¡° Damn those Konoha elders ¡° shouted Kazuma as he gritted his teeth in anger. As someone who was from the clan that was once betrayed by their closest allies he naturally doesn¡¯t have any good opinion of the higher ups of konoha. And in the report he clearly saw that Hokage made every family who wanted to adopt Naruto back down. His reason: ¡® Because Naruto¡¯s background would be known and his life would be in danger¡¯. What a load of bulshit. Did he think the other hidden villages have that much time and resources to go on a hunt for one child?. Even if they somehow wasted many resources to find him, how long would they continue their search?


    Kazuma began to curse the third Hokage and his advisers repeatedly for the next 20 minutes. Others who saw his expression didn¡¯t disturb. The Uzumaki are well known for their lack of awareness. So when they get angry they don¡¯t beat around the bush and directly speak about it to their face. The others ignored him for now and continued their discussion with Izanami.


    ¡°Matriarch, what do you propose we should do about this? From what we gathered so far the other villages may use this chance to attack Konoha again. If we tread carefully we may be able to rescue Kazuma''s nephew. ¡°Said Sachiko with a serious look. Since he is called a master strategist, when Izanami wanted to do something he would naturally come up with a strategy to help her cause.


    Izanami looked at everyone again and sighed. He gave them a helpless smile and said, ¡°As much as I want to bring Kazuma¡¯s nephew here I currently have my hands tied on this. You should read this too get the bigger picture Sachiko ¡°


    Sachiko raised his eyebrows at Izanami¡¯s wording. You should know that he already read the full report before he spoke. So what made her hesitate. After Vali presented everyone with another document he froze. He simply couldn¡¯t believe what he was reading.


    ¡° um matriarch forgive me for asking but is this document real? You aren¡¯t pranking us or anything right. ¡° He asked in doubt. For the first time in his thirty whole years he began to doubt his eyes when saw this report.


    ¡° No, that one is real. That report is a copy of Danzo¡¯s orders to his roots. And just so you know we got this report from the Chiba clan. ¡° Izanami said, making Sachiko shut up. He knew that Chiba with their unique secret techniques could shrink themselves to a level where an ordinary ninja couldn¡¯t locate them. They were excellent at infiltration missions as even elite jonins have a hard time locating them due their uniqueness. You wouldn¡¯t be able to locate an ant when you are surrounded by elephants after all. Although they were dangerous their clan was on the brink of extinction in the warring state. In the warring state there were no sneak attacks, just destroy everything with a big jutsu. So their normal casualty rate is higher than other clans leading them to a rather dire state. Thankfully they managed to survive after Izanami took them in.


    ¡° But I still have a hard time believing this. We are talking about Danzo right. He can¡¯t be this stupid to act like this. If there is one mishap everything would fall apart. ¡° Sachiko mumbled under his breath but due to everyone¡¯s keen hearing they all heard it.


    Nanami and Izanami who went further from this state could be considered gods or people at the level at the six paths. They broke through the barrier that made them human. How that was possible will be told another day.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 11

    Chapter 11


    ¡° Now now Nanami dear, don¡¯t scare them too much, ¡° Izanami said, calming Nanami down a little. The atmosphere which was tense began to gradually calm down at her words. She then said to everyone present ,


    ¡° don¡¯t worry about Naruto, although I don¡¯t know whether it was Konoha¡¯s luck or destiny he would not destroy Konoha just because of his hardships.... probably. ¡° She sounded unsure at the end.


    ¡° Ahh, why is that matriarch? ¡° It was Kazuma who asked this question. Although the Uzumakis are passive in nature that doesn¡¯t mean they are saints. They react more violently than the Uchiha.


    Izanami scratched her nose while saying, ¡° well you see Naruto is kind of special. He is the spirit inheritor of my second brother¡¯s chakra. So ahh that would normally make him quite hard to rally. ¡°


    ¡° Wait, you said normally that would mean something changed, ¡° Sachiko, who caught on to this little detail, asked hesitantly. He has a very bad feeling about this.


    ¡° Well you see I may have added a function for Naruto to communicate with his parents when he is asleep or in a very sticky situation ¡° Izanami said looking away.


    The room went silent. Everyone looked at Izanami with wide eyes. She might have doomed Konoha before any nation invaded it.


    While many may forget it, but Minato Namikaze is a scary guy when he is angry. There was a reason why two of the ninja villages ordered their ninja¡¯s retreat when they encountered him. And it¡¯s not just because he is the fastest ninja , no it is because he will hunt them down till he is finished with them.


    There was just one time when a rock shinobi attacked one of his teammates and managed to injure to the point where he had to retire as a ninja. Although the higher ups at that time didn¡¯t want to take revenge for this since they managed to get a better deal somehow , Minato didn¡¯t take this lightly. Findd new stories at novelhall.com


    He disguised himself and entered the blackmarket and began his hunt. He hunted everyone who was in that party. He even went further and killed off the people who were indirectly involved in this matter. Turns out this incident was a set up as this teammate of his was a distant senju. If the Third Ninja didn¡¯t start Mianto would have gone further in his investigation and kill Danzo and Hiruzen due to their involvement.


    This is how scary Minato can be. And this information is only known to three factions. Iwagakure and Kumogakure due to their involvement in this incident. And lastly Japan who manages the underworld.


    Minato went to such lengths to a teammate he cares for and imagine what he will do when he sees how the village is treating his son.


    ¡® May Konaha rest in peace ¡® everyone prayed in their hearts knowing what Minato would do to Konoha. And they wouldn¡¯t be shocked to hear that Minato resurrected himself to carry out his revenge. He is a one in a million genius after all. He just needs enough time and resources .


    Seeing everyone like they were about to hear Konaha¡¯s destruction any minute now Izanami¡¯s lips twitched. She was about to say that Naruto will lose his memories in the morning to escape from suspicion of the third hokage. And Minato wouldn¡¯t do anything to konoha till Naruto graduate . But she held her silence as a new plan began to form in her mind. She has been quite bored lately so she was thinking of going on a vacation. And she might just be able to pull it off.


    She seriously said, ¡° Nanami make some arrangements for me to leave Japan for the next few years. ¡°


    Nanami asked in surprise, ¡° where might you go matriarch¡±


    Izanami cheerfully said , ¡° Of course, I''m going to Konoha. Someone has to make sure it doesn¡¯t self-destruct after all. ¡°


    Of Course this is only known to two people, one being Vali who often works with her while the other being Izanami. Only these two know her secret as she can¡¯t make them disappear or threaten them. Fortunately no poor soul managed to uncover her secret till now.


    Nanami quickly regained her calm when she saw the teasing look in Izanami¡¯s eyes. She sighed and said, ¡° Matriarch here is a report that might interest you ¡°


    ¡° Hmm, what could that be? ¡° Izanami asked aloud as she took the report from Nanami¡¯s hand. Reading it her expression froze. She read it again just to be sure.


    Rubbing her forehead she asked, ¡° hey Nanami can I get my vacation tomorrow. You can be the next village chief so I can retire peacefully ¡°


    Nanami ignored her words and said , ¡° Matriarch just clean your own mess ¡°


    Izanami sighed as she said ¡° figures. Hey Nanami I will head out for a bit , be a dear and finish some of my paperwork. ¡° And without letting Nanami reply Izanami sank into the shadows.


    Nanami just sighed as she walked towards the village head¡¯s seat. She sat on it and began to see what she had to do, ¡° Honestly mother, you should really be glad that I''m your daughter. ¡° She complained as she began doing the rest of the paperwork.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 12

    Chapter 12


    In one of the many hospitals in Japan, Tsunade laid on one of the many beds there and contemplated her life¡¯s worth. Beside her Shizune sat on a stool trying to console her but to no avail.


    Suddenly a gust of wind came from the open window and Izanami appeared before them. She looked at Tsunade and sighed. With a bit of strength she flicked Tsunade¡¯s forehead making a bang sound.


    ¡° owwww ¡°with a shout filled with pain Tsunade came back to reality. The first she wanted to do was hit the person who hurt her. But just as she moved a little bit her whole body began to hurt like hell. And that¡¯s when she remembered what her condition was. So as a last resort she glared hatefully at the Izanami.


    But Izanami completely ignored her glare. She looked at Tsunade and sneered, ¡° what did the beating that kid give you not enough. Want me to discipline you too ¡°


    All of Tsunade¡¯s momentum disappeared as she looked away. She couldn¡¯t face anyone after what happened today.


    ¡° What now you feel ashamed, where was that shame when you were trying to boss around those kids huh ¡° Izanami rebuked her ruthlessly.


    Tsunade didn¡¯t answer her. She just looked down in shame. She truly felt ashamed of her actions at that time. But even more than shame she felt her pride shatter because of the incident.


    Earlier when she and Shizune went outside to sightsee they happened to find a good bar. And as the alcoholic freak she was, Tsunade naturally got drunk. Coincidentally the shop they went to was a shop that the Yamanashi clan owned. This clan in the Warring state was famous for their drunken swordsmanship. Due to their fighting style relying heavily on their drunkenness their clan makes unique alcohol that can make anyone drunk with just one sip.


    Even Sachiko, the well known drunkard in Japan wouldn¡¯t dare drink their wine casually. This is because of one speciality of this wine. Normally after someone is drunk most medical ninja''s or clan¡¯s that have a high regeneration ability can remove their drunkenness after injecting chakra into their brain. But after drinking this wine, the more chakra you inject the more drunkenness you become.


    Unluckily, Tsunade as a force of habit poured chakra to cure her drunkenness. And as she was still drunk she didn¡¯t notice the change and continued to pour chakra. It was only when Shizune noticed her condition that she finally stopped. But at that time it was too late. Tsunade was barely holding her conscience.


    Shizune tried to get Tsunade back to her room since she isn¡¯t quite stable right now. But due to the drunkenness Tsunade¡¯s stubbornness intensified. She stubbornly said that she won¡¯t go back to her room till she enjoyed looking around the place.


    Since Shizune couldn¡¯t forcibly bring Tsunade back to her room she had no choice but to go along with her wishes. She prayed in her heart that Tsunade wouldn¡¯t bring them too much trouble.


    And to her relief they weren''t dragged into any unnecessary troubles Tsunade just strolled around the village. But she let her guard down too soon as Tsunade¡¯s attention went to a peculiar machine. It was set up near the park they decided to rest for a while.


    ¡° Tsunade let me make this clear to you. You might be the princess of Konoha or even one of the legendary Sannins but your status means nothing if you are weak.This is the law of this world.


    So Tsunade stop running away from reality. This is my advice from someone who lived in this world for a long time. ¡° Saying these words, Izanami flickered away from the hospital leaving Tsunade to contemplate.


    Ultimately Tsunade sighed and said to Shizune, ¡° Shizune can you get me a bottle of wine? I really need a drink right now ¡° But she received no reply. Looking around she saw that Shizune was missing from the room.


    Tsunade sighed again at what was happening. Izanami might have taken Shizune away with her so Tsunade would seriously think about it. This made Tsunade helpless. She really doesn''t want to think about this matter as it is very much related to her past. She sighed again. Looks like she is going to sigh a lot today.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 13

    Chapter 13


    A few days passed after Izanami had the talk with Tsunade. And Tsunade , although reluctant, began doing her exercises to shape her body back into top condition. She finally realised how much of a bad situation she is in.


    When she was still a ninja due her bloodline and endurance she could fight for hours straight without showing any exhaustion. And that too in simple taijutsu. But now due to her body can only fight 3 hours straight. After that time limit she will gradually begin to show exhaustion.


    Her chakra control which she was proud of was lost. At present she could be said to have a chaka control better than a regular jonin. But for Tsunade this is rubbish. This is also a reason why learning medical ninjutsu is considered very hard and impractical in the academy. To become a qualified medical ninja you must at least have jonin level chakra control. This is one of the reasons why most medical ninja¡¯s are special jonins.


    Since Tsunade still can¡¯t see blood due to her condition she was in a dilemma on how to improve her chakra control. According to her, the best way to improve your chakra control is the fish exercise, where you mend the wounds of a dying fish. As she was mulling over this problem izanami decided to help her out.


    ¡° You know Tsunade, I may have a solution for your problem. First is an exercise I did when I was little to improve my chakra control. It¡¯s actually quite simple do you want to learn it ¡°


    To izanami¡¯s question Tsunade nodded frantically. Of course she wants to learn it. I mean who wouldn¡¯t want to learn the exercises that the teacher of her grandfather did to solidify her foundation.


    Seeing her enthusiasm, Izanami smiled. She then snapped her fingers and called one of the hidden yokai members. A man dressed just like Nanami had arrived in front of her while kneeling.


    She then instructed, ¡° get me two bowls filled with water ¡°


    The yokai member nodded and melted into the shadows. And after a few seconds he appeared again. But this time in his hands there ate two bowls filled with water. Thanking him , Izanami took the two bowls from him. The man bowed again and went back to his duties.


    Izanami then turned her attention to Tsunade again. Putting one bowl to the side she began her explanation.


    ¡° My exercise is actually quite simple. You just have to coat your hand in a layer of chakra and dip it inside this bowl. And in doing so you must be able to make sure your hand is not wet ¡° saying so she dipped her hand into the bowl. She kept it inside for a few minutes and brought it back outside to show it to Tsunade. And like she described her hand is as dry as it was before.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 14

    Chapter 14


    ~Timeskip 3 years~


    A lot has changed in these three years in the ninja world. Most Hidden villages managed to recover most of the resources they lost in the ninja war. Which led most of them to make some moves. Especially Kumogakure.


    Kumogakure launched an attack on Konoha in the disguise of peace talks. Their aim was to kidnap the Hyuga princess and bring the Hyuga bloodline into Kumogakure. This way they could also have the Byakugan in Kumogakure. But unfortunately the kidnappers were stopped by the Hyuga patriarch. In his rage he killed the enemy ninjas giving the Hidden cloud a reason to start the war. They demanded Konoha to give them the killer of their ninjas. They were hoping this would give them a valid reason to start the war, after all no village wanted to be branded the bad guy. But to their utter disappointment The third Hokage agreed to hand over the killer.


    This action of the third hokage put the Hyuga clan in a difficult spot. Although most of the Hyuga clan elders would like to let Hiashi take the blame, they cannot allow the clan to be humiliated and let the byakugan spread to other ninja villages. So they decided to select a scapegoat for them. And that scapegoat became Hizashi Hyuga the younger brother of Hiashi and the leader of the branch family.


    Hiashi argued with elders for hours to save his brother''s life, to him his brother¡¯s life is worth more than a clan that wanted to cripple their own people. But he was finally stopped by Hizashi.


    Hizashi then sacrificed himself to Kumo ninjas to save his elder brother. But unlike the cannon he didn¡¯t kill himself in the clan compound but he went on a suicide mission. After he was brought away from Konoha he broke through his restraints and killed more than 20 elite Kumo ninjas. The reports say that just when they were about to come near a Kumo hideout he went on this rampage.


    His body was not retrieved due to the fact that he killed himself with the last remaining elite ninja with an explosion tag. Due to this explosion both the elite ninja and Hizashi¡¯s bodies were turned into ash. If not for the eyewitnesses from the reinforcement team Kumo would have believed that Konoha secretly rescued Hizashi.


    And weirdly enough Kumo didn¡¯t pursue this matter again. Normally they would demand Konoha to pay more compensation with excuses like ¡® you ordered Hizashi to kill our ninjas ¡®. But this time they couldn¡¯t do that. In the investigation they found that the explosion tag that was used in the battle was from a Kumo ninja who was found dead in battle.


    Unlike the standard Explosion tag this one was brought from the underworld making it quite valuable. Reports say that he purchased this explosion tag to kill his girlfriend who was cheating with a weapon merchant. His plan was to kill both of them in an explosion making it look like an accident. In fact he was about to kill both of them after coming back from the mission. He planned so that no one would suspect him as he just got back from a mission.


    The Hidden concluded that Hizashi on his way to Kumo spotted the explosion tag so he decided to do a last mission to the village. As they say a dead man has very little loose after all.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 15

    Chapter 15


    ¡° Hmm I don¡¯t know how to describe it. It just felt like I was stuffed in water and was forcibly taken away. ¡° He answered after thinking for a few minutes.


    Truth be told he himself is surprised at how calmed he is. He was sure he died in that explosion. ¡®Hmm come to think of it why did even think of going for the suicidal move ¡® he wondered.


    And that¡¯s when he remembered it. When he was being dragged into the enemy hideout he heard a voice that gave him 2 options. One being quietly accept his fate and be a sacrifice or change his fate by his own hands. And at that time he wanted to see his son and brother. He wanted to be together with his family. So he chose the second option.


    The voice guided him in his operation. It gave him the necessary instructions needed to kill the elite kumo ninjas in such a short amount of time. It was also the one who told him to take the wired explosion tag. And if he remembered correctly the voice should belong to...


    ¡° Yes, that voice is mine. I was the one who gave you the necessary instructions at that time, ¡° Izanami said, surprising Hizashi. He wondered whether this girl had the power to read minds.


    ¡° No, I''m just very good at discerning people¡¯s expressions. ¡° the girl answered as if it was obvious.


    ¡° You are one scary lady. But can I ask a question? ¡° Hizashi said with a bit of fear in his eyes. He senses no falsehood in her words and he can¡¯t be sure of this either. If what she says is true then she could mask her expressions perfectly. So getting a read on her is quite impossible.


    ¡° If it is something I know then I will answer to the best of my abilities ¡° Izanami said


    ¡° How am I so calm even after all of this? I should be panicking or at the least on guard against you . But why am I accepting everything at face value? Even when I actively try to agitate myself I can¡¯t seem to do it ? ¡° Hizashi said in a calm voice. But his eyes showed how restless he is inside. No one likes losing control of their body after all.


    ¡° Oh it¡¯s because of that, ¡° Izanami said as she pointed her finger in one direction of the room.


    Looking in that direction Hizashi saw that there was a small altar and on top of that altar there were three incense sticks which were lit. Although he isn¡¯t well knowledgeable in medicines he could tell that those incense sticks are made from medical herbs.


    ¡° As you might have guessed, those incense sticks are not normal. They are made from various medicinal herbs. Their main use is to forcibly calm the mind of anyone who inhaled its smoke. And of course we add some more herbs to bring out more fresh smells so it can be also used as a room freshener. ¡° Izanami said proudly.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 16

    Chapter 16


    In the capital of the Land of Iron where life is filled with snow and samurais a meeting was being held. Unlike the meeting held by the elemental nations where everyone was like going to the battle field here is different.


    In the center of the room there is a round table that is large enough to accommodate 15 people. And on that table there are various screens that would be used for sharing reports and evidence to everyone present. And in front these screens sat 14 people.


    Although the climate of the Land of Iron is quite cold these people didn¡¯t seem to mind the cold as they all wore light clothing. Their attire resembled that of what someone would wear in the Sengoku period.


    But it isn¡¯t like these people are extremely and resilient to the cold weather to an abnormal degree. It¡¯s just that this room and almost every building in the land of iron is equipped with an indoor heater. They just need someone to put some charcoal and pour in a bit of their chakra to start the machine. And since the chakra capacity to run the machine is very low even an ordinary person could use it. Since this machine is a necessity for the land of iron it is sold at a low price. Even a beggar can afford it if they really tried.


    Of course like the other villages there are orphans and homeless kids in the land of iron too. But these kids are often recruited to do the security department , public service departments and factories that offer them some money in exchange for doing some chores. Geett the latest novels at novelhall.com


    It is unknown who implemented this policy because as long as the residents in the land of iron remembers this was always like this even before the creation of ninja villages. So residents always followed this teaching. And it¡¯s not like they hate this policy. Many orphans who were helped by these actions later achieved great things.


    As the saying goes ¡®there are no useless talents it''s just there are no good people who can use it ¡®.


    The meeting room which was quite lively suddenly stopped after a messenger barged into the room. Normally he wouldn¡¯t dare do such a disrespectful thing as inside the room everyone has a high status. But he couldn¡¯t help it. The news is that important.


    He ran towards their daimyo who was also present in this room. Unlike in the other lands the daimyo of the land of Iron is someone who is respected for her strength and intellect. In fact the daimyo family could be considered a family of powerful swordsmen. Every successor must pass the trial placed by the captains of each corp and earn their vote and loyalty. If there are two successors one will be appointed as the daimyo while the other as the captain commander.


    In the land of Iron there are no shinobi. So they have samurais who act as security personnel. The most elite of these samurais chosen to form a group that is called the Demon Slayer corp. In their eyes the ones who harm their own even in this dire situation are just demons. If you have so much energy why don¡¯t you go help an elder who is unable to go outside just to get his medicine. The demon slayer corp has the responsibility of protecting those innocent victims so most if not all members have their own teams manage the territory they are in charge of. So even if someone from the demon slayer corp is unable to be everywhere his team members would be able to handle the situation. What¡¯s special about this corp is that each member has mastered a breathing technique.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 17

    Chapter 17


    ¡° Must you really go away at a time like this matriarch? ¡° Nanami asked in a tone laced with accasperation and resignation.


    Although Izanami didn¡¯t specify the true reason she wanted to stay in Konoha , Nanami knew that she just wanted to slack off from her duties. And in Japan, although it seems peaceful at a glance, the truth is far from that.


    The majority of Japan¡¯s population is made from the clans that were on the brink of extinction from all around the world. So they all hold different ideals and values that may contradict each other. In fact in the warring state period it wasn¡¯t uncommon for the clans who recently migrated here to make trouble.


    But all those trouble makers were dealt with by Izanami. In fact it isn¡¯t wrong to say Izanami went to their clan compound and beat the shit out of every member with an inflated ego. Showed her dominance and made them submit to her rule whether they like it or not.


    In fact most clan leaders are now selected by this method. After all you need strength to defend and control your own clan right. The exception to this rule is when selecting the department heads. The department heads are not chosen because of their strength . They are chosen simply because they are the best at their jobs. And unlike clan leaders the department heads are protected by the Yokai corp so no one could put pressure on them. And even if by chance the department head and the clan leader get into an argument it will be solved by Izanami herself.


    In Japan Izanami¡¯s rule is the law. If she tells them to go left they go left. Don¡¯t be fooled by how Izanami normally behave around each other. As a monster that even her brothers fear, how could she be less of a monster than her own father.


    ¡° Yes Nanami, I need to go. You know the Uchiha and Konoha are now at each other''s throats . I can¡¯t just let one of my brother¡¯s clan be destroyed because of a silly civil war ¡° Izanami said with a serious tone.


    Sure she could be using this as an excuse to go on a vacation but that didn¡¯t mean she would shy away from her responsibilities because of that. Unlike what she remembered, the Uchiha and Konoha higher ups seemed to have an even more strained relationship than they had in canon.


    The village higher ups openly despise them to the point where they scowl at them in public. Even Danzo didn¡¯t need to do anything too drastic to fuel the fire. He just occasionally made the root ninjas cause trouble for the Uchiha.


    The only reason they didn¡¯t go to war is because Hiruzen held his ground on not provoking the Uchiha. He even specifically ordered his clan to not cause any trouble.


    ¡° And besides me going there might as well keep the other villagers in check. ¡° Izanami said with a mischievous smile.


    Seeing her smile, Nanami had a bad feeling. And she usually gets this feeling when her adopted mother decides to make chaos.


    ¡°Sigh, please keep the damage to a minimum¡± she finally said knowing that her mother is not going to listen to her at this point.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    Izanami has worked hard and efficiently for the last few centuries so as the good boss Mr. Joy is, he gave Izanami many bonuses. And since she actually doesn''t get paid the bonus tends to come as random wishes.


    And in one of her random wishes she managed to get a ticket to enter the pokemon world. And as a hard core outaku how could she not catch a pokemon when she was given a chance to visit them.


    And she did just that. Due to her stay being only limited to 3 years she only managed to capture and befriend 75 pokemon. If she was given more time she could potentially capture more species.


    And the Pokemon she caught were given their own small world for them to enjoy. Honestly, the place Izanami made them is way better than their old homes. And truth be told most of these pokemon she captured were rescued by her or they themselves came to her.


    As a person who practises senjutsu her affinity with Pokemon''s is off the charts. It could even be considered unfair as even the most cautious Pokemons let their guard down when with Izanami.


    While Izanami was enjoying her time, Tsunade and Shizune, who were also riding a pokemon, were holding it tightly in fear of falling down. The one they are riding is a Latias. And even when Izanami said that they won¡¯t fall down, these two find it hard to believe it due to the speed they are going at.


    After flying for an hour Izanami finally saw the borders for the land of Iron. ¡° We are almost at our destination so Latias and Latios let''s speed things up hahahaha ¡° Izanami said as the two pokemon increased their speed.


    Tsunade and Shizune, who were barely holding it back, screamed as the speed increased. ¡® why the hell did you say to increase the speed if we are near the destination , shouldn¡¯t it be the other way around.¡¯ They both thought , as they tried to stay conscious.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 18

    Chapter 18


    ¡° Luna sama, is it alright for not sending someone to escort our guests from the border? ¡° asked Tengen as he and the other hasira¡¯s gathered near the castle gate to welcome their dear guests.


    Although he is the youngest of all the hashira¡¯s he is someone who has some exceptional qualities as a leader. So he couldn¡¯t help but wonder why didn¡¯t send someone to escort the guests.


    ¡® Is it some kind of tradition amongst Hasiras? But the others seemed to be as puzzled as me so it couldn¡¯t be it ¡¯ he wondered.


    Luna chuckled and answered for everyone to hear , ¡°hahaha you are right Tengen we would normally send someone to escort our guests. But you see our guest isn¡¯t someone we could treat with our common sense. This person is someone who even I don¡¯t know how to handle. And furthermore this person didn¡¯t come through the border so it is impossible for us even if we send someone. ¡°


    ¡° oh if this person didn¡¯t come through the border how do you know she will come today. It isn¡¯t like they could sneak in here with moon squids guarding the borders, ¡° asked Jigoro, now interested in this topic.


    Lua shook her head and replied, ¡° Frankly I don¡¯t know. As even if she came through the border I wouldn¡¯t know about her presence. She is quite skilled at infiltration after all. And even most of the moon squid secret techniques are made by her so tracking her is impossible. I just know she will arrive due to the letter she sent in advance. ¡°


    Everyone was shocked at her words. Although they refused to admit it, not even they could escape from the moon squads surveillance. Even when they could perceive their presence no one could catch them. That is how advanced their skills are.


    ¡°Hmm oh our guest seemed to have arrived ¡° Luna said as she looked at the sky. As the leader of the Moon Squad her perception capabilities could be considered the best. So she managed to sense the movement in the air. Findd new stories at novelhall.com


    And soon enough a silhouette of two flying objects began to came to everyone''s vision. The two objects slowly began to grow bigger for the hashira¡¯s to make sense of what it is.


    ¡° Is that a summoning beast? And how is it travelling at such speed? ¡° asked Sakonji in shock. As someone who focussed on speed he was very shocked to see such a summoning beast. If possible he would like to make a contract with it.


    Soon Latios and Latias descended near them. The first to get down was Tsunade and Shizune who ran towards a place where they could throw their breakfast.


    Ignoring those two Izanami gracefully got off from Latias and patted its head. Latios not to be out done nudged her with its head asking for a head pat . izanami smiled as she also gave both of them plenty of headats.


    After they had their fill Izanami said to them ¡° Thank you for the ride Latios and Latias I¡¯ll come to see you guys again. ¡°


    They both nodded their heads and flew away back to their new home. Unlike normal summoned beasts they quite enjoy themselves as they travel in the sky.


    In her early years she trained vigorously to train her haki. And due to all that hard work she managed to master every type of haki to their full potential. Not only that she even managed to pass her haki training to her disciples. Although most of them couldn¡¯t manifest haki, their initial understanding helped them greatly.


    Like for example Luna mastered her observation haki to the limit and managed to locate any person around 2 kilometre radius if she actively tried. This is how she managed to locate Izanami before everyone else.


    ¡°Ehmm matriarch, why are you releasing your pressure on us, did we do something wrong? ¡° Luna asked worriedly. At first she thought Izanami was just testing everyone. But even after all this time she didn¡¯t take away her pressure so she is quite worried about the reason.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 19

    Chapter 19


    ¡° hmm it¡¯s no reason I was just trying to determine whether the seals I placed here are working ¡° Izanami said she kept her eyes on the tea cup as she lessurly drank her tea.


    ¡® huh what seals ¡® Luna in bewilderment but before she could even ask that question the place they were seated began to be covered by a barrier and moments later many cakes began to fall down all of them.


    ¡° Huh, what the hell is this madness ¡°asked Tunade in surprise. If they were not protected by the barrier all of them would be covered in cakes.


    The hashiras all grouped together as they surrounded Luna to shield her from any enemies. It was their instinctive response in a place of danger. Although Luna is quite capable of taking care of herself, too much protection is never a bad thing.


    But suddenly izanami who was drinking her tea snapped her fingers making the cake storm stop completely. Even the ones that were in mid air stopped. ¡° Tsk it seems like the seal was messed up by someone over the years ¡°she grumbled as she drank her tea.


    Luna, who was the first to get her bearings back , cautiously touched a cake that was stopped in mid air and her eyes widened in surprise. ¡° This is all an illusion, ¡° she said in shock.


    ¡°Huh ¡°everyone said in unison as they heard her words. Even Izanamai was surprised at her words.


    But unlike others she was surprised that Luna managed to identify this as an illusion. Although it may not seem like it she is a master of illusions so the seals that produce illusions are her best works. Is she getting sloppy in her seals?


    ¡®No that can¡¯t be it ¡® she denied that thought immediately. Although she placed these seals centuries ago and they have seemed to lose most of their effects, it still doesn¡¯t change the fact she is a genuine seal grandmaster.


    ¡® No, that''s wrong. I think I broke through that threshold long before I created these seals. ¡® she thought as she thought of many possibilities.


    ¡® could Luna simply have the talent to look through the illusions, no if she had that ability she may have already seen my original appearance. So it has to be something that has to do with just plain illusions, wait could it be...¡¯ Izanami suddenly thought of a very terrifying but absurd idea.


    ¡° Hey Luna, how do you preserve the world when you use total consecration? ¡° Izanami asked in a serious tone.


    ¡°Huh Oh um I when I enter the total consideration world usually loses its colour. ¡° Luna answered her in a flustered tone.


    And the total concentrate state is something you could achieve after taking in natural energy. While not ridiculous as the sage mode , this state also allows one to achieve a greater perception and improved senses. And although this isn¡¯t said out loud to become a Hashira one must achieve the total consecration state.


    And Luna here achieved something that even your normal couldn¡¯t achieve. She managed to tap into the advanced technique Universal Perception. This is an advanced perception that allows the user to observe the world in its true form. So no illusions can be effective against someone like that.


    And during the time I have lived in this world I have only seen three people who are able to achieve this state. One is my best friend while the other is my niece. And finally we have little Luna here. ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Luna¡¯s shocked face with a smile.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 20

    Chapter 20


    Long long ago before the concept of shinobi or clans were born there stood a small village in the Land of Ancestors. In that village there was a unique family that held the leadership of that village.


    In that family there were two sons and one daughter. The two sons were exceptional in their own ways. The eldest was a genius who used his knowledge and wisdom to improve the village. The youngest, although not as talented as the eldest, had his own charm. He had the power to unite the people with his words and actions.


    The father who held the position of the village chief was a powerful man. It was said that before he became a village chief he and his brother fought and defeated a monster who was going to destroy this whole world. And most of all he had chakra which he distributed to everyone in the village. Even though the chief was a powerful man he too began to grow old. And that¡¯s when disaster struck them.


    He called his two sons who were already grown ups to his office and gave them a trial.


    The trial was to go and help the people who were still suffering from the aftermath of their fight with the monster.


    The two brothers agreed to their father¡¯s command and went on a journey to complete their trial. The eldest who grew arrogant and cold in recent years found another small village that was suffering from a water shortage. Investigating this further he found out that the lake near them is dried up . So he used his chakra and wisdom to fill the lake and notify the villages. And with his task done he departed from the village to go back to his home.


    The youngest also found another village facing a similar problem. But unlike the eldest he didn¡¯t just fill the lake he tried to help the village by making them a well so they could never have a problem like that in the future. Although this took more time he finally was able to create a well for the village. And so he too departed from the village.


    The two brothers finally came back home and told their story to their father. The father, after hearing them, finally made his decision. He chose the youngest as his successor.


    The eldest unable to bear this left the village swearing to take revenge on everyone. According to him what he did was right and the village chief position was rightfully his as the eldest child.


    And after a few days he came back to destroy his village. At that time there was no one who could stop him due to his recent powerup. This led the youngest to confront his older brother. And similar to his brother the youngest also got stronger. If their powers were to be measured they most would be on an equal footing.


    But even so their battle was catastrophism for the village. Even the father who was once powerful couldn¡¯t intervene as he had already given up most of his powers to his son. When all hope was lost a single sword cleaved through the air.


    This sword strike managed to force the two brothers to distance themselves. When everyone looked at the direction the sword strike came from they saw the remaining child, the younger sister of the two brothers walking towards them. In both her hands there are two swords shaped like Katanas.


    Everyone was surprised at the daughter¡¯s appearance. Most of the villager¡¯s shouted for her to take shelter. To them she was their princess whom everyone adored. So they don¡¯t want her to get hurt.


    But unexpectedly they were stopped by the father. Although most wouldn¡¯t have noticed it he noticed it. His daughter although isn¡¯t intelligent as his first son or as charismatic as his second she has her own unique qualities. But she always held back from showing her talents and stayed under the shadows of her brothers.


    But even when their instincts were screaming at them to stop this fighting they still attacked her.¡¯ So what if their sister had some power we are still stronger ¡® that foolish thought was what spelled their fate.


    The sister mercilessly gave a good beating to her brothers. After they finally admit defeat under her hand did she stop.


    So what do you think of this story? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at some excited children that were sitting around her .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 21

    Chapter 21


    ¡° But what happened later big sis Izanami ¡°a little girl asked Izanami. If one looked at this kid closely they would realise that this girl here bore a striking resemblance to Nezuko. Hell, even the other kids who were surrounding Izanami also had some resemblance to the other Hashiras.


    If someone asked Izanami how characters who were supposed to be in a different anime appear she would say she has no idea. Because she honestly has no clue how this is possible either. She would usually think of this as one of her bosses'' funny jokes. After all, what good would you do if you think about this too deeply?


    ¡° Hmm the siblings argued for a while but ultimately they had no choice but to reconcile after they were bested by their sister. After that they lived happily ever after, ¡° Izanami said with a smile.


    ¡° Big sister, why does that part feel like it is a lie? ¡° asked one boy innocently.


    ¡° who knows. '''' Izanami shrugged her shoulders with a mischievous smile. The children began to pester her to tell them more stories, making Izanami quite helpless. As much as she wanted to tell them some more she too had some work to do. So she helplessly left the playground after promising to tell them some later.


    After she exited the park she met someone unexpected. He is a youthful man with striking blue hair and bright blue eyes, dressed in a sleek suit. Despite his young age, his attire and demeanor exude an air of maturity and sophistication. Despite his small stature, he carries himself with confidence and poise, suggesting a sense of self-assurance beyond his years. His youthful features are complemented by his stylish appearance, creating a striking and memorable impression.


    ¡° Now this is a surprise. I didn''t expect I would meet you here Nagisa. So why did the CEO of the world bank come here for ? ¡° Izanami asked in a haughty tone.


    Hearing her tone and words Nagisa who was also the CEO of the world bank smiled wryly. ¡° Come on matriarch, are you still holding a grudge against me for that time? Didn¡¯t I apologise already? ¡° he asked in a helpless tone.


    People who knew him would be shocked at his attitude. This man here is the person who controls the only bank in the Shinobi world. This makes him a person who has enough status to even make a small country kneel. After all, without money you can¡¯t live in this world. And besides most countries still running due to the loans the world bank is lending them. Without that no country would have been able to exist after facing three ninja wars.


    And if that status is not enough the man himself is a genius and freak of nature. It is said that his knowledge and skills in business are terrifying. Due to his genius, he is inherently prideful and arrogant. Even the stone shinobi who are known to be prideful would have to bow down to his arrogance. Geett the latest novels at novelhall.com


    But why did such a man appear so meek in front of Izanami? Well Nagisa¡¯s full name is Nagisa Rushifa. But unlike most of the Rushifa clan he is someone who was adopted by Iznami. His position could be said to be the same as Nanami. But unlike Nanami he didn¡¯t want any power in the clan. He is a businessman not a clan leader. So he mostly stays away from clan politics which also made him spend less time with Iznami.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 22

    Chapter 22


    After a while they both stopped laughing. Since it isn¡¯t good to stay in the road for too long they decided to go to a nearby inn to have a chat with each other.


    ¡° So tell me why did you come looking for me Nagisa and stop with bulshit of just seeing me. Tell me the real reason you came here¡° Izanami asked her foster son seriously.


    As much as she wants to spend her time with her children she knows that they won¡¯t usually come looking for her just to spend some time. At the very least Nagisa won¡¯t come. He is someone who doesn¡¯t like to leave his work half finished. So he won¡¯t go on any of his personal journeys if there is any work he needs to do.


    Nagisa looked a little ashamed at her words. True he normally wouldn¡¯t come to see her. Even this time he didn¡¯t just come to meet her to catch up with her. But even so he still loves his mother so hearing say things like this did make him a little sad.


    Seeing his expression, Izanami''s expression softened. Although she didn¡¯t want to say things so harshly as she knew her children¡¯s situation better than everyone. But they need to understand that not everything is fine just because you have a stable job.


    Nagisa bowed his head and said sincerely , ¡° I¡¯m sorry for lying mother but I really did want to meet you even if it wasn¡¯t my priority. ¡°


    Izanami sighed and answered, ¡° nevermind that just tell me why did you want to see me that badly ¡°


    Nagisa looked at his mother with a serious but curious expression and asked, ¡° Mother, what are you truly planning to do in Konoha? As you might be aware, Kumo recently provoked Konoha to check the overall situation. And from the looks of it the other villages would soon do their own methods to see how weakened Konoha really is. If they are convinced Konoha is weak they will go on a full attack like they did with the Land of Whirlpool . And in such a situation why are you going there? You do realise you can¡¯t protect Konoha without revealing your identity. ¡°


    Izanami smiled and said , ¡° well you answered your own question ¡°


    ¡° Huh¡± question marks began to appear on top of Nagisa¡¯s head. He is too confused to say another word.


    Izanami chuckled and answered, ¡° You are right . If I want to save Konoha from the other villages I will inevitably be forced to reveal my identity. But what If I create a new identity that no one would dare to provoke. ¡°


    Nagisa began to ponder what Izanami said. Honestly there already more than one identity Iznami could use to make the other villages weary. For example she is the owner of many famous companies that are very popular amongst ninjas. If they issue a ban of not selling their wares to any specific villages the villages economy would collapse. What can a ninja do when he can¡¯t buy the equipment he wants?


    Well sadly for him his wish couldn¡¯t be granted since there is a one eyed mummy in Konoha that has too much pride in his head.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 23

    Chapter 23


    ¡° So, does anyone have any questions? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at the people in the conference room.


    After their little discussion Izanami and Nagisa spent some time together catching up with each other. And the very next day Luna held a special meeting to discuss their future plans. And Izanami just now presented her plan in full detail.


    Hearing her plans most of the people gathered here were too shocked to react. Most of them looked at Nagisa to see his reaction as his help is very crucial to this plan. But as usual he had his poker face that he is quite famous for. So most of the attendees couldn¡¯t get a read on him.


    ¡° Hey Izanami care to tell me why I am here. You don¡¯t expect me to come with you to Konoha do you? ¡° Tsunade asked. She was just relaxing in her room when she was dragged here by Izanami.


    Izanami shook her head as she heard this. Honestly she wished Tsunade would not be this stubborn on this matter. Whether she liked it or not she is still the Senju princess. If she really desired it there would be many who would support her. And for the plan to succeed smoothly her participation is needed. Even a child could realise this. But she nonetheless explained the reason for her presence,


    ¡° Tsunade do you really want to go back to your bad unhealthy habits? You should just stop running away from the problem. Whether you like it or not, the Village your grandfather created is beginning to break apart. You should at least try to save it before everything falls apart.


    Don¡¯t forget there is a reason your teacher didn¡¯t want you to interfere with the village council. The authority you wield is not any lower than the village elders. So your presence is quite important for our plan to work smoothly. ¡°


    Hearing her words, Tsunade fell silent. She knew her responsibilities very well. But she is still hesitant to go back to that place. The village caused her too much pain.


    Looking at Tsunade''s still hesitant look Izanami sighed. She then began to bring out her trump cards to the table.


    ¡° Sigh, well it looks like I have no choice. Tsunade Senju, as if you come with me back to Konoha, I will pay off half of your debts you owe to the World Bank. ¡°


    ¡° huh ¡° Tsunade looked shocked at her words. ¡® When the hell did I borrow money from the World Bank ¡® she thought in wonder. But an unpleasant memory popped into her head.


    It was during the time she was searching for the disappearance of her clan members. In one of the folders she found out that a considerable amount of money was borrowed from the World Bank to complete the construction of the village. It was said that the Senju and Uchiha will be paying back the debt by giving a small amount of their mission rewards. Originally the debt was supposed to be paid off after a 100 years but with two ninja wars the time increased as more clan members had to borrow money from the bank to buy off their equipment. And with each war taking more clan members away it was estimated that the debt would be a considerable amount.


    Thinking so she too left the meeting room. She also has some last minute preparations to do.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 24

    Chapter 24


    Konohagakure also known as Village Hidden in the Leaves is known as the strongest village amongst the five great shinobi villages. As shown by the past ninja wars their title as the strongest remained undisturbed even when they were attacked by all four of the other shinobi villages.


    Due to this huge prestige, numerous tourists, merchants, and other influential people come to Konoha, resulting in its economy thriving better than the other villages. Numerous businesses bloomed due to the influx of people.


    Today there was a sudden commotion near the Village gates as a rather important carriage came to view. This situation is quite rare as it was the norm for various Damyos to come and go so no one had reacted like this in ages. And even then the people wouldn¡¯t react like this. Geett the latest novels at novelhall.com


    While this was going on, a carriage decorated with various designs was pulled by two black horses, driven through the road undisturbed by the commotion it was causing. The carriage driver was already used to this reaction, as it happened every time they went out.


    But that does not mean Konoha Anbu wouldn''t react to this. They already sent someone to report about this new arrival especially after seeing the golden coloured insignia of a pigeon. This is the insignia of the World Bank after all.


    Since these people are too high profile the higher-ups immediately gave a reply to the anbu team. With their orders received the anbu team quickly replaced the guards and welcomed the guests. With their help the carriage went inside the village without any checking.


    While this is happening inside the carriage izanami who saw all of this threw a wide smirk at Tsunade.


    ¡° heh i told you so ¡° She said with a look of superiority.


    Tsunade, hearing this, gritted her teeth as she clenched her fists in frustration.Earlier she and izanami just made a bet on whether the village guards would let their carriage pass through without even stopping them. And Tsunade as usual said the unlikely option of them at least stopping the driver at the checkpoint just as a formality.


    But she greatly underestimated how much of a coward her sensei is. I mean, come on, aren¡¯t they supposed to be ninjas? What would they do if some enemy ninjas invaded Konoha under the disguise of this carriage? At least they should send in a sensor.


    ¡® Old man, you better pray that I don¡¯t get a meeting with you,¡¯ Tsunade vowed in her heart. She is going to have her revenge one way or another.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 25

    Chapter 25


    Izanami, lost in her thoughts, found herself standing before the reception desk almost unconsciously.


    ¡°Hello, miss. How can I help you today?¡± The receptionist asked kindly, breaking Izanami out of her reverie.


    Collecting herself, Izanami addressed the receptionist with a hint of impatience in her tone. ¡°Hmph, of course, this young mistress has some business here but that is no concern for you. But before that, where is your Hokage? Shouldn¡¯t he come and greet me? This young mistress doesn¡¯t have all day. If he¡¯s just trying to delay our meeting, then he should prepare to pay off the added interest on the debt Konoha owes us.¡±


    There was silence all of a sudden. Everyone who heard this whether they were civilians or ninjas were able to react as they heard her arrogant words.


    As Izanami stood before the reception desk, her impatience palpable, a collective murmur arose from those nearby. "Did this girl go insane or something? Why would the Hokage come greet her? Even if she''s a noble, isn''t this arrogance a bit too much?" Their shock and anger were evident, especially among the ninjas. To them, the Hokage was an idol.


    Sensing the hostility in the air, Izanami turned her gaze to the surrounding audience and asked arrogantly, "What are you looking at? Never seen a princess before? Tsk, is this how Konoha is? Everywhere you look, you can only see mad horn dogs who have no manners. I wouldn''t even be surprised if the people here kidnapped little girls to satisfy their lust. Maybe I should also charge this to the debt this village owes."


    Hearing her words, the ninjas all turned away from her. Although they wanted to curse at this little girl for insulting the Hokage, they didn¡¯t dare to make trouble. They knew that this girl just wanted some excuse for extorting money from the village.


    As ninjas, their ability to assess the situation was far better than the civilians who still kept glaring at the girl. Although the Hokage wouldn¡¯t punish some civilians, he surely would punish the ninjas for creating more trouble for him, especially when they realized that this girl was here to collect the debt money the village owed to them.


    The receptionist, a retired ninja, quickly composed herself, masking any expression of annoyance or agitation. With professional grace, she assured Izanami that she would promptly inform the Hokage of her presence and inquire about his availability at that moment. However, her professional facade almost faltered upon hearing the words Izanami uttered next.


    "Huh, who do you think I am? I don¡¯t care if your Hokage is unavailable right now," Izanami retorted, her arrogance palpable. "Just tell him to stop his boring stuff and come greet me. I won''t waste my time waiting for your Hokage to finish his porn book."


    The receptionist tried her best to maintain her composure, but her patience was wearing thin. Who did this girl think she was? Hadn''t her parents taught her any manners? She needed to learn how to respect her elders.


    The realization that Izanami commanded such respect, to the extent that even Tsunade refrained from confrontation, struck fear into their hearts. Throughout the Fire Country, Tsunade''s respect was sparingly granted, reserved primarily for the Fire Daimyo himself, and even then, she did not extend such courtesy to his family.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 26

    Chapter 26


    In the office of the Hokage, a grim atmosphere prevailed. Even the typically serene Hiruzen wore an uncharacteristically troubled expression as he, alongside the three elders, observed the events downstairs through the legendary crystal ball.


    "Homura, is what she said true? Are we really in debt to the World Bank?" Hiruzen inquired, turning to his friend. Homura, entrusted with managing the village''s financial affairs, held the answers they desperately sought.


    "Yes, I just went through the records earlier," Homura confirmed, his tone grave. "It appears that a significant portion of funds was indeed allocated to stabilize the village during the First Hokage''s era under Tobirama''s guidance. This measure was taken to address the economic challenges faced during the village''s infancy. However, what we didn''t realize was that this incurred a debt with the World Bank."


    He continued, explaining the intricacies of the situation. "Originally, the debt was meant to be repaid by future generations of the Senju and Uchiha clans, the founders of our village. The agreement was for a small percentage of each clan member''s monthly income to be directed towards repaying the debt. Given the population at that time, approximately a thousand members in each clan, the debt was projected to be settled within fifty years."


    Homura''s revelation cast a shadow over the room, as the weight of this newfound knowledge settled heavily upon them.


    Hiruzen nodded solemnly as he processed Homura''s words. "Yes, the casualties of the First Ninja War took a heavy toll on both the Senju and Uchiha clans, particularly decimating the ranks of the Senju, almost to the point of extinction."


    Regret weighed heavily upon Hiruzen''s shoulders as he reflected on the consequences of past decisions. "Allowing Danzo to operate unchecked was a mistake," he admitted quietly to himself, recognizing his own complicity in the matter. Though he may not have directly endorsed the decision, his inaction had inadvertently facilitated it.


    "Given the circumstances, it''s only fair that both clans face the consequences of their actions," Danzo stated abruptly, his voice laced with contempt. "And as for those wretched Uchiha, they should consider themselves fortunate if their existence serves Konoha''s interests." His eyes gleamed with a sinister light, revealing the depth of his animosity towards the Uchiha.


    The other two elders also chimed in, their voices echoing agreement. "Yes, that seems quite reasonable," one of them affirmed. "With the Senju clan no longer in existence, it is only fair that the Uchiha bear responsibility for their actions from the past."


    Their voices melded into a chorus of agreement, echoing Danzo''s sentiments with an air of validation. In their unity lay an unspoken acknowledgment of the Uchiha''s past missteps, magnifying the significance of their debts to the World Bank. It was a burden too hefty for any run-of-the-mill clan to shoulder. With the Uchiha''s future hanging in the balance, a subtle sense of anticipation rippled through the ranks of Konoha''s elite. After all, there was a shared belief that a weakened Uchiha meant a stronger Konoha.


    "Enough, all of you!" Hiruzen''s voice boomed through the room, cutting through the tension like a blade. With a surge of his aura, he asserted his authority as the Hokage, reminding them that despite his age, he still commanded respect.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 27

    Chapter 27


    In negotiations, maintaining a calm and composed demeanor is crucial. However, despite their awareness of this fundamental principle, the occupants of the room couldn''t help but feel their anger stir at Izanami''s provocative words. After all, having ruled Konoha for over 15 years, they possessed a deep-rooted sense of pride that was not easily shaken.


    The first to react was Danzo, known for his arrogance and pride above all. His voice, laced with a palpable aura of killing intent, dripped with threat as he spoke. "Who are you to speak to us like that, brat?" he snarled. "Do you wish to make an enemy out of Konoha? Do you truly believe that simply because you''re a representative of the World Bank, there will be no consequences for your insolence?"


    Izanami''s smirk widened into a menacing grin. "Oh, do you dare to suggest that Konoha has the audacity to attack me? Izanami Yosokuna, the direct kin of Nagisa Yosokuna, the CEO of the World Bank? I wonder where Konoha summons such reckless confidence," she taunted, her voice laced with a chilling edge that sent shivers down the spine.


    At that moment, Danzo trembled involuntarily. The name Nagisa Yosokuna still brought terror to him, sending a chill down his spine. Back when he was first appointed as the Root Commander, he had entertained the idea of controlling Nagisa, believing it would provide him with significant financial backing. But oh, how wrong he had been.


    Before he could even make a move towards his goal, his financial situation had crumbled. In fact, it was no exaggeration to say that he was on the brink of bankruptcy. Just as he was considering embezzling funds from the village, a warning letter arrived¡ªbearing the unmistakable mark of Nagisa Yosokuna.


    The letter contained only a few words: "This is the last warning I''m giving you. Try something like this again, and I will make sure you are penniless in the next moment."


    This incident instilled in Danzo an instinctive fear of the World Bank. Subconsciously, he knew better than to cross them. If it weren''t for hearing that name again, Danzo might have forgotten about the incident altogether, lost amidst the fog of old age.


    Seeing Danzo''s reaction, Hiruzen was honestly shocked. He had never seen his friend back down just from hearing someone''s name. This realization left Hiruzen deeply concerned. If Danzo, known for his unwavering resolve, was reacting like this, then this incident might be far more disastrous than any war they had faced before.


    "Hahaha, why don''t we all calm down for now," Hiruzen interjected with his usual kind smile, though the underlying threat was unmistakable. If Izanami didn''t back down, Konoha would have justifiable cause for war. After all, protecting one''s honor was a valid reason for conflict.


    However, Hiruzen''s assumption was gravely mistaken. Izanami couldn''t care less about starting a war. With the contract that once bound her now disappeared, she no longer felt constrained. Moreover, as Madara''s teacher, she possessed formidable power, capable of taking on all four hidden villages without breaking a sweat.


    "But before we descend into further argument, let''s put an end to this," Tsunade interjected firmly, cutting Izanami off. "Bickering amongst ourselves won''t accomplish anything. Let''s just get this negotiation over with. I have other matters to attend to." Her tone brooked no further dissent as she directed the conversation back to its intended purpose.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 28

    Chapter 28


    "Hmm, according to the contract, it is stated that this debt will be paid by the two founding clans of Konoha, the Senju and the Uchiha. Is that correct?" Hiruzen inquired, resting his chin in his hands.


    Izanami nodded in acknowledgment and replied, "Yes, at that time, those two clans under the name of Konoha borrowed that sum of money. Initially, they diligently paid their debts for a few years before it abruptly ceased. We patiently waited for your economy to stabilize, given Konoha''s esteemed reputation among hidden villages, fully expecting the debts to be honored. However, it seems we were mistaken," she finished, her tone dripping with disdain.


    Hiruzen, for his part, didn¡¯t even twitch upon hearing those words. As someone who had been Hokage for more than 15 years, he could be as shameless as Danzo when it mattered. He completely ignored Izanami¡¯s words and stated, ¡°Since this agreement was made by the two clans, it has nothing to do with the village. You can go to the Uchiha compound to ask for the debt, since the Senju only has one member.¡±


    Izanami didn¡¯t act surprised hearing those words. She simply asked, ¡°So you are saying this debt will be paid by the Uchiha and Senju only, and the village refuses to meddle with this matter?¡±


    Hiruzen nodded as he continued, ¡°Yes, since the agreement was made this way, I fail to see any reason for Konoha to meddle in the matters of these two clans.¡±


    ¡°Very well, then this young miss will go visit the Uchiha clan to settle the debt, but I warn you now, don¡¯t meddle with this after saying those words,¡± Izanami threatened.


    ¡°Worry not, the village will not meddle with clan matters unless it concerns the village as a whole,¡± Hiruzen said flatly.


    One might ask how he said those words in front of his student Tsunade Senju. Well, the answer is quite simple. A simple genjutsu made everyone forget about the presence of Tsunade and Shizune. If not for this Hiruzen wouldn¡¯t dare say these things out loud. After all, he still fears Tsunade¡¯s retaliation. Who knows what she will do if she gets mad.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s good to know,¡± Hiruzen replied, feeling a secret sigh of relief escape him. However, the next words from Izanami almost made him have a heart attack. ¡°Well, with that, over half of what I wanted to discuss is over,¡± she said with a smile.


    ¡°Oh, um, what else do you want to discuss with us?¡± Hiruzen said, internally freaking out. All his instincts as a great warrior and politician were screaming at him to run because what was coming next wasn¡¯t something he would like very much.


    Izanami said nothing as she took the last remaining scroll and placed it on the table. Upon closer inspection, it was a sealing scroll. With a bang, five mountains of piled-up documents came into view.


    ¡°These here are the details of the dead ninjas and civilians who all have debts to the World Bank. Usually, when someone who took a loan dies, we take all of their money in their bank account to cut off their debts. In case there is someone who inherited his wealth, we will leave 50% to the inheritor and give him more time to grow up to be an adult and pay up the rest of the debts. Of course, if the inheritor has no money, we will offer jobs that they will have to work until the debts are paid.


    ¡°But you see, the thing here is, in ninja villages, there is a rule that says all of the possessions of the deceased will be taken by the village unless there is someone to inherit the wealth. So, do you get what I¡¯m getting at?¡± Izanami said with an evil smirk.


    Although the elders and Hokage knew what she was talking about, their minds refused to believe it. If such a thing were true, then the village would crumble under debts. So, they desperately hoped for this to be just a bad dream. But unfortunately, reality is often cruel.


    ¡°Since the village claims all the possessions of every deceased ninja, they also claim the debt owed by that ninja,¡± Izanami said, fully revealing her evil smile. Oh, how much she enjoyed this feeling¡ªthe look of utter despair on the faces of those who thought themselves important.


    ¡°So, how will Konoha pay off this debt?¡± Izanami said, delivering the finishing blow.


    .


    ¡°Izanami-sama, we have arrived at our destination,¡± the voice of the carriage driver rang out as he stopped the carriage at a luxurious villa.


    Tengen opened the door for Izanami and the rest to disembark. If someone didn¡¯t know any better, they would think that he is a butler. Well, that couldn¡¯t be further from the truth. The truth is, the only reason Tengen is here is to indicate that the Land of Iron is on Izanami¡¯s side. Well, that is the official reason anyway. The true reason he is here is that he wants to have a vacation and travel around the world. As a teenager, it''s in his blood to explore the unknown.


    Luna, knowing this, allowed him to accompany Izanami. He was told to guard her for three months and come back to do his duties.


    When Izanami saw the place they were living in, a nostalgic look appeared in her eyes. Although the house had some old architecture, it was quite luxurious compared to what an average civilian has. What made Izanami quite nostalgic is that this house had the same design as the one she lived in when she was younger. She remembered one time showing a picture to Hashirama and Madara about her old home.


    ¡°So this is your house in Konoha, huh? I wonder why I never remember this being here,¡± Tsunade said, mumbling in confusion. For her, who lived in this village for most of her life, this is the first time she saw or heard about this house being here.


    ¡®Did they build it after the Nine-Tails incident? No, that''s impossible. I can feel faint traces of my grandfather''s Wood Style chakra from this building. So, this means this building was here when the village was founded. But how come I didn¡¯t know this?¡¯ she wondered as she gazed at the building.


    ¡°The answer is quite simple, actually. I placed some seals here to make everyone here forget about this building. So even if you saw this building before, you wouldn¡¯t pay any attention to it, like you wouldn¡¯t pay any attention to every pebble you come across,¡± Izanami said, interrupting her thoughts.


    ¡°Seals are too overpowered,¡± that''s all Tsunade could say after comprehending what Izanami said.


    ¡°Of course they are. Why the hell do you think other ninja villages all united to destroy the Uzumaki clan?¡± Izanami said as a matter of fact tone as she walked towards the house.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 29

    Chapter 29


    Despite not being used very often, the interior of the villa was quite clean. The floors were swept clean, the furniture polished to a shine. Sunlight streamed in through the windows, casting a warm glow over the tastefully decorated rooms. It was evident that someone had been maintaining the place meticulously, despite its infrequent use. Izanami walked through the halls with a sense of familiarity, her footsteps echoing softly against the wooden floors.


    Following her, the rest looked at the villa with curious eyes. It¡¯s not every day you see something so luxurious, especially since the wood here is made by their revered God of Shinobi. If news of such a building''s existence were revealed to the public, this place would have already been hailed as the most famous tourist attraction.


    As everyone knows, Hashirama, despite being hailed as the God of Shinobi, wasn¡¯t known for his creativity and intelligence, so he almost never made any buildings. Even in making the Senju compound, Hashirama only supplied the wood and not the building itself, like how Yamato would do in the future.


    So for Hashirama to make such a wonderful villa, it is seen how much effort he put into accomplishing it. This building may as well be his greatest masterpiece if we didn''t take Konoha village into account.


    While they were marveling at the building, a group of animals emerged from inside to welcome them. This group was quite bizarre, as there were cats, dogs, and crows among them.


    Usually, such a group wouldn''t come together, as some of them are each other''s natural enemies. Even if trained at a young age, they wouldn''t come as a group. But the most surprising thing here is that all these animals have eyes full of wisdom. If one didn''t know any better, some might mistake them for a bunch of ninjas who used transformation jutsu.


    Even amongst ninja beasts, only sage animals have shown this much intellect in their eyes. This is also one of the reasons why the Sannin are quite popular, due to their ability to command many beasts who have wisdom similar to any human.


    ¡°Oh, it''s been a while, you guys,¡± Izanami greeted the animals as she crouched down and began to pet them. She started with the cat that had a shy expression, then moved to the dog, which tried to dodge her hand, and lastly to the crow that seemed to be eager.


    After petting them all, she got up and dusted her clothes a little bit. Then, she looked around and asked aloud, ¡°So where is your caretaker?¡±


    ¡°I¡¯m here, Izanami-sama,¡± replied a middle-aged man who emerged from one of the rooms. If Naruto were to look at him, they would immediately recognize him. After all, he is the legendary Ramen Guy, Teuchi, the owner of the Ichiraku Ramen shop in Konoha.


    Seeing him, Izanami smiled. It was actually a coincidence that Teuchi came in contact with her. During the time he opened his shop for the first time in Konoha, he needed a sponsor to help him. So he applied for a loan from the World Bank. And it just so happened that Izanami saw this during her visits to the World Bank.


    After recognizing Teuchi, Izanami immediately sprang into action. She used her authority and issued a private meeting with him. And in that meeting, they made an agreement. Izanami would fully sponsor his business, and in return, he needed to do some odd jobs for her. Of course, most of her requests were quite simple, like keeping the mansion clean and taking care of the pets. So Teuchi didn¡¯t really mind it.


    In fact, this deal was quite advantageous for him. Not only did he get a great backer, but he also got a free residence in a luxurious mansion. And most of all, his shop is only a few meters away from the mansion, making it quite convenient for him.


    ¡°How was the negotiations, Izanami-sama? Did the village allow it?¡± Teuchi asked with a bit of expectation and hope.


    Izanami gave him a thumbs up and said, ¡°Yep, it all went according to plan."


    Hearing her words Teuchi burst into tears. Finally his friend''s son would be able to live his life as a normal kid. With Izanami as his backer no one in Konoha would ever be able to bully him again.


    .


    .


    .


    "Any ideas on how to settle this debt?" Hiruzen inquired, his voice punctuated by the haze of smoke from his cigarettes.


    ¡° With the current economic situation in Konoha I''m afraid we simply don¡¯t have the necessary funds to spare. We are already barely hanging on after the Kyuubi incident, ¡° Homura said with a grave tone. During the time Hiruzen was cursing he calculated the minimal funds that were required to hold off this debt till the village was able to stabilise itself. But unfortunately even that amount is not something the current Konoha can handle.


    ¡° Tsk do you think we would be able to make the other clan leaders agree to share the burden. ¡° Hiruzen asked with a click of tongue.


    ¡° That is highly unlikely, the clan leaders themselves are not faring any better due to the nine tail incident. ¡°Koharu interejected. As the person responsible for internal affairs she knew how much damage the village sustained more than anyone.


    ¡° damn does this mean we have to agree to her demands? ¡° Hiruzen said helplessly.


    Hearing his words Danzo who was silent suddenly sprang into action. He shouted at Hiruzen, ¡° Hiruzen are you out of your mind. That is the nine tails Jinchuriki we are talking about. How can you let an outsider get her hands on Konoha''s greatest weapon? ¡°


    "Then provide a damn solution to this problem!" Hiruzen finally snapped back at Danzo, his frustration boiling over.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 30

    Chapter 30


    "Then let''s utilize Shisui¡¯s eyes to manipulate that girl¡¯s mind," Danzo suggested with a hint of reluctance. He was hesitant to sacrifice one of Shisui¡¯s Mangekyo? Sharingan techniques, as he had his sights set on claiming those eyes for himself. However, he knew he had to compromise in this situation. If they were serious about paying off all those debts, Danzo realized he would be the first to face bankruptcy.


    As the overseer of most orphans who became members of Root, Danzo controlled all their assets. Given that Root operatives often undertook perilous missions with high mortality rates, he had made a reckless decision in the past. Before sending any of his operatives on these suicide missions, he instructed them to take out substantial loans from the World Bank. This ensured that even if his puppets perished, they would still be of use to him.


    Reflecting on his past actions, Danzo couldn¡¯t comprehend why he had made such choices. Perhaps it was driven by a desire for revenge, or maybe it stemmed from his frustration with Hiruzen, who had slashed Root''s budget. Regardless, Danzo harbored deep regret for his decisions.


    "Are you out of your damn mind, Danzo? Do you even comprehend the consequences of what you''re proposing?" Hiruzen''s voice was laced with anger and frustration as he addressed his longtime rival.


    "Calm down, Hiruzen. First, let''s hear what Danzo has to say," Koharu interjected, attempting to diffuse the tension. While acknowledging Danzo''s extreme methods, she couldn''t deny that his solutions often came with some merit.


    ¡° We will use the Anbu ninjas to lure in her bodyguards and if possible kill him while framing him to be foreign ninja spy. While her bodyguard is busy we will use that opportunity to sneak into that girl''s house and use Kotoamatsukami on her. ¡° Danzo said his perfect plan with a bit of pride. ¡® and after that I will take Shisui¡¯s eyes after his perpace is over. ¡® he thought internally. Upstodatee from


    Hiruzen began to ponder for a moment. Although the plan seemed to be foolproof, the risk is too high. For example what would happen if the Anbu ninjas were not able to hold Tenegen back. Despite not being famous in the ninja world Tengen as the youngest Hashira has the strength of an elite jounin. So his ability to escape from the Anbu ninjas is not an impossibility.


    ¡° Danzo this is too risky and consequences are too serveware. Konoha would be seen as a laughing stock if this is brought to light. So don¡¯t even think of doing something like this. ¡° Hiruzen said righteously.


    ¡° Hiruzen, you are a coward. Do you really want to give up the custody of the nine tailed Jinchuriki and do nothing? ¡° Danzo roared as he glared at his friend. Did he think he was born yesterday? This cunning old friend only wanted him to do everything in secret so that he will have no part in this.


    ¡° Danzo don¡¯t forget I am the Hokage ¡° Hiruzen roared with his famous catch praise.


    ¡° Hiruzen, you will regret it. Everything I do is for Konoha, ¡° Danzo said as he made his exit. He vowed to take revenge on his friend for making do this.


    After Danzo''s departure, the Hokage''s office once again returned to its silent state. Hiruzen exhaled a deep breath as he sat down on his seat. He looked at his two remaining friends and said, "I will ask the Fire Daimyo for some support. For now, let''s rest and gather our thoughts and discuss this matter tomorrow. "


    Homura and Koharu nodded as they too left the office. They too are tired after brainstorming for ideas for so long.


    After everyone left the office, Hiruzen looked at the full moon in the sky as he muttered a bit melancholically, "Sensei, I really wish you were here to help us."


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° Yes I¡¯m sure you guys have heard about the recent Hayuga clan incident ¡° Everyone nodded at her words. Due to the Kumo ambassadors making a big fuss about it in public, the information about this incident was quite well spread.


    ¡° Well after seeing Konoha¡¯s stand the other hidden villages realised how dire the situation in Konoha is. So as to not let this golden opportunity go to waste, they are actively trying to provoke Konoha into war. ¡° Izanami said.


    ¡° So what are you planning to do? As far as I know you wouldn¡¯t get involved in this unless the village¡¯s foundation is about to collapse. ¡°Kaguya said, looking at her granddaughter. After living with Izanami for a few centuries she knew roughly how Izanami¡¯s mind works.


    She doesn¡¯t actively try to meddle with the world. To her, this world will always be the same until humans realize how foolish their narrow-minded thinking is. Chakra isn¡¯t all about violence and destruction. If the villages used their natural habitat to their advantage, they too would be able to prosper.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 31

    Chapter 31


    "I''m worried Konoha would use Naruto as their weapon to minimize unnecessary casualties. With how the village views him, the possibility is too high," Izanami said with a serious look.


    Kaguya and Sakumo both nodded in understanding. Unlike in the era of the Second Hokage, who had the village tightly wrapped in his hands, the Third Hokage¡¯s authority is quite limited. Since Naruto is not officially a ninja, he is under the rule of the civilian council.


    Almost every member of the civilian council would be more than happy to sacrifice him to save some villagers. Even if the Third Hokage refuses, he will be cornered if the other three advisors agree to it. And with Danzo¡¯s character, he would be the first one to agree to this proposal, as it is too advantageous a situation for him to miss.


    ¡° Minato Sensei son ¡° Rin said with a bit of sadness in her voice.


    "Speaking about him, how is he? I heard he was kicked out of the orphanage," Izanami asked in genuine worry. She knew that the general treatment towards Naruto was bad, so she made several arrangements for his care.


    One arrangement was providing him with unlimited free ramen in Teuchi¡¯s shop. This was something she and Teuchi both agreed on. As a fellow disciple of Jiraiya alongside Minato, Teuchi wanted to adopt Naruto when he first saw him.


    It wasn¡¯t just Teuchi who wanted to adopt Naruto; many families and clans wanted to do the same. Some did so out of loyalty to Minato, while others were driven by greed. However, all these attempts were rejected by the Third Hokage. He didn¡¯t even let the Nara clan, one of the clans that supported his position, do anything.


    Instead of Rin, it was Yahiko who answered her question. Since he is a crow, he is the most suitable one to observe Naruto without anyone getting suspicious.


    "It''s quite terrible, actually. Due to the rumors, almost every villager knows Naruto''s appearance. So most shop vendors overprice him or outright reject him. This has led to him not going to any shops, even if the shop vendors act clueless about his identity. If it wasn''t for Teuchi, Naruto may have died of hunger," Yahiko explained.


    Hearing his words, Izanami had a grim expression. It seemed that most of the countermeasures she took weren''t that successful. She had sent agents to run food shops so Naruto would be able to buy some healthy food. She also tried to increase the allowance Naruto received, but that proved to be useless as the shops overpriced him.


    "Oh right, I almost forgot about this. Last week, I saw Sakumo-san¡¯s son, Kakashi, drop off some groceries on Naruto''s doorstep," Yahiko said, surprising Izanami a little.


    In the original story, Kakashi was too broken from all the deaths to do anything about Naruto. If she remembered correctly, Kakashi went on more than 100 S-rank missions to escape from reality. If it wasn¡¯t for Jiraiya¡¯s book, he would have become a person devoid of emotion. So what could be the reason for his sudden change.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter32

    Chapter32


    Shisui was having a very bad day. During his shift in Anbu, he was tasked to escort a noble to the Fire Capital, and it wasn¡¯t a pleasant experience. They had to stop at various spots just because the noble wanted to enjoy the scenery. To top it all off, Shisui had to be on guard for any sneak attacks or bandits. Furthermore, the guards the noble had were not even doing their job right; it seemed as though those samurais were treating it like a vacation.


    Shisui really wanted to relax like them, but he couldn¡¯t. Due to the recent financial struggle and shortage in manpower in Konoha Anbu, ninjas like him had to take these missions and bring some money to the village. In addition to that, the village wanted to promote their ninjas to have more people give missions to them. So if someone messed up these missions, the backlash would be too much for the village to bear.


    This was especially true for an Uchiha like him. Shisui knew that most of the higher-ups in Konoha would directly blame his clan if he made any mistakes. And he couldn¡¯t afford that, especially at a time like this when the relationship between the village and the Uchiha clan was at its worst.?iscover new chapters at novelhall.com


    So he somehow endured it and completed his mission. Since he was exhausted mentally he hurriedly returned to the village to get some good rest for the day. But his bad luck didn¡¯t let him do as he pleased.


    Just after he was about to go to bed to get some sleep a Root ninja came and told him to come to the Root headquarters. Since the summon is from an elder of Konoha, Shisui had to come there as soon as possible. So he could begrudgingly put on his ninja uniform again and rush to the Root headquarters. As an Anbu ninja he knew where the Root headquarters was.


    Due to his hurry he didn¡¯t even inform Fugaku about his summon. This is a procedure the Uchiha do when someone from the higher ups summons them. They want no more misunderstanding after all.


    ¡® Now that I think about it I should have spoken to clan leader Fugaku about everything ¡® Shisui thought with a grim face.


    His situation isn¡¯t quite what you could say good. One of his eyes is missing while he is poisoned. And worst of all he is surrounded by Root ninjas who are at minimum jonin level shinobi.


    His only saving grace is the Susano he forcibly managed to summon. But even that is too taxing for his body due to the huge consumption of chakra and the loss of one of his eyes. He can feel himself almost nearing his limit.


    His only hope is to kill as many Root members so that Danzo would call them back. After all he doesn¡¯t need to waste more of his valuable Root ninjas to kill a near death ninja when he can get his hands on his corpse after his death. After all, he is the darkness of Konoha , who would question his actions if the Hokage is quiet about it.


    And so with that as the only hope Shisui acted and fought desperately. With his susano¡¯s absolute defence he didn¡¯t worry about any attacks as he went on the full offensive. And soon he was able to kill more than 5 Root ninjas.


    But even after all these casualties the order for retreat didn¡¯t come. It looked like he had underestimated Danzo¡¯s greed for his remaining eye. Shisui quietly began to steady his breathing. It seemed he would have to use all his trump cards to escape from this situation.


    But just as he was about to make a move, a sudden chilling sensation enveloped him, sending shivers down his spine. The atmosphere around him grew tense, and an eerie silence descended upon the area, causing even the bravest of Root ninjas to freeze in shock. In that fleeting moment of distraction, their fate was sealed.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 33

    Chapter 33


    "Damn these teenagers these days, always thinking suicide is the best option," Izanami cursed as she brought the now blind Shisui to safety, just in time before he hit the water.


    After covering her traces from the previous incident, Izanami directly dashed towards the place where she sensed Shisui and Itachi were.


    Yes, like in the original story, Itachi managed to reach Shisui in time. In fact, he located Shisui when he was in his Susano fending off the Root members. Uchiha clan members instinctively feel the presence of the Susano if they are close enough. This is especially true for Itachi, who is a true Uchiha. Susano is something they can achieve through their bloodline, after all.


    After finding Shisui, Itachi was about to go and help him, but Izanami acted before he could. She didn''t believe Itachi could handle all those Root members while protecting Shisui. He still lacked enough fighting experience, even though he is at jonin level.Discover new chapters at novelhall.com


    So, with Izanami distracting every Root member, Itachi managed to rescue Shisui away from the battleground. The only reason they didn''t rush to a hospital is because of Danzo. That man won''t let Shisui live another day, after all.


    So, like in the original story, they went to the cliff where they usually train since, for the time being, it is a good spot for rest. And, like the brain-dead idiot Shisui is, he didn¡¯t think of a way to get revenge and instead tried to commit suicide after traumatizing his best friend.


    As the only person who has a brain, Izanami had to save the idiot before he went to the pure land and gave her more trouble.


    Izanami sighed as she detoxified Shisui after placing him on the bed. They are now in a room inside Izanami''s mansion. This is the best place she could take him without anyone noticing. Sending him to Japan is just asking for trouble. She was sure Nanami would beat the shit out of him as soon as he regained consciousness. Kagami Uchiha, Shisui¡¯s grandfather, was her best friend after all.


    So, she naturally kept tabs on Shisui. So, after finding out how easily he was brainwashed, it left a sour taste in her mouth. Further, if he realizes the real reason he was attacked today, well, it would be better for him to die with ignorance than face her wrath.


    After half an hour, Shisui began to show signs of regaining consciousness. The poison was exceptionally potent, causing him to pass out as soon as he began to fall. Thus, the fact that he was even able to talk to Itachi without showing any signs of pain was already a miracle.


    ¡°You shouldn''t try to get up so soon, Shisui. With you losing your eyes and the aftereffects of the poison, your body simply can''t handle the strain,¡± Izanami warned when she saw Shisui trying to get up from the bed.


    ¡°Who are you? Am I dead? Is this the Pure Land?¡± Shisui asked as he tried to sense his surroundings. Even though he lost his eyes, he is still a great sensor.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 34

    Chapter 34


    It was a new day for Konoha village. Many shop vendors began their preparations to open their shops for business. Ninjas began to head over to the Hokage office to get their missions and make a living. Everything was normal except for a simple detail. The Hokage office which was supposed to be a quiet place is quite rowdy in the early morning. Upstodatee from


    That is because the Hokage advisor Danzo Shamura is now arguing with a girl who looked like she couldn''t be bothered to be here. Yep you guessed it right.


    As soon as the sun rays hit the earth izanami came to the Hokage office to take custody of naruto. And she deliberately took her time coming here to make sure all of the Konoha corrupt 3 elders came running here.


    Why were they in a hurry you ask. Well the meeting they were supposed to be holding was actually planned to be in the evening. Well that¡¯s what they believed as izanami¡¯s words were , ¡° give me your answer tomorrow. ¡°.


    Well due to yesterday¡¯s meeting being held in the afternoon no one suspected anything. Even Danzo, the one who quickly catches on to schemes amongst them. Due to their misconception they were unable to execute their plans. After all, who would believe a high ranking person would come in the early morning.


    ¡° We cannot let you take in the nine tails Jinchuriki. That is konoha¡¯s property ¡° Danzo roared as he glared at Izanami trying to scare her.


    But izanami, who would even scare Madara, completely ignored his glare and plainly said, ¡° Do I look , I care , if you want the tail beast, why don¡¯t I just release it. And besides, do you even have the capital to negotiate with me? You all owe The World Bank a hefty sum and that¡¯s beside the money Minato borrowed under name of the Uzumaki Clan ¡°


    She sneered at him. Does this man think he is some big shot for her to obey him? Even the Fire daimyo won¡¯t dare to say anything when she is speaking. This is how much of an influence the World Bank has in this world.


    ¡° Furthermore with the records we have he seemed to be using the inheritance his parents left him , and as per the rules he has to shoulder the debts his father took ¡°


    ¡° How do you know Naruto Uzumaki is Minato¡¯s son? That is supposed to be a S rank secret. ¡° Hiruzen asked in a panic. He and the others heard nothing of this yesterday. They were only told that a clan debt under the Uzumaki name was there and they wanted Naruto, the only known survivor, to pay it back. There was no mention of Minato. Did someone leak the secret to her?


    Izanami threw a disdainful glance at Hiruzen and said, ¡° hmph do you think the World Bank is as stupid as those stupid villagers you have. We have legal documents of Minato Namikaze and Kushina Uzumaki marriage certificates. In fact the loan Minato borrowed under the name of the Uzumaki clan was to stabilise the situation in the village.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 35

    Chapter 35


    ¡° hmm hmm hmm ¡° Izanami hummed a tune as she walked through the busy streets of Konoha. She was in a good mood after trolling those old geezers. Those geezers didn¡¯t know when to stop their antics. And besides, they sure love to talk as if they are protecting this village.


    Putting aside Hiruzen¡¯s and Danzo¡¯s actions against the Uchiha and Senju clans . The other two advisors have done nothing that has benefited the Hidden Leaf. The only thing they did was dry up the Konoha treachery. If one were to look carefully almost every major civilian business has the backing of these two elders.


    Even the Sarutobi Clan doesn¡¯t have that much wealth as these two. But unfortunately these two elders have no strength to back up their wealth. Their clans are still minor clans without any powerhouses. This is why they need the support of either Danzo or Hiruzen.


    But even then they most of the time support Hiruzen since he is very lenient towards them. This is also why they objected when Danzo tried to become Hokage after Hiruzen¡¯s death. They knew that he would not hesitate to steal all their assets while saying it is for the good of the village.


    As Izanami was thinking about the four idiots she suddenly heard a very disturbing conversation. Upstodatee from


    ¡° Hey, did you see that demon fox? I heard some people saying that they are gonna vanquish him for once and for all. They have long had enough of that brat''s pranks. I mean who does he think he is ? If it was not for the third Hokage¡¯s orders, wouldn''t that beast be killed already. ¡° said one man as he asked his companion.


    ¡° Sheeze, do you want to go to jail? Even if that demon fox deserves to die a horrible death we still can''t go against the Hokage''s orders. What would happen to us if we were discovered? ¡° said the other one as he looked everywhere in fear.


    ¡° Huh, do you truly believe that our esteemed Hokage would blame us if we do something against that filth? I bet the only reason he even forbids us is because he couldn¡¯t see a child being killed, ¡° said the other.


    ¡° Well that might be true but he will still punish us if we disobey his orders ¡°said the man trying to convince his companion.


    The companion shrugged as he said, ¡° well since I¡¯m not the one who is doing the deed I wouldn¡¯t know how their actions would be faced, I just told you because I wanted to share this good info with you. I mean if they really were able to do something against that demon fox won¡¯t everyone be happy. ¡°


    The villager nodded as he said, ¡° yeah I too would be glad if someone decided to get rid of that Demon Fox.... ¡°


    Izanami who was eavesdropping on their conversation frowned. She could tell that those people who are searching for Naruto are not normal civilians. Civilians don¡¯t have that much courage to challenge the Hokage¡¯s authority and do any harm to Naruto. Even ninjas don¡¯t dare to do that if they don¡¯t want to be labelled as a rogue. So this can only be a work of one person.


    Danzo who doesn''t give a shit about Hokage¡¯s authority. And he just happened to have a small army of emotionless puppets who would do his bidding.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 36

    Chapter 36


    Danzo Shimura is well-versed in schemes. As the true darkness of Konoha, he has a hand in almost every scheme that has been carried out in the village. Whether it was to frame a genius, eliminate an unstable Uchiha, kidnap a hidden Senju member, assassinate a rising Hokage candidate, or even attempt to assassinate the Hokage himself, he has been involved in every conceivable plot.


    However, despite his expertise, these years have not yielded favorable results for him. First, there was a failed attempt to kill Hiruzen. Due to this failure he had lost the trust of Kakashi Hatake, a great ninja who was on the verge of becoming his greatest tool. Then there is the failed attempt to snatch both of Shisui¡¯s eyes. Even though he only got one eye it is still a failure . Especially when he lost an elite squad during the mission to retrieve the other eye.


    And now his most recent failure is losing the nine tails custody to that cursed brat. Who does she think she is to demand them hand over the nine tails from Hiruzen. That is Konoha¡¯s greatest weapon. A weapon that is rightfully his. And he isn¡¯t going to give that weapon to anyone.


    So, as soon as he left the Hokage office, he instructed his Root ninjas to place a Root seal on the Nine-Tails Jinchuriki. This way, even if that brat takes custody of the Nine-Tails, he will still have the ability to command it to do his bidding. Since this is a very important task, he especially ordered his elite scouting squad to do this mission.


    And the result? All of his elite ninjas are dead, their corpses left in his office. And the weirdest thing about this is how the culprit came and placed these corpses here. There was no chakra trail or any use of space time ninjutsu. Danzo made sure of it himself. The Root ninjas who were guarding this place were not harmed or placed in a genjutsu. This is like it was done by a ghost.


    ¡° Does our tracking team find any clues? ¡° Danzo asked the Root ninja beside him.


    ¡° No Danzo sama both the Inuzuka and Aburame clan members are still searching for any clues about the intruder. ¡° The Root ninja beside him replied.


    ¡°Tsk useless ¡° Danzo spat as he clicked his tongue. He needed to fortify his base more thoroughly. He didn¡¯t want another incident like this happening in his Root headquarters.


    ¡® I need more funds. The barrier needs more adjustments and more ninjas are needed to replace the dead ones ¡® Danzo thought as he remembered his recent mission failures.


    ¡° i¡¯m going to the Hokage Office , notify me immediately if you find something, ¡° Danzo coldly said as he turned to leave.


    ¡° Yes Danzo sama ¡° The Root ninjas bowed as they all said in unison.


    The trip to the Hokage office was uneventful, as Danzo used the secret tunnels to get there. Being someone accustomed to darkness, he found it troublesome to traverse the main streets. Apart from the Anbu ninjas patrolling the tunnels, he encountered no one along the way.


    When Danzo arrived at the Hokage Tower, he bypassed the line and headed straight to the Hokage''s office. As a high-ranking elder of Konoha and the Hokage''s assistant, he had the privilege to do so. Without bothering to knock, he entered the office.


    "Hiruzen..." Danzo''s words trailed off as he took in the sight before him.


    Danzo, seeing his friend''s state, didn''t know what to say. He had a sinking suspicion that the person who killed his Root ninjas is the same person who cast the Genjutsu on Hirzen. But he wondered what his friend saw for him to act this way.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 37

    Chapter 37


    In the outskirts of Konoha there is a river. This river is called Naka river. If someone from thousand years were to see this river they would recognise that this is the same river Indra created with his Susano.


    On one side of the river back a small golden haired blue eyed child was fishing. He looked like he was about 4 years old. On his side was a little basket made from leaves. Inside the basket there were some small fishes he managed to catch.


    While this kid was peacefully catching his lunch and dinner two people walking towards his direction.


    They were Izanami and the Anbu ninja. Izanami had an annoyed look as she glared at the Anbu ninja who was trying hard to ignore the piercing glare.


    Earlier when they entered Naruto''s apartment they witnessed how cruel the villagers actually were. There were numerous rocks that were thrown at his apartment. Furthermore, in the fridge she found out that there is basically nothing but expired milk. Even in the cupboards there was only ramen which was nearing its expire date.


    Looking at his wardrobe they found the only clothes he has are a pair of yellow shirt and a short. His pyjamas were the hospital gowns that the hospital give.


    And since this visit Izanami was giving the Anbu ninja a stink eye. She even asked in sarcasm, ¡° hey although I can be called relatively ignorant of the ways of a ninja but is your village right in the head. Aren''t all playing with fire here.


    Do you guys even know what would happen if Naruto snapped suddenly? Are you that confident in restraining an angered jinchuriki? ¡°


    Ever since then the Anbu ninja has avoided eye contact with her. He too was puzzled on why the third Hokage didn¡¯t do anything about this. As a Anbu ninja he knew if the third Hokage wanted to remove the rumors around Naruto he could do it without any problem. You just need to issue a law and use some ninjas who are good with Genjutsu to change the memory of whoever spreads the rumor. And ever since then he has come to doubt the Hokage¡¯s character.


    This is the effect Izanami wanted. Today it would just be one person but in a few years this seed of doubt will spread towards his comrades, family members and so on. And if the right evidence is presented Hiruzen¡¯s image would shatter immediately.


    ¡® hehehe I wonder how Hiruzen will react when his reputation goes rock bottom in an instant. ¡® Izanami thought with a chuckle.


    Her chuckle, although not loud, managed to capture the attention of the young Naruto who was fishing. Turning around he saw one unfamiliar girl and a ninja who wore the same uniform as the silver haired ninja who was kind enough to give him some groceries.


    "Who are you, big sister? Oh, are you here to fish too?" Naruto asked with his innocent smile, a rare display of trust toward a stranger, given his past experiences of being shunned and mistreated by the villagers. But this "big sister" seemed different from the others in Konoha; at least she didn''t scowl at the sight of him.


    "Oh no, little brother, I''m not here to fish. But I''m a little curious why you think someone would come to this dangerous forest just to fish when they could buy some at the market," Izanami replied, her expression tinged with amusement.


    Indeed, this forest was labeled as a danger zone, and it seemed unlikely that anyone, except Naruto, would venture into it for fishing. Even if someone did want to fish, there were safer designated spots for such activities, especially catering to tourists visiting from the Fire Country.


    After thinking for a while she decided to find out what happened after going back to the mansion. And without forgetting to give an annoyed look at the Anbu ninja she kindly spoke to Naruto, ¡° Naruto it looks like we have to go back to the village. Why don''t I help you pack things up here ¡°


    Naruto, although puzzled, agreed to head back to the village. Although the amount of fish he catched today is a bit low it''s still better than nothing.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 38

    Chapter 38


    The journey back to the village was filled with Naruto''s boundless energy and curiosity. He bombarded Izanami with a multitude of questions, his enthusiasm undiminished by her calm demeanour. While some might have found his exuberance overwhelming, Izanami remained patient, answering each question with ease.


    Having interacted with individuals like Ashura and Hashirama in the past, Izanami was well-accustomed to dealing with cheerful and hyperactive personalities. Naruto''s lively spirit reminded her of them, and she found herself enjoying the interaction despite the unusual circumstances.


    As they reached a junction where their paths diverged, Naruto wore a wistful expression. Despite his reluctance to part ways, he maintained his customary smile and waved at Izanami. "Well, Big Sis, I have to go my own way from here. Thanks for hanging out with me today. I had a blast!" His smile held genuine warmth, though a touch of sadness colored his gaze.


    Hearing his words Izanami was a little puzzled then she suddenly realised ¡® Crap I forgot to tell him the news ¡®. She coughed a little before saying , ¡° Oh right Naruto I forgot to tell you but you will be living with me from today. As of today you are formally under my care. ¡°


    Hearing those words Naruto was stunned. Then a happy smile appeared on his face. With tears dripping from his eyes he asked, ¡° Big sister does that mean you are going to be my family¡±


    In Naruto''s small mind only those who are family would live together. It is because of his lack of family that Naruto had to live alone.


    Izanami was surprised at his words. Then a happy reassuring smile came to her face. She patted Naruto''s head as he said , ¡° Yes from today on we are family¡±


    ¡° Yeee I have a family too ¡° Naruto cheered happily. He was so happy that he jumped a few times.


    Chuckling at his childishness Izanami held Naruto''s hand as she guided him to the mansion.


    And to make sure they were not interrupted again she casted a small Genjutsu on the Anbu ninjas to go away.


    After they left she deployed her domain to mask their presence. She didn''t want Naruto to witness her punch an ignorant passerby because they couldn''t keep their mouths shut.


    Naruto obediently followed Izanami wherever she was taking him. He didn''t ask any more questions thinking it would annoy her.


    Izanami couldn''t help but be amused by Naruto''s behavior. If she didn''t know any better, she might have mistaken him for a well-mannered, obedient child. "It seems this poor guy has suffered more than it was told in the canon," she thought with a sad smile. She decided to punish Hiruzen and Danzo a little more to make it up to Naruto for what he suffered.


    When she thought of this, a collective shiver ran through the backs of Hiruzen and Danzo, who were still in the Hokage office waiting for any news about the intruder. At that moment, they didn¡¯t realize that the one who had perpetrated all the actions that terrified both of them was coming to punish them again.


    Arriving near the mansion, Naruto''s excitement grew too much for his act to continue, ¡° Wow big sister, is this really your house? This house is 3 times bigger than my apartment building. ¡° He said with his eyes shining like stars.


    ¡° Of course I did. What else could I do in that cold prison. No matter how many seals your father and uncle placed on me they can¡¯t completely cut off my connection to this planet. So I was able to see how my grandsons were. ¡° She said with a bit of sadness.


    Izanami sighed at this. Her father and uncle were great beings who were respected by many but they were horrible sons who didn¡¯t know how much they hurt their mother.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 39

    Chapter 39


    After a while Naruto came out from the bathroom. He was now wearing a yukata that looked quite good on him.


    ¡° Now that''s better, so what do you think about your new outfit?¡± Izanami asked with a smile. Naruto''s outfit was tailored made for him.


    ¡° Hmm I don''t know, it feels kinda weird.¡± Naruto said honestly. Due almost all of his clothes being rags he doesn''t know how to feel when he is given such good clothes to wear. It felt very foreign to him.


    Izanami had to smile wryly at this. It seems like she needs to give him more time to adapt to his new lifestyle before giving the gifts she has for him.


    ¡° Well anyway, let''s go to Ichiraku. I''m sure your stomach is already feeling hungry. ¡° Izanami said, making him excited again.


    Then Izanami exited the mansion with a super excited Naruto. They only had to walk a few steps before they arrived at the Ramen Shop.


    Looking around Izanami saw that there were not the only ones who came to eat some ramen. There was Tsunade , Shizune and Tengen who were already digging into thier meals. And apart from them Izanami found someone unexpected.


    ¡° Oh I didn''t expect to see you here Nanami. Did you finally decide to go on a vacation? ¡° Izanami asked with a raised eyebrow.


    This workaholic daughter of hers doesn''t know how to take it easy at all. In fact the only times she even takes a break is when Izanami issues an order.


    Nanami didn''t say anything as she was busy eating her noodles. And if Izanami didn¡¯t know any better she would have thought Nanami didn''t hear her earlier which is impossible as the second human sage her perception and hearing is top notch.


    ¡® Oh yeah come to think of it , doesn''t that old toad sage Gamamaru like to act as a deaf , senile old geezer. ¡® Izanami thought of the best actor in the world. Being a sage he is one with nature meaning his physical conditions would always be in top shape even if he is old. So why did Gamamaru act like a senile old geezer? It¡¯s just because he wants to set the right mood to deliver his prophecies.


    ¡° So who is this? ¡° Nanami¡¯s voice broke Izanami from her thoughts.


    ¡° This is your new youngest brother Naruto Uzumaki, be nice to him since he is family from now on. ¡° Izanami said with a smile.


    Tsunade and Shizune, who were eating and listening to the conversation, almost choked at her words. They knew what being adopted by Izanami meant. It would mean no one would be allowed to bully him or her. Normally, this would be a good thing, but Naruto is a child who is despised and bullied by almost everyone in Konoha. Izanami doesn¡¯t tolerate anyone mistreating her children, and when she seeks revenge, it often leads to a bloodbath.


    Seeing their dumbfounded looks, Nanami shook her head in resignation. ¡® If you are too shocked at this much then you might as well have your common sense broken by her after living with her for a few days.¡¯ she thought with a little bit of amusement.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 40

    Chapter 40


    After a while the celebration ended as everyone was too full to eat anything. Teuchi has some amazing culinary skills that made almost everyone ask for a second serving. After paying the bill all of them bid their farewells and came back to the mansion.


    Tsunade, who was the laziest of all of them, went directly to the winery to grab a bottle to drink. What good would a celebration would be if they didn¡¯t get drunk.


    ¡° Oh right Tsunade remember to bring a glass of fruit juice for Naruto ¡° izanami said not intending to stop Tsunade this time. Putting aside Tsunade¡¯s ulterior motives she thought it is a good decision to have a small gathering for Naruto to properly introduce himself to the family. Discover new chapters at novelhall.com


    ¡° Ok ¡° Tsunade said as she rummaged through the wine cellar to see what was in there like she was selecting fruits from the market.


    ¡° Come on Naruto, let''s go to the living room and prepare the table. You have some space for some fruit juice right ¡° Izanami said with a smile.


    ¡° You bet I do, ¡° Naruto said with a cheeky smile.


    ¡° hahaha that¡¯s the spirit ¡° izanami said heartily as she guided him to the living room. The room was decorated with many beautiful paintings , calligraphy and antiques.


    And to no one''s surprise Kaguya, Rin , Yahiko and Sakumo were lazing around in the living room.


    ¡° Oh, did you guys also want to celebrate with us? ¡° Izanami asked as she carried Kaguya into her arms.


    ¡° yeah I wanna join ¡° came Kaguya¡¯s lazy reply.


    ¡° oh a party i¡¯m in ¡° said Yahiko who looks a bit excited.


    ¡°If it isn¡¯t too much ¡° came Rin¡¯s reserved reply.


    ¡° Sure ¡° came Sakumo¡¯s short reply.


    While the group were preparing the table for another celebration Nanami was walking down the corridor towards one of the guest rooms that is being accompanied by Shisui. As the leader of the Yokai unit she knew almost everything that was happening in the Shinobi world. Especially if it was something as important as Shisui Uchiha committing suicide.


    As the remaining descendant of her old friend Kagami Uchiha, Shisui was on Nanami¡¯s lookout list. A prodigy who was able to graduate from the academy at the age of 7 . Made the name for himself as the Shisui of the Body Flicker in the Third great ninja war. A leader of the peace faction in the Uchiha clan.


    But even in his impressive record there was one thing that made Nanami feel a headache. Shisui Uchiha is too naive. After getting the Mangekyo Sharingan and mastering it he told his abilities to the Third Hokage and his three friends.


    Like a dam that was broken, tears began to stream down Shisui''s eye sockets. He didn''t know who this stranger is but she gave him the same comfort his grandfather had once given him. So he instinctively let his feelings take over him .


    He let out all the bottle up emotions inside of him. How he felt when Danzo took his eyes , how he felt betrayed when the third Hokage didn''t do anything to stop the conflict with the Uchiha. He let it all out. Everything that made him stressed out day and night was said to Nanami.


    Due to his exhaustion from speaking so long he unintentionally slept in Nanami ''s arms.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 41

    Chapter 41


    After waking up, Shisui felt awkward. He didn¡¯t know why he acted this way when the person in front of him was a complete stranger. The only thing he could do at this moment was look away in embarrassment.


    Seeing him like this, Nanami couldn¡¯t help but release a small chuckle. ''Shisui resembles his grandfather too much,'' she thought with a hint of nostalgia. When they were kids, Kagami was always the crybaby. He would cry over the smallest things and then look away in shame after realizing he had cried.


    ¡° Now since you are all embarrassed I should introduce myself. My name is Nanami Rushifa?, the adopted daughter of Izanami Otsutsuki, the one who saved you yesterday. ¡° Nanami said, trying to change the subject.


    ¡°Hello, as you may have already known, I am Shisui Uchiha. ¡° Shisui also said his introductions.


    ¡° Yes, the idiot descendant of Kagami uchiha ¡° Nanami said sarcastically.


    ¡° It seems like you have a grudge against my grandfather, ¡° Shisui said with a wry smile. Although Shisui couldn¡¯t see her face she could tell from her voice that this person is young girl. Maybe one of grandfather¡¯s secret descendants. He did hear from his clansman that his grandfather was quite a playboy.


    *boink *


    Shisui¡¯s thoughts stopped as he felt a huge pain on his head. He could guess that he was hit on the head.


    Nanami who had her fist clenched said ominously, ¡° Although I can¡¯t read people like my mother I still can see that you were thinking something rude about me. ¡°


    ¡® Scary ¡® Shisui thought as he held his head in pain.


    ¡° So why are you here? I don''t think you just came here just to see me ¡° Shisui asked as pondered on why this lady came here to see him.


    ¡° I''m here to actually give something your grandfather left for you ¡° Nanami said as she reached inside of her Kimono and pulled a container. She then placed it on Shisui''s hands as she said ,


    ¡° These here are your grandfather''s original eyes. He originally intrusted them to me to give you so you can unlock your Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan but since you decided to donate them you could use these as spares ¡° her voice placed with sarcasm when she said the last part.


    ¡° Wait wait what do you mean these are grandpa''s original eyes and what is the Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan , is it the next evolution of the Mangekyou Sharingan? Why does it need my grandpa''s eyes. ¡° Shisui began to ask questions one after another.


    As someone who didn¡¯t know about the things written in the stone tablet Shisui¡¯s understanding of Mangekyou Sharingan is quite limited. He only knew that to awaken one¡¯s Mangekyou you need extreme stimulation with negative thoughts. This is why he jumped off the cliff when Itachi was present. To make Itachi feel enough negative emotions to awaken his Mangekyou.


    ¡° I see, '''' Shisui said, his grip tightening on the glass container.


    ¡° So tell me Shisui what is your choice. Would you transplant these eyes your grandfather left you and fight for your dream or would you choose to hide yourself in the darkness forever and let that 12 year old friend of yours take care of everything? ¡° Nanami asked seriously.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 42

    Chapter 42


    The door to the dinner table was opened. From there came Nanami and Shisui who had a new bandage wrapped on his head. Seeing them entering izanami looked at them before saying in surprise , ¡° wow I didn''t expect you to gave those pairs to him this quickly Nanami ¡°


    ¡° He is ready for it matriarch. Since Konoha already considered him dead it would be best for him to have it. There is a limit to what a blind man could do to help his clan. ¡° Nanami said as she took a seat followed by Shisui.


    ¡° No, that''s what I was saying. I was just surprised that you would let him awaken his Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan this easily. His pupil technique with addition of what Kagami had will make him quite the troublesome opponent. ¡° Izanami said, making Shisui, who just took a seat, stand up immediately.


    ¡° Wait what do you mean I have the Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan. I thought you need two pairs of Mangekyou Sharingan to awaken it. ¡° He asked in a shocked voice.


    Nanami was also surprised at this but unlike Shisui she began to ponder what happened. She recointed everything thought of the reason for a few minutes. Then she suddenly realised something after analysing all the things she knew about the Sharingan.


    She asked in a somewhat unsure tone, ¡° Is it because Shisui¡¯s bloodline had upgraded ¡° .


    Izanami shook her head at this. ¡° No, the correct answer would be that he purified his bloodline. Because to upgrade you need more than just a Mangekyou Sharingan. ¡°


    ¡° What¡¯s the difference between those two? Shisui asked in puzzlement. Since to him who knows nothing about Biology and Science those two words are quite the same.


    ¡° You see when you upgrade your bloodline you are essentially evolving your blood into a higher level. For example, I imagine you have an A rank bloodline. If you upgrade your bloodline your bloodline would evolve into a S rank or SS rank.


    But when you are purifying your bloodline you essentially unlock the hidden powers that were dormant in it. For example imagine you have 50 % of this A rank bloodline and after purifying it you have 100% of said bloodline enabling you to fully explore your potential. ¡° Izanami explained to the both of them.


    ¡° I see so that¡¯s why you need another pair of Mangekyou Sharingan. You are essentially increasing your bloodline percentage by transplanting another sharingan which has all the data needed. And to make sure the process has no faults you need the sharingans of a close blood relative. ¡° Nanami exclaimed as she connected all the dots.


    ¡° Yes , unlike the Hyuga clan which tries hardest to preserve their bloodline purity, the Uchiha clan''s bloodline purity has decreased in each generation. Currently there is no one who could be considered a full Uchiha. ¡° Izanami said while inwardly thinking , ¡® That¡¯s unless no one is practising the bloodline purifying technique I gave Madara. If I remember correctly, that skill book should be in the Uchiha clan. ¡®


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 43

    Chapter 43


    Despite the small incident with Shisui earlier, the small party was held without any other complications. Since this party is mostly for Naruto everyone unanimously decided to play with him for today.


    So while the adults were drinking they played board games which Izanami copied from her old universe. Due to the limited entertainment in the ninja world the board games became a hit amongst them. Especially for Naruto who never had the opportunity to play with anyone in his entire life.


    For the whole afternoon they played and enjoyed themselves to the fullest. Even Shisui, who was a little awkward at first, joined in on the fun. But as the saying goes ¡® all good things must eventually come to and end. ¡® . When it was near 3¡¯ o''clock in the evening the party eventually came to an end.


    After cleaning up the mess they made everyone went to do their own work. Tsunade and Shizune had a meeting with the Hoage. As the disciple of the Third Hokage her return to the village is a big thing to Konoha.


    And most of all the village higher ups need to give a good explanation to Tsunade about the decision they made yesterday regarding the debt to the World Bank. Unlike the Uchiha clan, they can¡¯t just force the debt on her. They aren¡¯t Danzo who has no dignity or shame if it means getting what he wants. Diiscover new stories at novelhall.com


    If Tsunade ends up rebelling from the village the scandalism would be too much for the village to bear. Especially with the special connections Tsunade has with the Fire Daimyo. The title of ¡® Princess of Konoha ¡® isn¡¯t just for show. If someone had any legal rights to the village it would be her as her grandfather was one of the founders. And since in the Uchiha clan there is no one who had blood relations to Madara there is no competition for Tsunade.


    As Shizune and Tsunade were about to depart, Izanami stopped them. She turned to Tengen and said, ¡° you should go with them. It¡¯s not everyday you could see people taking shamelessness to the extreme. This would be a good experience for you who is looking to broaden your horizons. ¡°


    Tengen nodded after thinking about it for a while. True in the Land of Iron the people value dignity more than anything. So this may be a good experience for him who wanted to know the ways of the world.


    Izanami then turned to Tsunade and spoke, ¡° Take him with you , if asked why he is here. Tell them that he is here to make sure you don¡¯t run away from me. If they asked him to wait outside, ask them if they are willingling to bear the full burden of your debt and my annoyance. ¡°


    Tsunade was speechless at Izanami¡¯s words. Although the debt she accumulated was huge she never did think about not paying back. This is not how a Senju, much less the granddaughter of Hashirama Senju, would act. Whether it takes days , months or years Tsunade always paid her debt.


    This is also why many Casino owners and loan sharks still let Tsunade borrow money. They knew she would eventually pay them back.


    But even Tsunade had some dissatisfaction about this she didn''t say it as she listened to the next words Izanami said, ¡° Oh right if you let him go I will deduct the first 3 months of the debt you need to pay. ¡°


    She swiftly turned to Tengen and angrily shouted, ¡° what are you doing? Quickly get ready we are going to the Hokage Building. We are already late. ¡°


    Izanami with a disdainful expression said, ¡° Heh so what if he is displeased. He isn¡¯t the boss of me . And even if he sends his men to cause trouble I will just break their bones and let them rest in the hospital for the rest of their lives. ¡°


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 44

    Chapter 44


    Unlike the vibrant atmosphere in the village, the Uchiha clan district is a little bland. Even though in the past this district was one of the busiest in Konoha. But with the Third Hokage gaining power this business district slowly began to lose the excitement it once held.


    After the nine tail incident and with the clan being forced to move away from their ancestral ground the businesses in the Uchiha clan were deeply affected. Villagers rarely came to purchase items from their shops due to the rumors. This forced many clan members to join the police department.


    The only reason why the clan isn¡¯t bankrupt is due to the numerous assets they have all around the Fire nation. But even with these assets they were very tight with their finances.


    So when Fugaku heard that the village had basically dumped a huge debt on them without even thinking twice he almost felt his heart stop beating. This is a huge problem for him. Even the clan¡¯s idea of rebelling is not big compared to this.


    He could barely keep his composure as he left the Hokage tower. If he could, he wished to destroy that building with his Susano. He felt great disappointment after what happened that day. He knew the village didn¡¯t like the Uchiha clan but to disregard them this much. Follow the latest novels at novelhall.comore the debt is something the two clans had to take to establish this village. And despite knowing this the elders ruthlessly said that they will not interfere with this. Isn¡¯t this the same as saying the Uchiha clan is no longer recognised in Konoha. What about the sacrifices the clan made to support this village? Aren¡¯t they one of the founding clans?


    These questions lingered in Fugaku¡¯s mind as he walked back to his home. He was too tired to even go to work today. He only managed to calm his mind down a little after drinking some of his favourite tea.


    Exhaling a deep sigh he rubbed his forehead in pain. He was wondering how to break this news to the clan members. Due to most of the clansmen joining the police force he knew they were too agitated these days. With this news he is pretty sure even they would finally snap.


    ¡° It seems a coup d''etat is inevitable ¡± Fugaku muttered with a heavy sigh.


    Although he is against the idea, but he has no choice. This debt would leave many clansmen homeless and painless. As a clan leader he must care about his clan before anything else. The only option they have is to mortgage their properties but doing that would basically make them homeless.


    Just as Fugaku was going through a spiral of dark thoughts he heard a clan member calling out his name in a hurry. He got up from his seat in a hurry. Did the clan elders somehow find out about the debt and finally go crazy?. After Shisui¡¯s death the elders were on the boiling point. The radicals were screaming their lungs out for revenge.


    Fugaku imagining the worst case scenario gulped as he went towards the door. Looking at the distraised clan member he asked, ¡° what happened ¡°


    ¡° Clan leader, a few minutes ago someone came to the Police headquarters and issued a Hyakki Yagyo? . The receptionist tried to chase away her saying that that tradition is no longer a thing. But that girl didn¡¯t listen at all. And she then began to beat up every single member in the police force. Even the captions were not speared. She is now heading towards here, ¡° the distressed clan member said . In his voice there was a bit of distress and admiration.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 45

    Chapter 45


    "Stop right there. You have caused enough commotion already. " Fugaku said as he finally catched up with the two intruders who came to cause a mess in the clan. This pair didn''t come towards his house directly but took a huge detour and walked around the entire clan compound.


    It''s like she was touring the whole Uchiha clan. Even the elders were defeated by her when they came to apprehend her. So apart from him and his men everyone who went to challenge her are now lying on the ground unconscious.


    But if Fugaku was being honest he was honestly surprised that his clan was defeated this quickly. Almost 90% of the whole Uchiha population is a genius in their own fields. Whether it is Ninjutsu , Genjutsu , Taijutsu or even Kenjutsu the Uchiha clan lacked nothing. Especially the elders who are the elite amongst elites.


    This combination is nothing to scoff at even in Konoha. Even the Village higher ups would cower in fear when the whole clan unites. But this girl defeated all of them in a matter of minutes. And from his observations he found out that no one was killed.


    This is obviously a plus in Fugaku''s book. The Uchiha clan respectes the strong but that doesn''t mean they are easy to bully. If anyone of his clansmen were killed, Fugaku would fight this person to the death even if it meant sacrificing himself. That is his duty as the clan leader.


    Izanami observing Fuagku had to hide the wide smile that was threatening to break into her face. When watching the anime Izanami always thought Fugaku was someone who would sway to the pressure. But looking at him now Izanami found that to be false. He is a true clan leader who wanted nothing but the best for his clansman.


    If Izanami had to guess, the only reason Fugaku allowed Itachi to do the massacre was because he couldn''t bear to fight his own son. His pride and joy.


    ''Now that I think about it, Itachi can''t kill off everyone in the clan by himself even with Obitio''s and Danzo''s help. '' Izanami thought inwardly. From the fight she fought there were numerous people who were on the verge of awakening Mangekyou Sharingans. They only needed a little push to awaken them. Furthermore the Uchiha clan has many hidden experts.


    And no matter how nonsensical fate is, it cannot give Itachi the power to kill off all of them. Even if he tried he would have to exhaust his Mangakyou Sharingan completely to deal with all of them. So that leaves Izanami with an interesting conclusion.


    '' So the Uchiha clan, similar to the Senju clan, went into hiding. They concealed themselves so Danzo or Hiruzen wouldn''t be able to find them. '' Izanami thought. It isn''t impossible with the resources and history the Uchiha clan has going into hiding is not a problem. Without showing their Sharingan no one could distinguish themselves amongst common folk.


    " Well if it isn''t the clan leader Fugaku. Well do forgive us for not immediately going to your residence. You see little Naruto here has not seen much of the Uchiha clan so I was letting him sight see. I hope that isn''t a problem with you " Izanami said with a business-like smile.


    Fugaku who heard her words almost stumbled back from shock. Did he hear it right? The son of Minato is here in the Uchiha clan. He had to finish this business before disaster struck them. And for a moment he felt gratitude for Izanami for knocking down every clan member into unconsciousness. If they know the nine tail Jinchu?riki is here then they will do something drastic without thinking about the consequences.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 Chapter 46

    Chapter 46


    Although Izanami was shocked and wanted nothing but to investigate this matter immediately, she didn¡¯t change her expression or move from her seat. Izanami knew not to rush anything. Especially when they are getting ready to have a negotiation.


    Although she didn¡¯t explicitly give away her identity she knew Fugaku may have an inkling on who she is. I mean he was already looking like he was about to face an enemy kage. And as a Clan leader he would fail his responsibilities if he didn¡¯t find any information about her after all the commotion she did yesterday.


    Izanami didn¡¯t pick on that receptionist just to be petty. No, she wanted to cause a commotion so that her arrival would be alerted to every clan leader. This is so Hiruzen would not be able to shrink his responsibilities or silently bury this incident. No, she wanted to show how much Hiruzen and his friends screwed up so their popularity would drop.


    This is her way of taking revenge for what those guys did to her students'' clans. She will destroy the reputation Hiruzen tried to protect so much. How will the villagers react when they realise that the village they love so much is in decline because of the Third Hokage¡¯s actions. They would soon realise that the grand dream Hiruzen shows them is nothing but an illusion.


    Thinking of her future plans, Izanami smiled evilly. Her smile was so scary that it even scared the hell out of Fugaku . And if that isn¡¯t enough Hiruzen who was at home reading Jaraiya¡¯s novel to heal his soul shivered.


    ¡° So who are you and why did you cause such a commotion at the police headquarters. ¡° Fugaku asked after calming himself down. He narrowed eyes and activated his three tomoe sharingan as he said those words. He was ready in case this person in front of him is an enemy.


    Izanami, who Fugaku tried to pressure with his sharingan, didn''t even flinch. Earlier she was in the presence of Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan so this kind of pressure is nothing to her. Especially when Fugaku was still concealing his Mangekeyou Sharingan.


    She just used her own aura to protect Naruto from being affected by Fugaku¡¯s pressure. Despite being a nine-tailed Jinchuriki, Naruto is still a child, so he should not come in contact with such pressure at a young age. It''s not good for one¡¯s physic.


    ¡® Wait, Is itachi so extreme because of his experience on the battlefield at a young age ¡® izanami thought as felt she might have solved why Itachi held such a mentality. His views on life and death isn¡¯t something that even Hiruzen or Danzo could instill. In fact compared to itachi they are simply naive in that aspect.


    Thinking so Izanami glared at Fugaku and said , ¡° Remove that pressure I don¡¯t want Naruto to become like your elder son ¡°


    ¡° huh ¡° Fugaku was dumbfounded at this. And most importantly he was very confused. Although he rarely shows it, his elder son is his pride. And everyone he met always say that they wished their children were like him. And this is the first time he has met someone who said they don¡¯t want their children to become like him.


    Although Fugaku wanted to ask a million questions about what his son did wrong he still complied and retreated his pressure. He didn¡¯t want to become a victim like the rest of his clan were.


    Seeing him cooperating obediently, Izanami nodded her head internally. She then retracted her aura that was shielding Naruto. After that she turned to Naruto and asked, ¡° Naruto do you want to stay here and join this boring meeting or go and play with someone your age. Oh right there is this aunt who is also a friend of your mother here. I''m sure she would like to meet you ¡°


    She looked at Fugaku''s eyes when she mentioned Mikoto. Fugaku, taking the hint, nodded his head in agreement.


    Fugaku exhaled a deep breath and asked, ¡° What is your proposal.¡±


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    Th.e? most uptodate novels are published on n(0)velbj)n(.)co/m

 Chapter 47

    Chapter 47


    While Izanami and Fugaku were having their discussion, Mikoto escorted Naruto towards the backyard of their house. Although quite obedient, Naruto asked a multitude of questions along the way. This was the first time he had the chance to learn about his parents, and he was quite excited. After all, the Third Hokage had been tight-lipped, only mentioning that Naruto¡¯s parents were heroes and leaving it at that.Ne?ww chapters will be fully updated at novelhall.com


    Mikoto, who was used to Kushina¡¯s over-excited nature, wasn''t overwhelmed or annoyed like a normal person would. She gently explained every question Naruto asked. Within the scope of what she could speak of course. Although she didn¡¯t know how Naruto was able to enter into the Uchiha clan she wasn¡¯t going to make the situation more complicated than it already is. As the wife of the clan leader she too had her own responsibilities.


    And so Mikoto told everything she could tell to Naruto. She told him about how his mother was when she was just his age. How his father was a genius and how his mother had declared him as her rival when they were in school.


    While they were discussing things unknowingly they reached their destination. And seeing that they have already arrived Mikoto decided to end this discussion temporarily. She wanted her son to be friends with Naruto just like how she and Kushina were.


    Opening the door that leads to the backyard Mikoto and Naruto found themselves in the presence of a young boy with black hair and cute face playing with a girl who is about 12-13 years old.


    Noticing their arrival the girl looked at Mikoto and asked, ¡° oh Mom did you come to join..¡± her words trailed off as her gaze landed on Naruto. Her expression changed a little as she recognized him.


    Naruto, who was the most sensitive to how others perceive him, felt a bit of sadness and thought, ¡® Is she going to hate me like the others? ¡®. Mikoto meanwhile signalled with her eyes for her daughter to not say anything harsh to Naruto.


    But unlike what Mikoto and Naruto thought, this girl didn''t care about Naruto''s identity as a Demon Fox or the nine tails Jinchuriki. What she was surprised about was for another reason,


    ¡® Why does he feel like uncle Ashura? It''s the same as Susuke. Is he also a reincarnation like me? No, this feels different. Sasuke clearly doesn''t remember his past and Naruto too looks like have the same situation. ¡® the girl thought internally. Deciding to investigate this further she spoke, ¡° Oh mom who is this child you brought with you. ¡°


    Mikoto smiled gently as she introduced Naruto to everyone, ¡° His name is Naruto Uzumaki, the son of my best friend. Since he came here I thought it would be nice for you guys to know each other. Oh did you know he is around Sasuke¡¯s age. ¡°


    ¡° Nice to meet you Dattebayo, ¡° Naruto said, flashing his ever-present cheerful smile.


    ¡° Oh it¡¯s nice to meet you, Naruto. My name is Kiyomi Uchiha . ¡° The girl Kiyomi introduced herself. She then pointed to Sasuke and said, ¡° And this here is Sasuke Uchiha, my younger brother. I hope you guys will be friends since you are at the same age. ¡°


    Sasuke, like a proud young master, only nodded his head. He didn¡¯t know why but ever since he saw that blond haired kid he wanted to beat the shit out of him for no reason.


    Mikoto frowned a bit seeing Sasuke¡¯s behaviour. Although Sasuke doesn¡¯t have many friends due to his attachment to Itachi he doesn¡¯t act so arrogantly in front of any other kid. So what made him change his behaviour drastically.


    While Mikoto was puzzled at his behaviour Kiyomi had an understanding look in her eyes. Even if they are only reincarnations the rivalry is still there. In fact this further made Kiyomi understand that her guess about them is correct.


    ¡° Hey, what are you guys doing? ¡° Naruto asked. He for some reason wanted to show that smelly Sasuke that he is better than him.


    ¡°¡° Oww oww oww¡±¡± Sasuke and Naruto both clutched their heads in pain as they looked at Kiyomi with teary eyes.


    Kiyomi glared at the two of them and rebuked, ¡° No fighting when I''m teaching, Do you understand¡±


    Naruto and Sasuke who wanted to complain suddenly froze in fear as the aura Kiyomi was releasing was terrifying. They both nodded at the same time not wanting to provoke her anymore.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 48

    Chapter 48


    Shortly after Mikoto arrived with a tray full of snacks. And wanting to forget the previous scene both Sasuke and Naruto began to dig into the snacks like their life depended on it. And while eating they didn¡¯t forget to throw curses at each other.


    Mikoto and Kiyomi both sighed at their antics. If it was not for both of them not showing any real hostility towards each other they would have a serious talk with them.


    After all of them enjoyed their snacks a little, Kiyomi once again started her lesson.


    ¡° Now I''m going to teach you how to harness chakra. First we have to meditate and calm your minds. ¡° Kiyomi said as she instructed both of them how to meditate.


    Both of them, due to their excitement, weren''t able to calm their minds in the first try but gradually under Kiyomi¡¯s instructions they were able to enter a meditative state.


    ¡° Now I''m going to inject a bit of my chakra into your bodies. Try your best to understand and get a feel for my chakra. ¡° Kiyomi said as she injected a little bit of her chakra into their system.


    At first both of them didn''t get it as this is a bit foreign thing to them. But gradually they began to feel the warm sensation in their backs.


    Both of them then said at the same time said , ¡° I can feel it on my back ¡°


    Mikoto, who heard this, was surprised. Usually children need at least a week to get the feeling of chakra. Geniuses from clans shorten this time period to 3 days or a day. And monsters do it even faster than them. Even her eldest son had to consecrate for an hour to get the feeling of chakra.


    While Mikoto was surprised, Kiyomi on the other hand didn''t seem that much impressed. Unlike her mother she knew that these two have chakra sensitivity buried deep in their souls. After all, after going through that many reincarnations their instincts are more sharper than any normal human.


    ¡° Good now try to follow my chakra. I will guide it through your meridians for you to get a feel for it. ¡° Kiyomi said as she guided her chakra. She first began it very slowly as she didn''t want to harm their bodies by over stimulating their meridians.


    As she guided the chakra in their bodies Naruto and Sasuke gradually began to locate their chara pathways. While doing so they found out that the chakra flow always stops at their stomachs. Focusing on their senses they found that the place has a lot of chakra gathered there.


    ¡° Don¡¯t try to unlock your chakra on your own. Your bodies are still not used to welding chakra so it will only hurt you if you unlock it sooner, For now just focus on locating the chakra pathways in your bodies. ¡° Kiyomi''s voice rang out in their ears as they tried to move the chakra in their stomach.


    Hearing her warning they stopped what they were about to do. As much as they were curious they are still little kids so they tend to obey every warning adults give to them.


    After a half an hour Kiyomi stopped supplying her chakra to both Naruto and Sasuke. She didn¡¯t think these two troublemakers would be able to endure anymore meditation.


    And just as she guessed these two immediately started to fool around as soon as they finished the exercise. Individually they may endure it for more time but when they are together that is asking for the impossible.


    ¡® Arrgg¡¯ remembering those problems Izanami had a headache. In fact she wondered whether to just kidnap every Uchiha clan member and be done with it. As soon as they step into Japan they would have to change whether they like it or not.


    While she was on her thoughts, unknowingly she arrived at the place where Naruto and Sasuke were learning. She looked at Kiyomi with a complex look.


    With a sigh she made a few hand signs and muttered, ¡° Time release: Suspended World ¡±


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    Ne?ww chapters will be fully updated at novelhall.com

 Chapter 49

    Chapter 49


    In her long life Izanami had numerous professions. With time being the only thing she lacked she was able to perfect her professions even if she had a minimal talent. For instance she once wanted to study medicine since she had free time. And while doing so she found out she had a little talent in that field. But with her sheer determination alone she managed to be hailed as the medical sage who could cure any illnesses.


    To her talent is just a VIP pass for the journey ahead. What really mattered was the hard work and dedication the person put to reach his goal.


    Take Might Guy for example. He doesn''t have an impressive chakra amount as Naruto or any great teacher to guide him. But did he give up? No, he worked harder than everyone. He said he wanted to catch up to Kakashi and he did just that. He knew that he had only taijutsu so he became a taijutsu freak who could even kill a being close to the six path level. And he did all that with his hard work alone.


    And Izanami, similar to him, didn''t give up on anyone or anything just because of the difficulty it had. She, like a researcher, researched many fields to improve herself. She researched wood style and made wood style from scratch. She wanted to create the unique fire of the two tails and she did just that. By combining different chakra natures with fire chakra she achieved her goal. And the blue fire is just one of her creations.


    By combining a great amount of fire and lightning chakra blue flames were made. And by adding yin chakra into that mix you could make flames similar to Amatarasu. Also if you double the fire chakra volume and compress it you could create flames that are similar to the sun.


    One of Izanami''s research projects was time. In the Naruto world there are only a few instances where time ninjutsu or artifacts are used but in all of those instances they are mentioned to be quite overpowered.


    So to research this Izanami observed how the Dragon Vain in Roran worked. And to her surprise she found out that the chakra gathered there belongs to nonother than the planet itself. Furthermore the chakra there is not something just anyone could manipulate as it contained the will of the planet .


    As she continued her research Izanami finally came to two conclusions. One Time is law governed by the planet itself. So to use any ninjutsu that uses time needs to pay a huge price. As the planet itself is governing this law you must prepare an equivalent exchange.


    Two the time law cannot be directly tampered by any being unless it is a planet. This meant that even her father can¡¯t directly interfere or manipulate time as it is impossible. And even when one is interfering with time they are essentially just using the world as a middleman .


    From this, Izanami had an interesting hypothesis. The time-traveling artifact that the O?tsutsuki clan possesses might actually be a former planet''s will contained within an artifact. This could explain its ability to traverse timelines, as it can communicate with the wills of other planets.Findd new stories at novelhall.com


    This also clarifies why the energy consumption when using that artifact is relatively small compared to the immense energy and sacrifices needed for time ninjutsu. It''s akin to shopping in a supermarket with a membership card that grants a 45% discount on every transaction while others have to pay the full price.


    At first Izanami was a bit down when she realised she couldn¡¯t directly manipulate the time law as she wasn¡¯t a planet. And just when she was about to head back home she suddenly realised a small detail of her second wish.


    Her second wish was to have a body that is able to manipulate any energy. Initially she thought this would allow her to use natural energy. But what if this also applies to laws.


    Normally you wouldn¡¯t be able to answer this question as you have to try it yourself. But that problem was solved by her third wish. Her third wish was to have knowledge of all the anime worlds.


    Izanami comforted her niece and began to stroke her head. She smiled gently and said, ¡° It¡¯s good to see you again too, little Kiyomi. ¡°


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 50

    Chapter 50


    After a few minutes Kiyomi broke the hug. She felt a little embarrassed at herself for behaving like that earlier. As someone who lived a fulfilling life in her previous life, her behaviour could be said to be too childish. But she couldn¡¯t help herself. Meeting someone so dear after so many years made her a bit emotional.


    ¡° So have you calmed down enough? ¡° Izanami asked after seeing Kiyomi calming down.


    Kiyomi nodded as she looked at her aunt with a bit of suspicion. Earlier she didn''t think that much about it but now that she is taking a good look at her. Her aunt didn¡¯t seem to be in the same situation as her.


    Her chakra signature , body structure or even her appearance nothing has changed at all. It was like she had inhabited her original body. And that is quite impossible after all. Even for a half Otsutsuki living for many centuries isn¡¯t possible even with the help of natural energy.


    ¡°Not that I mind but how are you still alive? Even grandpa died when he was close to 150 ¡°Kiyomi asked in a bit of bewilderment. ¡° And what happened to your hair, why is it all black now? ¡° She said, looking at Izanami¡¯s hair.


    The once silvery hair is now almost black. If it was not for the occasional silver strands, Kiyomi would have thought she might have dyed her hair like that.


    Izanami touched her hair and said with a bit of melancholy ¡° Oh this well it is a long story. But for now let¡¯s leave it at that. More importantly take this ¡° She said she bought a necklace from her Kimono sleeve.


    It was a necklace that is shaped with a cross and two angel wings. There is a red ruby on the middle of the cross that makes it more mysterious.


    Kiyomi, taking the necklace, looked at Izanami with a questioning gaze. Although this necklace has some seals in place it isn¡¯t something too interesting.


    Izanami then explained, ¡° This necklace is like an Id. When you go to any shop I own, show them this. This would inform them that you are part of my family. So if you run into a pinch you could utilize the forces I control without any limitation.


    This would also allow you to arrange a meeting with me without anyone knowing. Use it tomorrow for our talk. ¡°


    Kiyomi nodded as held the necklace tightly. Although she didn''t know what kind of resources her aunt has but knowing her she might have even have a hidden village under her. But she is still curious about something.


    ¡° But why don¡¯t we have the talk now. Why wait for it till tomorrow. ¡° She asked in puzzlement. Since time has stopped, isn''t it very suitable to have their talk?


    The answer to her question came with a flick of her forehead. Kiyomi held her head in pain as she threw Izanami an annoyed gaze. ¡°Why did you do that ¡° She asked in a bit of annoyance.i sighed as she said, ¡° it seems you are still as clueless as ever. Girl, do you even realise how much energy one needed to stop time. Especially when the world''s will is glaring at me. ¡°


    ¡° Hehehe I forgot about that, ¡° Kiyomi said with her tongue sticking out.


    ¡° Yaaaay big sis Izanami you are the best ¡° Naruto said as he jumped in joy.


    Izanami smiled gently as she looked at Naruto¡¯s behaviour. Although he didn¡¯t realise it himself he is now acting like a normal kid his age. His reserveness had vanished. This is what Izanami wanted to see.


    A child should be happy under an adult''s care and not think too deeply about anything.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 51

    Chapter 51


    It was quite late when both Naruto and Izanami came back home. They saw that they were the last to arrive. Dinner was taken care of by Nanami and with Shizune helping her. As for Tsunade, she was drinking with Shisui who had a troubled look.


    It''s not like Shisui hasn''t had a drink before. In fact he may have drunk a lot to relieve himself from the pressure he had to face from both the clan and the village. But even then he couldn''t be a match to Tsunade who only knows how to get drunk.


    Had it not been for Nanami asking him to let Shizune take a break he would have already feld this room.


    But fortunately his saviour has arrived. With one look Izanami used a bit of her Conqueror''s haki to intermediate Tsunade.


    Tsunade who was drunk and was goofing around immediately sprung into action. Her drunkenness disappeared as she took a fighting stance. Her eyes survaid the surroundings with a cautious look.


    ¡° Don''t set a bad example in front of the kids Tsunade¡± her eyes went to Izanami who spoke.


    Despite Tsunade wanting to refute Izanami¡¯s words she wisely kept her silence. Izanami''s eyes were very serious. If she did this again she will get punished. And Tsunade didn''t want to find what kind of punishment she would face when that happens.


    Shortly after, Nanami arrived with Shizune in tow with pots filled with food. They placed the food on the table and announced, ¡° Dinner''s ready¡±Th.e? most uptodate novels are published on n(0)velbj)n(.)co/m


    Everyone gathered towards the dining room to eat. After they all sat down Izanami said, ¡° itadakimasu ¡°. Afterwards everyone also joined as they started eating.


    As soon as they took a bite they all exclaimed, ¡° Delicious¡± .


    ¡° Hmm it seems like you have improved your cooking skills again Nanami ¡° Izanami praised as she relished her food. In her long life something she was never bored of was eating tasty food.


    ¡°Thank you for the praise Matriarch ¡° Nanami said humbly but Izanami who knew her better than anyone knew that she was very excited.


    Izanami shook her head with a helpless smile. Although Nanami looked very strict and cold, she is inwardly like a small child who liked praise. And cooking is the hobby she liked the most so she is very happy to hear any praises about her cooking.


    After dinner everyone got comfy in the living room. Since it was still a bit early to go to bed they decided to enjoy themselves by talking about how their day went by. And ofcourse it was Naruto who was doing the talking as he was excitedly describing the things that happened at the Uchiha clan.


    Hearing this, Shisui had a complicated expression. And this was especially shown when he heard about Naruto mentioning Izanami¡¯s way of taming a Uchiha clan member. Although he wanted to say that is wrong but deep down somewhere in his mind he knew it was correct.


    While they were chatting Izanami suddenly said, ¡° Oh right I forgot about that ¡°. She then turned to Naruto and said, ¡° Naruto, would you come here for a second. ¡°


    But despite Izanami¡¯s qualification she was ultimately just one person so there is a need for someone to represent her. And that person is given this necklace. This necklace contains a bit of Izanmi¡¯s chakra so anyone who has this necklace can use her authority to do what she or he desires. And there are numerous seals placed on these necklaces that even if the necklace is stolen they wouldn¡¯t be able to misuse it.


    Since these necklaces are made personally by her the number of people who had this could be counted in one hand. Currently there are four people who have these necklaces.


    One being Kaguya as she is the only blood related family member that is currently alive. The next is Nanami who is like Izanami¡¯s secretary. The third one is Kiyomi who had no idea what she even got. And lastly is Naruto who would only find out about this after a few years.


    So for now he only thinks this is a free ramen coupon he could use everyday.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 52

    Chapter 52


    ¡°Are you sure it is a good idea to give him that much authority, Matriarch? ¡° Nanami asked as she looked at Izanami. Normally she wouldn¡¯t question Izanami¡¯s decisions but she couldn¡¯t help it this time. You could mobilise the entire Japan with that necklace. And that much power is given to a 4 year old brat.


    No matter how much you look at it this is definitely a bad decision. So Nanami was puzzled as to why her mother would even do that.


    Hearing her daughter''s question Izanami sighed as she spoke, ¡° well I have several reasons. For once it is for Naruto¡¯s protection. With him having that no hidden village would be allowed to harm him as the Yokai members would make sure of that. And secondly it is what I promised to give to him after the deal I made with Minato and Kushina. ¡°


    ¡° What deal? ¡° Tsunade asked, puzzled.


    Izanami looked at the moon and answered , ¡° In return for the custody of Naruto I will do my utmost best to give him a stable life where he will have enough protection to even come out of a war unharmed. ¡°


    Tsunade stood up from her seat in shock. Did she hear that right? Coming out of a war without even getting harmed. Is that even possible? In the battlefields status doesn¡¯t matter. What one needs the most is the ability to survive.


    Seeing Tsunade¡¯s doubtful gaze Izanami chuckled and added, ¡° You know unlike the other hidden villages japan has been there for more than 100 years. And if it really came to a war with the other hidden villages Japan would win without any difficulties even when all the hidden villages come together. ¡°


    This is something Izanami is confident in. She has made sure Japan residents while valuing peace still kept up with their training. The strongest fist rules everything so Izanami made sure her island is one the strong fist side. And with her efforts she made a terrifying village that would be able to win the Fourth Great Ninja war by itself. Of course that is the premise Madara isn¡¯t on the battlefield.


    Since he is Izanami¡¯s student she made sure to train him for everything. And when she meant everything she meant it literally. No matter what is thrown at him he is able to survive. It could be said that unless it is Hashirama who is serious no one could hold Madara down.


    Tsunade still couldn¡¯t believe such a claim. So she looked at Nanami who nodded her head in confirmation. And with that all her doubt was cleared. She finally looked at Izanami and said, ¡° I pity the people who would become your enemy. ¡°


    ¡° Huh ¡° Izanami was puzzled at the sudden statement. Did she say something that Tsunade view her as a monster?. Izanami looked at Nanami for help but her stupid daughter just sipped her tea completely ignoring her mother.Follow the latest novels at novelhall.com


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    Hearing Kurama¡¯s question izanami gave a V sign and said, ¡° well of course it is because i¡¯m a genius ¡°


    Kurama almost stumbled back when he heard her answer. He forgot that dealing with this person is more troublesome than dealing with Shikaku. As unlike Shikaku who he could subdue with its strength this person is way out of his lead. If he had to guess he would need at least someone near the old man¡¯s level to deal with her.


    ¡° Argg, it''s nice seeing you again, big sister, ¡° Kurama said grumbling. He then asked ¡° So why are you here in this prison? Did you come here to free me ¡°


    Izanami chuckled and answered, ¡° Well Kurama Naruto here is my new adopted family member. So I came here to let him meet his parents while remodelling this place a bit ¡°


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 53

    Chapter 53


    Silence descended as Kurama heard what Izanami said. Then a low growl escaped his lips as he asked while gritting his teeth, ¡° Tell me big sister why do you favour these humans while ignoring us. Are we not your family? Why haven''t you helped us when we were captured and became tools for these humans to use. Wasn''t you alive back then? Do We truly mean nothing to you?


    Even now you didn''t bother to help me get out of this damn prison. Answer me big sister ¡° Kurama practically screamed as he asked the last question.


    Izanami sighed at Kurama¡¯s outburst. Before she answered Kurama¡¯s question she looked at Naruto with a smile and said, ¡° Naruto be a dear and close your ears will you, what I am about to say is something you must not hear till you are older. ¡°


    Naruto nodded as he covered his ears in fright. During Kurama¡¯s outburst he unintentionally released some of his aura scaring Naruto. This aura could even make a jonin run in fear, much less a small child.


    After Naruto covered his ears Izanami looked at Kurama coldly, In her eyes deep anger and disappointment was evident. ¡° Kurama you sure have some balls to say that to me when you guys screw things yourselves.


    Do you think I abandoned you guys? Then who the hell made those shrines and holy lands where you could live in peace. What did you do to them? Just because you guys were bored you ventured outside to bully humans.


    And isn¡¯t that why you were captured in the first place. You Kurama the big bad fox thought it would be fun to challenge and defeat Madara when you came across him. Centuries you have killed and bullied humans so you thought this one is also like them right. Weak and insignificant that you would be able to crush with your giant paws.


    Why did you think Hashirma was so adamant about capturing all of you? Isn¡¯t it because of your bad reputation amongst humans? If you guys listened to me and stayed at your shrines and controlled your ego you all wouldn¡¯t be captured and enslaved.


    Do you have anything to say Kurama ¡°


    Kurama was shocked to hear those words. Although he wanted to refuse those words, nothing came out of his mouth. He knew what she said was the truth. It was him who went to battle Madara. As a person who was nicknamed the Shura Kurama wanted to defeat him. Him being a Indra descendant also played a role in it.


    When they were born Indra and Ashura were fighting their battles with their families. And they as creations of Hagoromo automatically belonged to Ashura¡¯s faction. So in their childhood they had a slight dislike for Indra. And Kurama wanted to punish Madara who is quite similar to Indra. But who would have thought that he would be controlled by Madara without even being able to put up a fight.


    ¡° And besides Kurama why the hell can¡¯t you unseal yourself. Your previous jinchuriki¡¯s are two Uzumaki¡¯s who are the best at sealing. If you bothered to learn you might have gone out of this cage already. ¡° Izanami said with a sigh.


    Unlike the others Kurama had the resources he needed to break free. If he bothered to read and learn from the memories of his hosts he might have already become a seal grandmaster and break out of this seal himself.


    Kurama had no words to say. In fact he felt that he was so stupid to even realise this. As the beings made out of chakra they have the best affinity towards sealing as their chakra control is the best.


    ¡°Yes my sweet Naruto , It¡¯s me your mother ¡° Kushina said as more tears went down her eyes.


    Tears came down Naruto¡¯s eyes as he said, ¡°Okaasan ¡° . That was the final straw as he began to cry. As a small child he wanted his mother¡¯s care and warmth the most. And now he finally got it.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 54

    Chapter 54


    While Kushina and Naruto were having their touching moment Izanami looked at Minato who didn¡¯t go to participate.


    ¡° Don¡¯t you want to join in that? ¡° Izanami said as she pointed to Naruto and Kushina.


    Minato smiled sadly and answered, ¡° I feel I don¡¯t have the right to do that. It was because of my death that Naruto was thrown into such a situation. If i had survived he would have been able to live like a normal kid ¡°


    ¡° So you saw everything huh ¡° Izanami said as she looked at him.


    ¡° Yes in that space I saw everything, Everytime I see those villagers throw stones or try to beat Naruto up I always thought, ¡® Is this the village I sacrificed my life to protect? Why did they do this to my son? Was everything I did to this village meaningless? ¡° Minato said as his eyes teared up.


    ¡° Every time I saw my son drinking expired food I felt my soul shatter. ¡° he said as he clenched his fists. ¡° Tell me, is my decision wrong? ¡° he asked Izanami.


    ¡° No it was not. You protected what you thought was your home. It is this village that broke your trust and ignored your sacrifice. ¡° It was not Izanami who answered Minato. It was Kurama who was listening to the conversation.


    ¡° Kyuubi, ¡° Minato said in a bit of shock. Never in his life did he think the nine tails would sympathise with him.


    Izanami chuckled and answered, ¡°Don¡¯t be too surprised Minato , Kurma despite his animosity towards humans knows humans the best. And this is true for the humans he acknowledges ¡°


    ¡° Big sister, he doesn''t need to know that, '''' Kurama said flusteredly. If it was another person he would have argued back. But he knew doing that would only backfire on him.


    ¡° oh so the Kayuubi has a name huh ¡° Minato was a bit surprised. He didn¡¯t know that. But thinking back at it the tail beasts were never something people knew much about. Even their own Jinchuriki¡¯s didn¡¯t know much about them.


    ¡°Of course we have names. It¡¯s just that we never allow you humans to address us in them, ¡° Kurama said as he scoffed when he heard Manato¡¯s words.


    ¡° No actually both Gyu?ki and Cho?mei actually allowed their Jinchuriki¡¯s to address them in their names ¡° izanami clarified.


    ¡° Arrg those two are exceptions. Especially Cho?mei, with that guy¡¯s personality I wouldn¡¯t be surprised if he got along with his Jinchuriki in just one day. ¡° Kurama said as he got a headache from thinking of his oddball of a sibling. If Cho?mei¡¯s host was not too bad of a person then he would get along with him without any problems.


    ¡° Who are those two again if you don¡¯t mind me asking ? ¡° Minato asked awkwardly. He was hardly able to follow the conversation that is going on here.


    ¡°Oh right, Cho?mei is what you call the Seven tails and Gyu?k is the eight tails. Both of them are quite reasonable so they are very easy to get along with.


    ¡°I see, ¡° Minato said, unable to utter anything more. He felt his world view crash after hearing about this new information.This also made him a bit relieved. When he placed the seal on Naruto he intentionally placed a small gap for Kurama¡¯s chakra to go through. He wished his son could become a perfect Jinchuriki just like Killer B.


    ¡° So anyway, Minato, since you now know the whole truth you should have no trouble agreeing to our deal right ¡° Izanami said as she looked at him.


    ¡° Yes , no matter how much I want to defend the village treating my son like this too much. So I will do as you say from now on, ¡° Minato said as he sighed.


    Kurama also didn¡¯t shy away as he too glared at Kushina. Sparks flew as they both showed their hostility towards each other.


    Minato, seeing this, wondered whether or not to take down the seal. But as soon as that thought flew in his mind both of them suddenly glared at him and shouted at the same time, ¡° what are you doing hurry up take this thing down ¡°


    Minato gulped as he hurriedly went to unseal Kurama. He didn¡¯t want to get caught in the crossfire.


    Naruto who went behind Izanami for cover peeked his head asked, ¡°big sis would mom and Kurama hate each other so much ¡°


    Izanami chuckled and answered, ¡°don¡¯t worry Naruto, those two get along too well that¡¯s why they would often fight like this. ¡°


    ¡° I see, ¡° Naruto said, unsure of how that is possible.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 55

    Chapter 55


    As soon as Minato opened the seal gate two red blurs rushed towards each other. One was a red haired woman who had 5 golden chains coming out from her back while the other was a big fox who has nine tails.


    As soon as they met each other they started their Brawl.


    While the duo was duking it out with each other Izanami and the rest watched the fight with interest as they ate some popcorn. Well it was only Izanami who was interested in this as the father and son duo were catching up with each other.


    ¡° Man those get along with each other so well ¡° Izanami commented as she ate another handful of popcorn.


    Minato, hearing her words, twitched his eyes as he thought, ¡® If that is called get along then I wonder what she considered to be the best of buddies ¡®.


    While he was thinking this he heard his wife''s voice ,


    ¡° Is that the best you could do you damn fox? ¡° Kushina said arrogantly as she immobilised Kurama with her chains. She had a condensing smirk as she showed her superiority.


    Kurama glared at her with hatred. ¡® Damn Uzumaki ¡® he cursed as he tried his best to escape the Adamantine Chains.


    ¡° Heh face it Kurama you can¡¯t defeat me. ¡° Kushina taunted as she puffed her chest.


    ¡° You little¡± Kurama glared at her. In his anger he tried to squash Kushina with his tails.


    This was of course was dodged by Kushina. But due to the sudden movement her hold on Kurama was loosened.Kurama used this chance to break free and make some distance between them.


    And like that both of them started their second round. This went on for a few minutes until Izanami got bored of it. So she just waved her hand and the next moment wood roots came out from the ground and retained both of them in a minute.Ne?ww chapters will be fully updated at novelhall.com


    ¡° ¡° ¡° Wood release ¡° ¡° ¡° Three voices said in shock. It was Minato , Kushina and Kurama.


    ¡° Oh please it¡¯s just wood release, nothing too big of a deal, ¡° Izanami said, shrugging her shoulders.


    ¡° Big sis how are you even able to use Wood release. If I remember correctly only Ashura¡¯s reincarnation has the ability to use it. I clearly didn¡¯t remember you being able to use it before. ¡° Kurama asked the question that everyone was curious about.


    ¡° Hmm it¡¯s quite simple actually. All you need is to find out the right chakra amounts and elements and mix them in a suitable ratio. If you get that right then boom. There you have it, Wood release.


    The only reason only Ashura¡¯s descendants were able to use Wood release is because they instinctively know how to do it. ¡° Izanami explained to the clueless crowd. ¡° And besides there are more than one person here in Konoha who could use wood release without being Ashura''s descendant. ¡° Izanami added.


    ¡°What who is that? ¡° Minato asked in shock. When he was the Hokage he didn¡¯t know anyone like that.


    ¡° Well there is this kid called Tenzo from the root. And besides them there is Obito. Both of them have Hashirama cells on them. This allowed them to use wood release while using the cells as a catalyst. Although they couldn¡¯t be compared to Hashirama¡¯s wood release it is quite decent. ¡° Izanami said while nodding her head.


    When Naruto came downstairs with such an excited expression the other¡¯s couldn¡¯t help but crack a smile. Naruto is like a bundle of joy that makes other¡¯s involuntarily cheer up.


    Tsunade seeing Naruto like this coldn¡¯t help but ask, ¡° Hey brat are you that excited to train ¡±


    Naruto nodded excitedly ¡° Mmm you bet I do. I¡¯m gonna train really hard ¡°


    ¡° hahaha I sure hope you can keep that spirit after today ¡° Tsunade said sarcastically. She heard how much of a torture Izanami¡¯s training could be. It was said plainly in the diary.


    ¡° Well you might have to wait for your training Naruto ¡° Nanami said as she looked in a specific direction.


    Soon a knock came and a voice was heard, ¡° Excuse me could I speak to Miss Izanami , Hokage sama has asked for her presence in his office. ¡°


    Hearing those words everyone in the room frowned. ¡® What did the Third Hokage want this time ¡® the grown ups thought.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 56

    Chapter 56


    ¡° So what do you want? ¡° Izanami asked Hiruzen after she came to his office. She was a bit irritated that Hiruzen called for her early this morning. No one liked to be disturbed right in the morning after all. That would leave a bad taste in their mouths for the rest of the day.


    ¡° Why did you take the Nine tails Jinchuriki near the police station and even more into the Uchiha clan? ¡° It was not Hiruzen who answered her. It was everyone¡¯s good old Danzo with his usual gloomy voice.


    ¡° And why should I answer you? ¡° Izanami asked as she gave Danzo a condescending look. Did this man never understand his place? Does he have a fetish to look for trouble?


    ¡° YOU how dare you talk to me like that. I am the Hokage Advisor and one of the Konoha Village elders. ¡° Danzo roared like a kid throwing a tantrum. He still lacks the experience to deal with people who don¡¯t even take him as a human being.


    ¡°And why should I care? And as far I know advisors don¡¯t really get the authority to speak until he is asked to. And as for your village elder position I could care less about that. And look, even those two know their place. And they are also called village elders. ¡° Izanami said, pointing to the other two elders who are sitting at the back.


    Homura and Koharu both glared at izanami. Even a small child could understand that the only reason they didn¡¯t speak was they trusted Danzo to handle this situation.


    Apart from Hiruzen only Danzo has the right to speak in Konoha¡¯s defence. This is how things were for the last few decades so everyone was used to it.


    ¡° You- You ¡° Danzo was almost about to lose it. No one has ever disrespected him like this. Who is he?. He is Danzo Shimura, the darkness of Konoha and the advisor of the Third Hokage. His name is known even to civilians who know nothing about ninjas. And this girl just said he is a nobody.


    ¡® I''m gonna kill this brat ¡® Danzo thought as a cold murderous light flashed in eyes. He was just about to signal his root ninjas to capture her here and bring her to his base to torture her thorougly. He didn¡¯t even care if Hiruzen and the rest saw what he was about to do. As long as he produces satisfactory results Hiruzen would be more than glad to look the other way.


    ¡® Oh is he finally gonna start it ¡® Izanami thought with a lazy expression. She could see that Danzo was almost on the verge of losing his patience. If he makes a move now her job will be way easier.


    She has more than one way for the four idiots to lose their prestige in an instant. And for her plan to work Danzo needs to make a move. He is the easiest pawn to destroy the elder council.


    And just as Danzo and Izanami were about to have a showdown a voice suddenly interjected, ¡° Enough Danzo we are still in a meeting ¡° Hiruzen said as he fully released his aura.


    Although he spoke to Danzo, his eyes never left Izanami. He was using his aura to pressure Izanami to behave and know her place.


    There is only one explanation: they were forced to a corner. And in Konoha the only thing that didn¡¯t change was the Hokage and his advisors.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 57

    Chapter 57


    Hiruzen clenched his fists as he tried his best to calm down. What Izanami said was a sour subject he wished to forget. Despite being called as the ¡®Professor ¡® he was still unable to pass down his special ninjutsu to anyone. Even his favourite student Orochimaru wasn¡¯t able to grasp the technique. And he was the most talented one Hiruzen came across.


    The room descended into silence. No one wanted to refute as that would be like stepping on a landmine.


    ¡° Since you guys are holding your silence I take this discussion is over. Oh and in the future don''t bother to c?all me for something trivial like this. That is unless you guys somehow want to pay off at least half of your debts. ¡° Izanami said disdainfully as she got up to leave.The? source of this content n/o/v/(el)bi((n))


    ¡° Wait where do you think you are going, we are still not done ¡° Danzo roared as he got up in furry.


    ¡° Oh we are done, and it will be this way unless you decided to pay all the debt you owe us ¡° Izanami said sarcastically as she continued her walk.


    ¡° You.. Get her, ¡° Danzo snapped as he heard her words. The look she gave him was that when someone was looking at a fool. That was the last straw he needed to give into his anger. He is Danzo Shimura. No one could live after humiliating him like this.


    At Danzo¡¯s words three Root ninjas surrounded Izanami. They all had cold, murderous looks in their eyes as they looked at Izanami.


    Izanami eyed them without any fear and asked in a cold voice, ¡° hey Hiruzen you should control your dogs or I will take this as a declaration of war against the World Bank. This is your first and last warning ¡°


    Hiruzen didn¡¯t say anything. He only had a cold expression that made everything clear. He approves of what Danzo is doing.


    The other elders also didn¡¯t say anything. They too approve of what Danzo is doing. How dare a mere civilian talk back to them like that.


    Seeing everyone backing his decision Danzo felt even more confident. Earlier he only acted due to his anger. But with everyone one his side he decided to get even more bolder.


    He would first torture this brat and make her one of his root agents. That way he could slowly take control of the World Bank. When everything in his control he could become Hokage without any competition.


    ¡° Capture her and bring her to my base. She is a threat to Konoha, ¡° Danzo said with a wicked smile as he ordered his men. He needed to make her his pawn before Hiruzen gets any funny ideas.


    The three Root ninjas obeyed Danzo¡¯s orders and rushed towards Izanami immediately.


    Looking at her assailants Izanami had a cold smile as she said, ¡° Since this is your choice let me make my move ¡° She then snapped her fingers and in an instant the door to the office was cut open.


    Tengen with his twin swords readied came inside in a flash. With movements that are barely visible he killed the three Root ninjas in an instant.


    Danzo and Hiruzen barely managed to react as they saw Tengen massacre the Root ninjas. As for the other elders their reactions were even slower.


    The only reason he didn¡¯t pressure Hiruzen to select another Hokage is because he was quite suitable. But it seems old age might have got to him since he is doing something so foolish.


    ¡® It seems I have to go there personally to make sure everything is solved peacefully. Or else I would have make sure Konoha doesn¡¯t involve the Fire country when it inevitably crumbles. ¡® The Daimyo thought. As the sole bank that was there for centuries who knew what kinds of forces they have.


    ¡° Get someone to prepare the carriage. I''m going to Konoha this instant. ¡° The Fire Daimyo shouted as he went outside the room.


    While the Daimyo was preparing to head towards Konoha, Konoha itself was chaotic. When the huge screen suddenly appeared in the sky many were alarmed. Ninjas swiftly took battle stances ready for battle.


    But unexpectedly they all saw one of the Konoha elders try to kill the representative of the World Bank. Although many might have not know about Izanami they all knew what the World Bank is.


    It is the Bank that helped most common people to earn a living by giving them loans. And furthermore they have a great reputation of being the best Bank that always try to help their sincere customers.


    So civilians families who only managed to earn a living due to that kindness began to make a commotion. The Anbu ninjas didn¡¯t know what to do when so many civilians began to join the commotion. Even some of them are indebted for the World Bank for the loans they give out.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 58

    Chapter 58


    ¡® Fuuuuck ¡® Hiruzen cursed inside his head as he looked at the village below from the window. Even from here he could see the growing commotion outside. He didn¡¯t dare to make any more rash moves because he could still see the huge screen broadcasting everything that was happening in his office.


    One wrong move and he would become the sinner of the whole village. Everything he worked hard for would be gone down the drain.


    ¡° What are you waiting for ? kill anyone who interferes with my orders !. ¡° While Hiruzen was freaking out, Danzo''s cold voice vibrated in the room. His anger only grew even more when he realised his men were killed off.


    At his words more Root Ninjas suddenly appeared and dashed towards Izanami. This made even Tengen freeze for a few seconds. Did Danzo finally lose it. Did he not care about the consequences after everyone saw what he was about to do?


    As much as Tengen wanted answers to those questions he had no time to spare. Unlike earlier when he was able to catch his opponents off guard he now has to protect Izanami from multiple opponents. While he may be the fastest he still lacked experience to fully unleash his potential so he is a bit worried.


    But his worries vanished completely when he saw the smile on Izanami¡¯s face. She had a look that screamed , ¡® It is all going according to plan ¡® . And just like he expected he didn¡¯t have to make a move. More ninjas suddenly came inside the room and apprehended them.


    ¡° Hiruzen, what are you doing? ¡° Danzo roared as he saw his men being stopped by Anbu ninjas. He glared at Hiruzen demanding answers.


    ¡° Yeah Hiruzen, what are you doing ? Why is Danzo still unpunished when he dared to attack me ? Do you think the World Bank is an easy target for Konoha to bully? ¡° Izanami said in her arrogant voice.


    Before Danzo could say anything Hiruzen directly cut in, ¡° Lady Izanami I am terribly sorry ..¡±


    ¡° If you are sorry then prove it. Kill the culprit in front of you like you are supposed to ¡° Izanami cut him off mid sentence before he could say anything else.


    Hiruzen choked as he heard those words. He wanted to lash at this girl for even saying that. Who does she think for her to order him to kill his friend and partner. He would never agree to that.


    ¡° What, you can¡¯t do that? Then why do you even bother trying to fake an apology? If that dog can attack me even when he is in your presence, who knows what he would do in future. Wait, don''t tell me you want to protect him because he is the only person who would do all your dirty work. ¡° Izanami said as she was fortified. Her acting skills were so superb that she even fooled the Anbu ninjas.Ne?ww chapters will be fully updated at novelhall.com


    ¡° You know what screw this , since you aren¡¯t going to give me a sincere apology, we are going to go to war. The World Bank will stop supporting every single business we fund in Konoha and will collect the last bit of money anyone in Konoha owes to the world.


    And if Konoha doesn¡¯t give us the money they owe we will commision the other ninja villages to raise this village to the ground. We will also abandon every World Bank branch we have in Konoha. And if the daimyo didn¡¯t give us a reasonable explanation we will withdraw from the Fire country as well.


    I don¡¯t believe the Daimyo who supports such a ninja village which has such an irresponsible Hokage is trustworthy anymore, ¡° Izanami said, shocking everyone. And after that she walked out of the room with Tengen.


    Her words Homura who was incharge of finances pale in fright, Most of the major businesses that are in Konoha are funded by the World Bank¡¯s loans. If they stop giving these loans then most businesses would go bankrupt immediately. What¡¯s more they would come to collect every single bit of money they owe to the World Bank.


    You must know that most ninjas when they are injured or hospitalised has to take loans to pay for their medical bills. With the scarcity of medical ninjas the prices are astronomical. And most of the people who usually gets hospitalised are the genins and chunins who don¡¯t earn much from doing missions.


    ¡® we may have screwed up ¡® he thought with a grave expression.


    He wasn¡¯t the only person who thought this. Many others also had the same thought. In the viewing screen they all saw how Danzo attacked Izanami just because he was angry. His intention of killing Izanami was too obvious.


    If the third Hokage accepted Izanami¡¯s demand and punished Danzo for his actions then everyone would be happy.


    These thoughts kept pouring on the people¡¯s mind as they thought of ways to pay off their debts. They didn¡¯t think for a moment about not paying their debts. As Izanami said the World Bank would very much issue other ninja villages missions to collect the money. They had the capital to do such a thing.


    And since no one wanted to be the target of the World Bank¡¯s revenge plan they could only obediently find some properties for them to sell and cover the loan payments. And of course they cursed Danzo every five minutes to alleviate a little bit of their resentment.


    If Danzo was here they would personally kill him so that the World Bank would not go to war with Konoha.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 59

    Chapter 59


    After putting up that little show, Izanami came home in a hurry. She wasted enough time with the Third Hokage. She still needed to train Naruto. And since she didn¡¯t want to be disturbed on her way she deployed her domain to hide herself from the despairing crowd.


    Izanami wasn¡¯t worried her plan would backfire on her. Prior to her declaration she gave the orders to the Yokai squad to spread some rumours about Danzo¡¯s bad behaviour so he would be the true bad guy.


    When it came to changing public opinion no one could challenge her. As someone who lived for centuries she knew how to manipulate crowds with just a few words. And she is sure that even Black Zetsu could do that due to how much experience he has in that particular subject.


    With the help of her domain she and Tengen home in no time. But before she could say anything she was pulled to the side by Tsunade.


    ¡° Hey Tsunade, I didn''t think you would miss me this much. ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Tsunade with a chuckle. Currently she is being held by Tsunade and is pushed into a corner. If one didn¡¯t know any better they would think Tsunade is bullying Izanami.


    Tsunade wasn¡¯t amused by Izanami¡¯s jokes. She looked at Izanami seriously and asked , ¡° What were you thinking Izanami.? Why the hell did you broadcast that into the whole Konoha? Do you want to flip the village upside down? ¡°


    ¡° Yes actually ¡° Izanami said seriously as she stopped her jokes.


    Tsunade was stunned and reflexively let go of Izanami¡¯s hand and took a few steps back. After she realised what she had done she coughed a bit before asking, ¡° What will you even gain in doing all this. Once the village in utter chaos the ninja villages would attack Konoha without any hesitation. ¡°


    Izanami shook her head and answered, ¡° No you are wrong about that part. As long as I stay in Konoha the other villages wouldn¡¯t dare to advance their troops. Not unless they want to have their Daimyo turning against them. ¡°


    Tsunade thought about and realised that Izanami was right. Like Konoha the other hidden villages need to have their daimyo¡¯s backing to run their respected villages. After what is happening to Sunagakure every other ninja village made sure their ties with their respected Daimyo is good.Ne?ww chapters will be fully updated at novelhall.com


    With the World Bank having complete control over the economy these Daimyo¡¯s don¡¯t dare to mess with it.


    ¡° What are you going to do now? Are you seriously going to war unless Danzo is killed ? ¡° Tsunade asked . Frankly she didn¡¯t know how her teacher would solve this. Would he sacrifice Danzo like he did to many shinobi or clean up his mess like he was doing for all these years.


    Izanami gave a mysterious smile and said, ¡° It¡¯s too early to give an exact answer to that as some of the key players are still missing. ¡°


    ¡°Hmm what is that supposed to mean? ¡° Tsunade asked, annoyed. Had it been someone else she would have punched him for speaking in riddles.


    ¡° No spoilers, ¡° Izanami said with a mischievous smile as she pressed a finger to her lips.


    ¡°Why you little ¡° Tsunade was instantly enraged as she tried to catch Izanami and teach her a lesson.


    After a series of ups and downs Izanami walked into the living room while carrying a huge sack on her little shoulder. The funny thing is that the sack kept moving like there was someone inside it.


    Izanami sighed and snapped her fingers. And in the next moment a waterfall appeared on top of Naruto and completely drowned him. And with another snap the waterfall disappeared revealing a completely soaked Naruto.


    ¡°Hey what is the big idea, big sis Izanami? I was having such a beautiful dream I conquered the ramen island ¡° Nauto asked, annoyed.


    ¡° Oh you even had the balls to have a dream when I left you to train. It seems you have already mastered how to refine chakra. So why don¡¯t we put that to the test. ¡° Izanami said with a dark smile.


    Naruto at this moment realised that he had screwed up badly. And for the rest of his life he would never dare to slack off when he is training with Izanami.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read some advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 60

    Chapter 60


    ¡° Now that''s what I call training. Good job surviving Naruto. As a reward I will ask Teuchi to make you a special miso ramen, ¡° Izanami said with a satisfied smile.


    ¡°Yay ¡° Naruto said weakly as he laid on the ground powerless. Earlier Izanami had made him run for his life in the whole courtyard and she was chasing him with a big stick.


    When he slowed down or was about to be out of breath she would hit him. And the pain would make him run even faster. And when he was almost out of breath Izanami instructed him to use the chakra refining technique while running.


    Ninjas had to travel for hours straight to do missions. And to that they utilised their chakra to keep themselves from getting too tired. This is the most basic application for ninjas who just started refining chakra.


    This is why Izanami told Naruto to start refining his chakra after he was nearing physical limit. When one circulates chakra in their bodies they will be able to revitalise their tired bodies to some extent.


    And Naruto had to do this as his training. Since he is still at the age of three where physical training is too much for his body this exercise is the best for him.


    Well the problem was Naruto couldn¡¯t refine chakra perfectly due to him slacking off easier so this exercise was quite hard for him. Not in the physical sense as he was just running. What made it too hard for him is because Izanami hit him everytime he tried to slow down.


    So when Naruto¡¯s proficiency reached an acceptable range for Izanami he was almost out of breath and was on the verge of going unconscious.


    Izanami sighed and lifted him up and carried him in the famous princess carry. Thankfully Naruto is too young to feel the shame of being carried in a princess carry by a girl.


    As they were on their way to the next door Ichiraku Ramen they bumped into the animal group of Kaguya , Rin , Sakumo and Yahiko.


    ¡° What happened to Naruto? Did he get hurt during training? ¡°Rin asked as she came closer to inspect him almost immediately. Out of everyone she is the kindest and attached to Naruto. After all, Naruto is her sensei¡¯s child.


    ¡° Don¡¯t worry he is just exhausted after a day of training. A few bowls of Ramen will make him energetic again. ¡° Izanami said dismissively. She wasn''t lying when she said this.


    She had seen Ashura and even the Uzumaki clan get all energetic after a good meal. The meal just had to be something they must love or else the magic wouldn¡¯t work at all. It was tested and verified.


    .


    .


    And that is because of their prideful nature and unyielding will. If a person from these clans decided to protect someone with their lives on the line then that moment will be the moment they will show their true nature. No matter the injury they would not stop until they finish their mission.


    Even if they lost both of their arms they would fight with their feet. Until there''s nothing left of them they would fight to the bitter end. It is this characteristic that the saying was made.¡± Izanami explained to the crowd.


    ¡°Iit is because of this undying will Naruto is able to stand up like it was nothing after going through that training. As long as a Uzumaki has their favourite food they would even wake up from a coma if they were ever conscious. ¡° she said with a chuckle. That last one was is still being tested so it¡¯s nothing but a theory but Izanami thinks if it was Naruto it may be possible.


    Since Naruto as the reincarnation of their ancestors has the strongest will so as long as his mind stay strong there''s nothing he couldn¡¯t do¡¯ She thought inwardly.


    ¡®And besides if even a group of three idiot pirates could wake up from a coma because of sentence someone said I doubt someone ancient as Ashura couldn¡¯t do something like that too ¡® she reasoned.


    ¡° Wow, ¡° the crowd was amazed. They never knew those ancient clans were that formidable.


    ¡® as expected of ancient clans who dominated the warring state¡¯ they all thought with a bit of admiration.


    ¡° But what about the Senju clan? ¡° a voice suddenly asked as Tsunade came inside the shop. She heard Izanami¡¯s little explanation on her way inside. And she isn¡¯t amused on how the Senju clan was missing in her explanation.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 61

    Chapter 61


    Hearing Tsunade¡¯s cold words everyone reflexively took a step back. Thankfully there were no outsiders here or they would run out in fear. Tsunade was really scary right now.


    ¡°Hmm the Senju clan huh, well honestly they could be considered the ones with the best foundation amongst the other ancient clans. '''' Izanami said, thinking for a bit. Whether it was jutsus or exceptional physical strength none of the other clans could rival them. Even the Uzumaki don¡¯t have such physical strength even when they are from an ancient branch of the Senju clan.


    ¡° Is that all? ¡° Tsunade asked with a bit of disappointment. Compared to the grand introduction Izanami gave to the Uchiha and Uzumaki, the one she gave to the Senju clan is rather blank.


    Izanami gave her a look of exasperation. Did this girl not know what the benefits one could have with a great foundation. While normal ninjas work hard day and night at early age to build their foundation, But in the Senju clan they would have an even better foundation after just being born.


    And even in the warring states the Senju had fewest casualties with ealy ninjas. In gamer terms a normal ninja would start at level 1 but a Senju clan ninja would start at level 9 or 10.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    While Izanami and the rest were having some Ramen the entire Konoha was going crazy. Enemy spies were frantically trying to contact their villages to share the latest information.


    ¡®Konoha Hokage advisor Danzo Shimura tried to attack the representative of the World Bank. And the World Bank is beginning to retaliate. ¡®


    Konoha, although it is called the strongest hidden village, has lost most of its vitality in the past years. So many nations who were eying the resources in the Land of Fire didn¡¯t think much before they poured oil into the fire.


    If Konoha is weakened their chances of taking territories from the Land of Fire will be way higher. So many ninja villages publicly issued statements condemning Konoha for their actions.


    And if that isn¡¯t bad enough, many ninjas and civilians in Konoha also go to the Hokage tower to ask for answers. The huge screen in the sky showed the evidence they needed to judge the situation.


    So many righteous individuals went to the Hokage tower and started a riot. Furthermore most of the people who participated in the riot are merchants. On their way they went to the World Bank branch in Konoha and found out that their loans would be cancelled and they have two weeks to pay up their debts.


    So many merchants joined the riot to stop this madness. They didn¡¯t want to lose their businesses because of a criminal. And worse get caught up in a war.


    ¡° Sigh Danzo if you decide to act like this and then don¡¯t blame me for being ruthless ¡° He said as a cold light flashed through his eyes.


    Earlier he was thinking of a way to solve this whole mess while leaving a way for Danzo to escape. But with Danzo¡¯s recent action his thoughts began to change. He didn¡¯t doubt that Danzo had already fled from Konoha.


    After all that is the most logical move at this moment. So despite sending a team to locate him he didn¡¯t expect to have any positive results. Who knew how many secret passages Danzo made for his Root ninjas to move in secret.


    If Danzo had decided to stick with him and fight to the bitter end Hiruzen would do his best to find a way to save him. But no Danzo decided to throw all the responsibilities and run away. He didn¡¯t even inform him.


    ¡®Since you want to run away that badly then face the consequences for your actions with you¡¯ Hiruzen thought as he got up from his seat. He needs to go to that meeting and make sure the situation doesn¡¯t accelerate any more.


    While Hriuzen was going to the meeting room a few miles away from Konoha a group of ninjas were running at an accelerating speed. Most of them wore Anbu-like masks. They all had their vigilance as they covered each other¡¯s back.


    After a while they arrived near a waterfall. When they reached the waterfall the group split into three . One group went into hiding , one went to cover any tracks while the final group dashed straight into the waterfall.


    As they passed through the waterfall they arrived at an entrance to a cave that was covered perfectly by the waterfall. They waited there for a few seconds before another group of ninjas similar to them arrived in front of them.


    The third group handed a scroll to the forth group and left the save swiftly. The forth group then swiftly entered the cave while another group in the shadows followed them to make sure they were not enemies.


    As they arrived near a door to an office they all stopped. One of them knocked on the door in a peculiar manner. After that they all waited for an answer.


    ¡°Enter ¡° a cold voice came from the other side promoting the one with the scroll to enter while the others simply stood there guarding the door.


    The Root ninja came near Danzo who was sitting on a throne and knelt in front of him.Danzo then gestured to another root ninja to take the scroll and handed it to him.


    After he read the contents in the scroll his whole body began to radiate killing intent. ¡° Hiruzen, how dare you do this, ¡° he said in a cold tone.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 62

    Chapter 62


    In the scroll there was the latest information on what happened in Konoha. Which also means there is a copy of Hiruzen¡¯s order to arrest him.


    ¡® Thankfully I retreated to one of my secret hideouts. When all this mess is over I will make sure to make you pay dearly Hiruzen ¡® Danzo thought as he crumbled the scroll in his hand.


    His sudden retreat was just a precaution he took. When he heard that Daimyo himself is coming to Konoha he knew he would be just waiting for his death if stayed in Konoha. He knew how much of a coward Hiruzen will become when the Daimyo gets involved.


    So he trusted his instincts and retreated from the limelight. But he never thought Hriuzen would be so ruthless as to give an arrest order as soon as he found out he was missing.Did the thought of him being kidnapped or went to solve this by himself cross Hiruzen¡¯s mind.


    ¡® As expected Hiruzen is too old. How could he dare to think of sacrificing me. Doesn¡¯t he realise how important he is to Konoha. ¡® Danzo thought angrily.


    ¡° Just wait, I will show all of them what the consequences of betraying me ¡° Danzo¡¯s gloomy voice echoed in the dark room as he declared his revenge .


    While Danzo was plotting his revenge the Hokage Tower was quite lively. In the streets the small commotion grew bigger as numerous people joined . Had it not been for the Anbu ninjas who were there to maintain order they would have flipped the Hokage tower completely.


    While this was happening in one of many meeting rooms all of the important people were seated. Whether they were small clan heads or even high level elders none were missing.


    All of them had grim expressions as they waited for Hiruzen to arrive. Everyone knew why they are gathered here. I mean how couldn¡¯t they when a huge screen displayed Izanami declaring war on them.


    The door to the meeting room was opened and Hiruzen walked in. As soon as he sat in his chair he said, ¡° I take it I don''t have to inform you all why I called this emergency meeting ¡°. He went straight into business.


    Everyone nodded their heads as they agreed with Hiruzen¡¯s words. They were called here to discuss what they should do next now that Izanami has declared war on them.


    ¡° Hokage sama pardon me from asking but what really happened in the Hokage office this morning? ¡° Shikaku Nara asked as he looked at Hiruzen with a serious gaze.


    Although everyone had already seen it on the huge screen they still needed to understand the whole truth before arriving at a decision .


    Hiruzen smoked a bit before answering, ¡° Earlier today I summoned Izanmi Yosokuna to my office to question her decision to take Naruto to the Uchiha clan without any escorts. I simply wanted to know whether she wanted to create an internal conflict by doing that. ¡°


    ¡° Wait a minute Hokage sama but why is she even able to get close to the Nine tails Jinchuriki in the first place. Shouldn¡¯t the Anbu stop her or anyone from getting close to that kid? ¡° Hiashi Hyu?ga, the patriarch of the Hyu?ga clan asked as he interrupted Hiruzen.


    ¡° So what else should we do? We can¡¯t just surrender without even putting up a fight. That would make us a laughing stock in the whole ninja world. ¡° One other said.


    Like that a huge debate began to start. Although Danzo was shown guilty in the video, but that isn¡¯t a reason for Konoha to punish one of their high level elders. The World Bank is just a civilian organisation. No matter what they can¡¯t be the one to lose this early.


    ¡° Isn¡¯t Konoha¡¯s goal peace? Why don¡¯t we just capture elder Danzo and offer his head like what the World Bank asked us to do. It will save us from going into a meaningless war. ¡° Hiashi said with an indifferent tone. But everyone could feel the sarcasm in his voice.


    ¡° And besides, why should we protect a guilty man? And besides, isn¡¯t he simply doing his duty as Konoha elder by sacrificing himself for Konoha¡¯s prosperity? ¡° he continued as he glared at Hiruzen.


    ¡°Hiashi that is enough, we get your point ¡°Shikaku said as he tried to calm Hiashi down. Everyone knew how much Hiashi suffered because of the Kumo incident. And ironically the situation is quite similar to this one.


    Just as they were about to continue their discussion a Anbu ninja came to the room and whispered a few words to Hiruzen. Hiruzen, hearing those words, immediately stood up.


    He then said, ¡°the meeting will be put on hold until tomorrow. The Fire Daimyo has arrived so I will take my leave ¡° and with those words he left in a hurry.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 63

    Chapter 63


    ¡° Things got more troublesome, ¡° Shikaku muttered as he saw Hiruzen leave. If the Daimyo is here personally then things will get more complicated.


    One had to know that the Fire Daimyo apart from the time Konoha was founded had never set foot in Konoha. It is them who goes to the Fire country to discuss important matters. For the Fire Daimyo to personally come here there could be one reason.


    The impending war with the World Bank. If the Daimyo were to interfere then that would mean Konoha is deep shit.


    The current Konoha cannot have both the Daimyo and the World Bank as their enemies at the same time.


    ¡°Sigh what a drag ¡° he said as he wished things wouldn¡¯t get any more worse.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    In a more lavish room the fire Daimyo was looking at Hiruzen with an angry look. He was furious at what he heard.


    Previously he came to order Hriuzen to apprehend Danzo and hand him to Izanami so that she wouldn¡¯t start a war. But his hopes were instantly crushed when he heard Danzo had gone missing.


    ¡° Hiuzen do you have any excuses for you to say ? Not only did you fail to keep a criminal in custody, you even let him live after he dared to attack a representative from the World Bank. ¡° The Fire Daimyo asked with a cold tone.


    Hiruzen was sweating profusely as he heard the tone fire Daimyo was speaking. At this time he regretted not capturing Danzo earlier. If he had made a decision earlier he would have been spared from this lecture.


    ¡°I ..i ¡° just before Hiruzen was about to give an explanation the Fire Daimyo interrupted him while saying,


    ¡° Forget it , I don¡¯t want to hear your pathetic excuses. I will give you two days to find that Danzo and bring him to me, dead or alive. If not, you better be prepared to face the consequences. ¡° The Fire Daimyo said he stood up as left the room.


    Just before he left the room he turned back and said, ¡°Oh and find me someone who could guide me to where lady Izanami is. ¡°


    ¡° I see that is quite the coincidence isn¡¯t it. Just when the Daimyo wanted to go to Konoha, he just so happened to see a passing by empress carriage that so happens to be heading towards Konoha. ¡° Izanami said with a chuckle.


    Hearing her words even Nanami had a twitch in her eye. She knew no matter how much she tried she could never hide anything from her mother. How could she when her mother is the best at Schemes.


    ¡° So wanna tell me what you and Nagisa are planning this time? ¡° Izanami asked with a sigh.


    Nanami shook her head and answered, ¡°I don¡¯t know what you are talking about ¡°


    Hearing this Izanami sighed again. She knew Nanami can be very stubborn sometimes. ¡® well I''ll just deal with it when the time comes. I doubt those two would do anything drastic that would crumble my whole plan. ¡®Izanami thought as she pushed those worries to the back of her mind.


    ¡° So anyways, how are the other villages taking this? Are they already marching with their troops? ¡° Izanami asked changing the subject.


    ¡°Well Kumo , Iwa and Suna were about to do that but after they all received a letter from their respected Daimyo they all backed down immediately. ¡° Nanami said as she adjusted her glasses.


    ¡° Oh all three of them, ¡° Izanami asked, raising one eyebrow.


    ¡°Yes all three hidden villages'' '' Nanami said, confirming Izznami¡¯s words.


    ¡°That¡¯s surprising . Iwa and Suna I can understand. But Kumo, that''s shocking. Didn¡¯t the Raikage give his usual middle finger and dismiss the order. ¡° Izanami asked.


    ¡° Well that¡¯s what¡¯s supposed to happen but from what I heard the Thunder Daimyo threatened to cut all ties with them if they even moved a single soldier to the borders. This of course didn¡¯t deter A but he was forced to submit because of the rest of the council also threatening him to take a step down. ¡° Nanami said.


    ¡°Oh I can imagine A¡¯s face when he finds out that most of the village will go to war with him for disregarding the Daimyo¡¯s orders. ¡° Izanami said as she laughed out loud.


    ¡°Well this is to be expected. The Land of Thunder¡¯s Daimyo is the most cunning amongst all the other Daimyo''s. He would never let a prideful man like A rain over the hidden cloud village if he didn¡¯t have any back up plans. ¡° Nanami said with a shrug.


    Strictly speaking hidden villages are supposed to be called a part of the Daimyo¡¯s forces. So most of the time it is the Daimyo who sponsors the hidden village''s more expensive missions.


    So that is why the hidden cloud village usually goes to extreme measures when they are trying to go to war. They knew the Daimyo had their back. Which is also why they were so shameless as to sacrifice one of their men into being a Byakugan into their village while threatening to go to war.


    And as far as Iznami know, the hidden cloud ninjas came to Konoha while carrying the identities of the Daimyo¡¯s representatives. This directly told anyone that the Daimyo fully supports the whole operation.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 64

    Chapter 64


    ¡° Do we have any idea where Danzo ran off to ¡°Izanami asked as she looked at Nanami. Danzo¡¯s behaviour caught even her off guard. She didn¡¯t expect him to be this decisive.


    ¡°Yes, our spies have already infiltrated his new base. He seems to have thought hiding in one of the many waterfalls is a great idea. ¡° Nanami said sarcastically. Although he hid very well, that place is too cliche.


    ¡° Well what do you expect from a guy who made one of his secret root hideouts inside his teacher''s stone statue?. Now that I think about the door to that base under the nostril of Toboroma¡¯s statue right. Danzo really took the saying ¡®doing everything under his teacher¡¯s nose. ¡® quite literally. ¡° Izanami said with a chuckle.


    ¡°Yeah so what do we do about him? ¡° Nanami asked, not really getting the joke, Izanami said.


    Izanami pouted as she didn¡¯t get the reaction she wanted. But she nonetheless said, ¡° Order the Yokai members to spread a rumour of Danzo¡¯s dirty deals. And also make sure Hiruzen has an equal amount of blame for his actions. ¡°


    ¡°Yes as you wish Matriarch ¡° Nanami bowed a little as she left the room with the Yokai member.


    After they left Izanami closed her eyes and said, ¡°Now Hiruzen what would you do now? How will you react when you become Konoha¡¯s public enemy? ¡°


    ¡°I really can¡¯t wait for your next move ¡°she said with a bloodthirsty smile that looked identical to the one the Ghost of Uchiha always has in his face.


    .


    .N/ne?w n0vel chap/ers are published o/n


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡°Oh really what could they do something more horrible than starting a war ¡°


    ¡°Hehehe I was as surprised as you when I heard about it for the first time too. Here look at this list. I got this when I was coming back from the mainstreet. Apparently these papers are distributed throughout Konoha. Nobody knows who did that though, ¡° the first man said as he brought a paper from his pocket.


    ¡° Show me the crime that is way worse than starting a war between Konoha and the World Bank. ¡° said one as he snatched the piece of paper.


    After he started reading it his whole expression turned pale. His hands were trembling as he continued to read. ¡° how can a person be such a monster ¡° he said he almost lost his balance.


    ¡°Hah what are you so scared for ¡° another one spoke as he took the fallen paper and read it. After a while he too was trembling. But instead of fear he was trembling in anger. ¡°Damn that freak, how could such a monster be our hokage assistant.


    ¡° Hey ninja, bring me that piece of paper ¡° The fire Daimyo said as he looked at the Anbu nina who was sweating.


    Although the Anbu ninja didn¡¯t see the contents of the paper he could tell that it isn¡¯t something good. ¡® oh god please help us ¡® he prayed as hesitantly took the piece of paper from the civilians and gave it to the Fire Daimyo.


    The daimyo took the paper from him and looked at it. And after reading just a few lines his body also began to tremble uncontrollably.


    On the paper there is a detailed report about the things Danzo did for the last few years. On the top of the list there is killing Kagami Uchiha , assassinating talented ninjas especially who are from the Uchiha clan,framing Sakumo Hatake and forcing him to commit suicide, plotting to assassinate Hriuzen Sarutobi , Killing Senju Nawaki , kidnapping children and using them for many forbidden experiments. The list went on making even the Daimyo sacred.


    ¡° Hey is this true? ¡° the daimyo asked the Anbu ninja with bloodshot eyes. He knew ninjas were very dark but he never knew they could be this dark. And this is coming from someone who had to fight for the throne as soon as he was born.


    The Anbu sweated under the murderous look of the Fire Daimyo. One didn¡¯t need to be a genius to know that he might have screwed up Konoha even more. He just hoped the squad that went to hunt Danzo would succeed in their mission.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 65

    Chapter 65


    ¡°Damn it who the hell did this ¡°Danzo roared as he punched the table in front of him. He did so in an excellent way that even the Raikage would feel proud. Unfortunately Danzo didn¡¯t care about the now broken table as he had other matters to worry about.


    ¡° Who the hell spread those papers. Is it Hiruzen , No that''s impossible these papers would drag him down too so he would never dare do it. ¡° Danzo muttered as he bit his finger in frustration.Upstodatee from


    As someone who was always in charge he didn''t like it when there is something he doesn''t know.


    ¡° Could it be someone from the other ninja villages? No, if those guys have this much information they would have declared war on Konoha already. ¡° Danzo suddenly thought but denied this idea immediately. If the other ninja villages had this much information they would have already gone to war with this as an excuse.


    And for next few minutes Danzo continued to name possible suspects before discarding them from his imaginary list.


    ¡° Arrg damn it who is it ? Who the hell spread those papers¡± Danzo roared as felt a massive headache.


    It is now that Danzo had realised that in the past years he had made too many enemies. Damn it who told him to be so overbearing when he kidnapped his shoulders from orphanages , ninja clans and civilian families.


    ¡®I need to get to the bottom of this ¡® Danzo thought as a cold light flashed in his eyes. No matter who it is, they will pay for what they did.


    ¡°Fu? and Torune ¡° Danzo said as his cold voice reverberated in the dark room.


    Shortly after, two silhouettes appeared in front of Danzo while kneeling. ¡° Yes Danzo sama ¡° both of them said at the same time .


    ¡°Go and find out who is plotting against me. Use whatever method you want. But be extra cautious as to not to be spotted by the Anbu. And if you ever were to be discovered, destroy any traces of your involvement and come back. ¡° Danzo said gloomily.


    Although going to Konoha at this time is a bad decision Danzo thought it was necessary. He could smell a deep scheme and he wanted to know what that was. His instincts were telling him that being in the dark at this time is a death sentence. That is why he gave this task to his most powerful ninjas.


    With those two¡¯s abilities they would be able to gather much more information in a short amount of time and escape in a short notice.


    But it was not her presence that made everyone freeze because they expected Tsunade would barge in. How could she not do anything when she finds out that her brother¡¯s death was not an accident.


    No, what made everyone uneasy is the person who came with Tsunade. And that is none other than Fire Daimyo. And from his expression he doesn¡¯t seem too pleased. It must be because he has also found out about what Danzo did while he was the Hokage assistant.


    The person who had the greatest reaction was Hiruzen. When he saw Tsunade with the Fire Daimyo he was sweating buckets. Not even his poker face could cover that. If it was just Tsunade he could lie all he wanted. But against the Daimyo all his excuses would only come to bite him in the ass. He just wished the Daimyo was here to talk about something else.


    ¡° Hiruzen you better give me a reasonable explanation about what is written here ¡°The Fire Daimyo said as he threw a piece of paper at him.


    When Hiruzen took it he felt endless despair. Because this is one of the many copies that is circulating in Konoha.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 66

    Chapter 66


    ¡°I ..i.. I ¡° words didn¡¯t come out from Hriuzen¡¯s mouth. He felt that he aged another decade in the last few seconds.


    Seeing Hiruzen like this, the Daimyo got even more angry. ¡°What are you stuttering about ? Tell me how the hell did your goddamn Hokage assistant abuse his authority to this extent? What were you doing when all this happened? Were blind that Danzo could do all this and walk away scott free? ¡°


    ¡°No.. I ¡° Hiruzen tried to defend himself but he was cut off mid sentence.


    ¡° You what huh tell me what did you do ? according to me you not only failed to stop these crimes you looked away ignoring everything your assistant did. ¡° the Fire Daimyo ruthlessly said.


    You know Konoha¡¯s reputation was completely destroyed because of Hiruzen and Danzo. One did the crimes while the other supported him by looking away. And it wouldn¡¯t be a surprise the Fire country would be implicated in this. After all, Konoha at the end of the day is the military force guarding the Land of Fire.


    When your bodyguards are a bunch of scumbags how could anyone not have any negative feelings towards their owner. Human beings love to point fingers after all.


    ¡° I will tell you this one last time Hiruzen find that Danzo and publicly execute him. If this isn¡¯t done before the deadline I gave you then Konoha would no longer be a part of the Land of Fire. I will publicly declare that the Fire country would cut any ties that it has with Konoha. ¡° The Fire Daimyo said, shocking Hiruzen to the core.


    You know a ninja village and a nation is something like a bridge. Both parties need each other. So even if both sides have conflict with each other they will not destroy their connection.


    Even the wind Daimyo only dared to cut the funds he sent to the Sand village. He knew that for his nation''s safety he needed the sand village. So despite not liking Rasa he didn¡¯t order the ninja village to disband or select a new Kazekage.


    So when Fire Daimyo said that he was going to cut all ties with Konoha he was basically crippling the Land of Fire¡¯s military strength. But he didn''t care as he knew with incoming war aliying with Konoha would be a far worse decision.


    What if the whole united and goes to war with the Fire country and Konoha because they chose to defend a criminal who has done numerous inhuman stuff. Doesn¡¯t that basically destroy the Fire country removing its foundation from the roots.


    And apart from that they would be numerous revolutions leading to a civil war. No country or ninja village can handle fighting in the inside and out at the same time.


    So the safest option for the Land of Fire is to cut all ties with Konoha. Although it would weaken them but with enough time they would gradually recover.


    ¡° I take there is no one who is objecting to this ¡° Hiruzen asked looking at the cround. Although he said this he knew the answer in his heart. No one would object this and even more they have no time to argue about this.


    ¡° we agree to this ¡° Shikaku Nara said as he agreed to this. He knew this is the most correct choice at this moment. Tsunade had the enough reputation and skills to be the Hokage. And no clan would disagree to have her as the Hokage.


    ¡®Although it is unlikly but would Tsunade sama disagree to this ¡® He thougjt as he looked at Tsunade. He wasn¡¯t the only one as almost everyone was lookng at Tsunade waiting for her answer.


    Facing everyone¡¯s stares tsunade sighed and said, ¡° Fine old man I will take that hat. But you all better do your best to find that Danzo. I really need to have a little talk with him. ¡°


    ¡®And besides I doubt Izanami would let me rest in piece after all the talk she had ealier ¡®Tsunade said.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 67

    Chapter 67


    ~ A few minutes earlier~


    ¡°It is done matriarch, we have already spread the details of Danzo¡¯s crimes to the whole Konoha. The way he did it, why he did it and how he got away with it everything was recorded in those fliers. ¡° Nanami said as she adjusted her glasses. She had a cold smile as she said those words.


    Nanami always had a grudge against Danzo. Her best friend Kagami was killed by him. That is why she was the one who collected all the dirt Dazo had. From wanting to kill a clan or steal a child¡¯s toy she wrote everything.


    ¡°So did the daimyo learn of this yet ¡° Izanami asked as she ignored Nanami¡¯s darkness that was leaking out. She always knew that her children had a dark side. But each time she pointed out that they would say that compared to her they were angels.


    Preposterous how could that be true? She is the nicest and kindest person you could find in this world. How dare they say that she is evil. She has never done anything evil at all.


    ¡° ehem yes, he is actually learning about this at this very moment. ¡° Nanami said as she coughed a bit to her dark thoughts.


    ¡°I see, so do we need someone to call him in case he runs away in fear? ¡° Izanami asked as she sipped her tea,


    ¡°Hmm, that would be for the best as it seems he is too scared to come near our house. He is just taking one step and retracting it the next second. If this continued I¡¯m afraid this would take a while. ¡° Nanami said as she used her observation haki to see the situation outside the house.


    When the Daimyo found out how corrupt and cruel Danzo was, he had no face to talk to Izanami and ask for this matter to settle down peacefully. Previously he wanted to find if there is a way to avoid war as this may affect the Land of Fire¡¯s security.


    No matter what Konoha is still the force that is protecting the other countries from invading the Fire country. If Konoha is weakened too badly the other countries may have ideas of expanding their territory.


    For this, the Fire Daimyo wanted to negotiate with Izanami. If he couldn¡¯t avoid war he at the very least wanted to protect the Fire country from being affected by this war.


    But after learning this, how could he ask for anything? Anyone could tell that Hriuzen had turned a blind eye to Danzo¡¯s crimes which made him too arrogant. This may be one of the reasons why he dared to attack Izanami when he was still in the presence of Hiruzen.


    It may also be that Danzo is acting on Hiruzen¡¯s orders. And no matter what, all these reasons show that Izanami is a victim and has a legitimate reason to wage war. How could a direct descendant of the CEO of the World Bank be threatened when she was here to do her job?


    So the Daimyo was hesitating to go meet with Izanami. He didn¡¯t doubt that Izanami wouldn¡¯t know what was happening in Konoha. For god¡¯s sake even he learned of this matter when he was in this neighbourhood.


    ¡° I see, worry not lady Izanami. I have already ordered Hiruzen to capture that criminal. In just two days he would be at Lady Izanami¡¯s feet begging for forgiveness. ¡° the Fire Daimyo said with a bit of panic.


    ¡° He better be, ¡° Izanami spat as she glared at the Daimyo.


    ¡° So what are you going to do about Hiruzen? In those fliers, it is said that he knew about everything his dear old friend did. ¡° Izanami asked as gave the fire Daimyo a look.


    As though he was understanding what to do he said, ¡° Of course he needs to be punished. Hiruzen is no longer fit to be Hokage. Lady Izanami would happen to have any suitable candidates. ¡°


    ¡°How about Tsunade? I don¡¯t think she is half bad. ¡°Izanami said as she looked at the peeking head of Tsunade a little wink while telepathically saying, ¡® Tsunade get ready, it''s time for you to take that mantle and protect your grandfather¡¯s legacy. ¡®


    ¡®Can I not be the Hokage and try to save my grandfather''s legacy? ¡® Tsunade asked with a bit of depression.


    Izanami smiled sweetly and said, ¡® No. ¡®


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 68

    Chapter 68


    Tsunade still felt like crying after remembering that conversation. Although she really loved her grandfather she really didn¡¯t want to become Hokage. That is just asking for hell. But unfortunately, the devil herself declared her fate and she is too powerless to do anything.


    ¡®Well I¡¯ll just play according to what Izanamiu wants for now and when the situation here is stabilized I will immediately throw this mantle to a fool so I can live as freely as I want ¡® Tsunade thought with an evil smile.


    If Izanami had heard Tsunade¡¯s thoughts she would just shake her head in pity. Didn¡¯t Tsunade just raise a flag? So now she would be the Hokage for a very long time.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡°As expected that monkey is too easy for an opponent. ¡° Izanami said as she watched the whole drama in the Hokage Office with her observation of Haki.


    Honestly speaking she was a bit shocked at how easily Hiruzen gave in when the pressure he felt increased. She thought he would at the very least hesitate when nominating Tsnade.


    ¡® Did his guilt finally get to him ¡® she wondered.


    While she was wondering this she felt a tug on her clothes. Coming out of her contemplation she found it was Naruto who was tugging at her clothes.


    She smiled at him and asked, ¡°What is the matter Naruto ¡°


    ¡°Big sis, can we go to the park today to play? ¡° Naruto asked with a bit of expectation. In the past, he didn¡¯t have anyone to play with because all the adults would take away their children when he came to the park. So he was always lonely. But now with big sister Izanami here he won¡¯t be lonely anymore.


    ¡° Oh since it is a request from sweet dear Naruto I can¡¯t refuse can I ¡° Izanami smiled and said to Naruto.


    ¡°Yay, I¡¯m going to the park with big sister Izanami. ¡°Naruto said excitedly as he jumped up and down.


    ¡° Oh, I know why don¡¯t we take the four animals with us too. I don¡¯t think they had any exercise for a while. ¡°Izanami said as she suddenly remembered this. Although none of them are normal animals for Naruto they are excellent playmates.


    After the whole fiasco at the Hokage office, everyone returned to their respective clans to relay the information on what happened.


    Although everyone at that agreed to Tsunade¡¯s ascension as the Hokage some were still dissatisfied. Like the Uchiha clan who always wanted to have a Hokage from their line.


    ¡° is that something to talk about we should naturally oppose her. If she were to become Hokage there would be three Senjus who became Hokage. How could allow another Senju to become a Hokage? I say we should select one from our clan to be the Hokage. ¡° an elder from the radical faction said arrogantly.


    ¡° I say we forget about this matter for now. If we failed to capture Danzo, forget about being Hokage, even living in Konoha would be a pipe dream. ¡° one of the elders from the opposite faction said.


    ¡° huh do you truly think we would lose to the World Bank? That thought itself is absurd. We are the strongest hidden village. We have battled every other ninja village together and still emerged victorious. So how could we lose to a bank that is just run by a bunch of civilians. ¡° the radical elder said with disdain.


    And so an argument erupted. Both sides refused to submit to the other. But before everything escalated to a full-blown fight Fugaku finally spoke, ¡° That is enough. All of you shut up ¡°. With his full aura released and Three Tomoe Sharingan opened he managed to silence the crowd.


    He looked at everyone and said, ¡°We will not oppose Tsunnade¡¯s ascension. As the peace faction said, now is not the time to fight for the Hokage position. If tried to show any opposition that would worsen the relations we have with Konoha.


    And besides, isn¡¯t this a wonderful opportunity? For the last few years, Danzo Shimura and the others tried to suppress by doing many despicable things.


    They assassinated our clan geniuses and forced us to go away from our ancestral land. After all these actions fate is finally on our side.


    The higher-ups agreed that every ninja would put everything away and search for Danzo Shimura. Their only requirement was to bring him alive or half-dead. So if one of our men found him first the village wouldn¡¯t mind us beating some sense to him ¡° Fugaku said with a cold smile.


    Similar smiles began to appear on the rest of the people. They could get what Fugaku was hinting at. Everyone here knows that almost all the problems they get are because of Danzo. So they wouldn¡¯t mind uniting against him.


    Itachi, who was also in the meeting room, looked at everyone with a blank look. ¡® It seems like I would be able to avenge Shisui sooner than I expected. ¡® he thought as his eyes flashed with the Mangekyou pattern. Thankfully everyone was too excited to notice it.


    Yes unlike in the future Itachi who had to let go of his emotions of revenge for his brother¡¯s safety the Itachi now is brimming with killing intent for Danzo. It is because of him that he has lost his best friend.


    So the person who wanted to torture Danzo the most is undoubtedly Itachi. And it just so happens that he had the perfect technique to use on Danzo.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 69

    Chapter 69


    While the whole Konoha was at a boiling limit the kids were none the wiser all gathered in the playground to play. To them, they cared less about the stuff adults do. The only thing they cared about was what game they would play with their friends.


    Coming to the park Izanami saw that it was a bit more crowded than usual.


    Looking around she saw that many of these children were from clans. That is surprising since she didn''t think these kids would come here during a time like this.


    What Izanami doesn''t know is that it was Tsunade who ordered the clan children to go to the park today. Before coming here she heard Naruto wanting to go to the park so knowing how doting Izanami is she speculated that she would take Naruto to the park.


    Since this is a rare opportunity Tsunade said to the clans to send their children to the park and make friends with Naruto and possibly Izanami. That way maybe they could possibly have some more time to sort out the huge mess.


    Although the possibility of Izanami falling for their plan is very low, Tsunade thought it is better than nothing.


    As for whether using her connection with Izanami to solve the problem, Tsunade never thought about it. If she had asked that of her Tsunade was sure Izanami would give her a thousand reasons she would not.


    What Tsunade didn¡¯t know was that if she asked nicely Izanami wouldn¡¯t mind extending the deadline she gave them. Not only would this help to solidify Tsunade¡¯s position, but it would also give them enough time to catch Danzo.


    ¡° So Naruto, now that we are here, what do you want to do first? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at Naruto.


    ¡°I know why don¡¯t we go try the swing first, ¡° Naruto said excitedly. He always wanted to try the swing with his friends but unfortunately, no one wanted to be friends with him.


    ¡°Ok, ¡°Izanami said with a bit of emotion. She is finally going to see the legendary swing. The swing that has been a main part of the story.


    Arriving at the swing they saw it was free for anyone to use. Both of them hurriedly go there before someone else goes and tries the swing first.


    ¡° Ok Naruto, sit down immediately before someone else comes to claim the swing. ¡°Izanami urged him to sit down immediately as she looked around.


    Naruto obediently sat down and then suddenly as though remembering something he asked Izanami, ¡°Big sis Izanami can you ride the swing with me? I saw some big brothers do it with their siblings so I was wondering whether we could do the same. ¡°His voice became more quiet as he finished his sentence.


    The trio are the young generation of the Ino¨CShika¨CCho?. Their names are Ino Yamanaka, Shikamaru Nara, and lastly Cho?ji Akimichi. The first friends Naruto made in the original story.


    They too were kicked out of their homes to go to play in the park under their parent''s orders. Although no one knew why they were kicked out they all thought this must have something to do with the incoming war.


    And since Shikamaru thought doing anything would be a drag he laid under a tree to continue his cloud-watching. And Ino and Choji also followed his lead as they too had nothing to do. Ino decided to make a flower crown while Choji just sat near Shikamaru and started eating his chips.


    Naruto looked at them and then at Izanami again. After hesitating a bit he walked towards the trio. The trio naturally noticed him coming over but they didn¡¯t do anything. They just observed him with curiosity.


    Seeing them not showing any hostility, Naruto cheered up internally. In the past when he tried to approach someone they would either throw stones at him or stand up and walk away.


    After Naruto arrived near them he took a deep breath and said with his usual sunshine smile ¡°Hey my name is Naruto Uzumaki wanna become friends ¡°


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 70

    Chapter 70


    Time seems to stop for Naruto as he waited for any response. Ino , Shikamaru and Choji looked at each other before shikamaru introduced themselves.


    ¡°What¡¯s up names Shikamaru , this is Ino and Choji. As for becoming friends, sure why not. Just don¡¯t make it such a drag ¡° Shikamaru said as he yawned.


    ¡°Shikamaru, that''s not very nice.¡± Ino said as she glared at Shikamaru she then turned to Naruto and said with a smile¡± Ignore him, he is always like this. why don¡¯t you sit down first¡±


    ¡° Ok ¡° Naruto said with a bit of excitement. He was super happy to meet someone who would not be disgusted by the idea of being friends with him.


    After he sat down with them his attention was immediately caught by the bag of chips Choji was holding. Choji too seemed to notice his gaze as he looked at Naruto and then at the bag chips. This went on for a few times before he hesitantly offered his bag of chips to naruto.


    ¡°Here you can have some. There are spicy chicken flavour ¡° Choji said with a forced smile. He really didn¡¯t like to share his chips with anyone but it would simply be too rude to Naruto if he gave him the cold shoulder.


    ¡°Thanks a lot, ¡° Naruto said with a happy smile. He has never eaten chips before so he was simply curious on how it tasted. ¡°Hmm this is super delicious I love it ¡° he praised as he gave Choji a thumbs up.


    ¡°I know right there is also Beef flavoured , Cheese flavoured and ... ¡° Choji said as he excitedly explained the different flavours to Naruto.


    ¡°Wow Shikamaru did you see that Choji is sharing his chips with someone ¡° ino said in amazement as she shook him violently to wake him up from his sleep.


    ¡°I can see that but Ino please stop shaking me. I''m about to faint from dizziness. ¡° Shikamaru said as he tried his best to escape Ino¡¯s clutches.


    ¡°Oops sorry about that, '''' Ino said as she realised that she might have shook Shikamaru too much.


    ¡° Sigh, what a drag ¡° Shikamaru said as he used the tree to save himself from the pain of falling down and hitting his nose.


    ¡° Say Naruto, tell us a bit about yourself, ¡° Choji asked as he finished his explanation. He got too excited a bit earlier. Since Ino and Shikamaru have no interest in food he as a food lover and a bit lonely. So when Naruto passed the chips he got excited to meet another food lover.


    ¡°Me huh. Mmm My name is Naruto Uzumaki. I used live at my apartment but now I live with big sis Izanami in her house. My favourite food is Ramen. And the ramen uncle Teuchi make at Ichiraku Ramen is the best. ¡° Naruto said as he wiped the drool that escaped his lips when he talked about Ichiraku Ramen.


    ¡°Ichiraku huh I heard of that place. According to my mom their ramen is something to die for ¡° Ino said as she joined the conversation. Although she didn¡¯t know much about food she heard of Ichiraku Ramen.


    ¡° Yeah, my parents talked about that place too. ¡° Shikamaru too joined in. From his father he learned that place was something they went to while he was dating my mom.


    ¡°Hey why don¡¯t we go there now. All this talking made me crave some ramen. ¡° Choji said as he rubbed his belly.


    ¡°That¡¯s great, I will show you the way. I¡¯m a regular there, ¡° Naruto said excitedly as he showed a sunny smile.


    ¡°Big sis Izanami, can we go to Ichiraku Ramen, ¡° Naruto asked as he used his puppy dog eyes on Izanami.


    Izanami chuckled and said while ruffling his hair, ¡° Sure we can go and you don¡¯t need to use those puppy dog eyes to convince me ¡°


    And so the group of five headed towards Ichiraku Ramen. If one were to ignore Izanami¡¯s actual age they would look like five friends walking together.


    While they headed towards Ichiraku Ramen on the opposite side of the park , three people walked towards the park. All of three of them had white eyes signifying their identities as Hyu?ga clan members.


    The group consisted of two girls and one boy. If anyone who was familiar with the Naruto world they would immediately recognize two people in this group. The boy who is about 5-6 years old is the genius of the Hyu?ga clan, the son of Hizashi Hyu?ga, Neji Hyu?ga.


    Next to him was a young girl. If one were to describe in one word that would be ¡°a cute little rabbit ¡®. she held the hand of the other girl who is about the same age as Neji. This girl''s name is Hinata Hyu?ga, the eldest daughter of Hiashi Hyu?ga.


    Leading them was a girl who is about Neji¡¯s age. If Hinata could be considered innocent then this girl could be considered mature. Although that is quite ironic considering her age this is the impression she gives to anyone who meets her for the first time.


    As though sensing something the girl stoped and looked in a specific direction. Seeing her behaviour Neji asked puzzled, ¡°Is something the matter big sister? Why did you stop ¡°


    The girl shook her head and answered, ¡° it¡¯s nothing I just felt I sensed someone familiar ¡°. After turning around and looking at both of them in the eye she said, ¡°well enough that, remember why we came here. We came here to have fun. So for the rest of the day no need to keep up appearances. You can play at long as you want and of course eat as much as you want ¡°


    ¡° ¡°Ok big sister ¡° ¡° both Hinata and Neji nodded to her words.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 71

    Chapter 71


    ~ Hokage Office ~


    Tsunade looked at the squad captains who gathered in her office. Yes, her office. Although her coronation should be held tomorrow they didn¡¯t have the luxury to do that. So she directly kicked Hiruzen out of his office before he could pack his things.


    Fortunately, Tsunade didn¡¯t have time to inspect the drawers and hidden compartments in the office or she would have beaten Hiruzen black and blue just like how she would beat Jiraiya when she finds him doing something perverted.


    The old man may be the root cause of Jiraiya¡¯s pervertness.


    ¡°Is everything ready? This mission absolutely cannot fail no matter what ¡° Tsunade asked as she looked at them seriously.


    ¡°Yes, Hokage sama we have made sure everything is in order. ¡°Shikaku, who is appointed as the commander for this operation, said seriously.


    For this mission, Tsunade appointed four captains and one commander. The commander is Shikaku Nara while the five captains are Kakashi Hatake, Fugaku Uchiha, Hiashi Hyu?ga, and lastly Hiruzen Sarutobi. Each captain would lead 25 members making it a total of 100 members.


    Each captain has a specific task assigned to them. For example, team Hiashi is the scout who would locate the enemies. Then team Fugaku would lead the charge. Team Kakashi has the duty of capturing Danzo while team Hiruzen would have the duty of supporting them.


    Yes, the team that was assigned the task of capturing Danzo was left to Kakashi and his members of Team Ro and not to Hiruzen Tsunade didn¡¯t trust the old man not to let Danzo escape. So she ordered his team to become the mod cleaner so Kakashi and the others could do their job perfectly.


    ¡° That''s good. Ok men, I''m gonna say this once again. Your mission is to capture Danzo. Whether he is dead or alive does not matter. But try your best to bring him alive so he can face justice. And even if you killed him, be sure to bring back his head. We need that to prove our innocence.


    As for the Root ninjas, you can deal with them as you like. If they are beyond redemption then do us all a favor and deal with them before they become a nuisance in the future.


    Do any of you have any more questions? ¡° Tsunade asked as she let her gaze wander.


    Hiruzen wanted to ask whether he could take the task of capturing Danzo but he didn¡¯t dare to speak when he felt Tsunade¡¯s glare. He felt the world is unfair. How could his own students be this cruel to him?


    Seeing nobody have any other questions Tsunade nodded her head and said, ¡°Good now go. Bring victory to Konoha. ¡°


    ¡° Yes Hokage sama, ¡° everyone except Hiruzen said loudly. They knew the mission they are about to go on is more dangerous than fighting in any ninja wars as if they didn¡¯t complete this mission they wouldn¡¯t have a home to return to.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡® Hmm Ok. Capture both of them and hand them over to Tsunade. Tell her to interrogate them about how many secret passages Danzo has. Oh and before I forget crack that seal on their tongue before they could commit suicide. ¡® Izanami said as she finished her bowl.


    ¡® As you wish Matirach ¡® Nanami said as she went back to work. She needs to find some reasonable excuse to go into the Hokage Office without alerting anyone. She can¡¯t just dump two bodies in the Office and be done with that.


    After finishing her conversation with Nanami, Izanami fell into a bit of contemplation. She had this feeling that something terrible would happen soon.


    Deciding to trust her instincts, Izanami got up from her seat. She looked at Naruto apologetically and said, ¡° Sorry Naruto but I just remembered that I have some important work to do. So I would have to go now.


    You can go back home after spending enough time with your friends. ¡°


    ¡° Ahh, is it really that important?¡± Naruto asked dejectedly. He looked like an abandoned puppy.


    ¡° Yes it is really important so sorry, but don''t I promise you I will make up for it next time. ¡° Izanami said with a helpless smile.


    ¡° Ok, ¡° Naruto said with a bit of sadness. He then started to eat even faster to wash away this sadness.


    Giving Naruto another smile Izanami turned to Teuchi and said, ¡° Teuchi you can add the food these guys order to my account. ¡°


    ¡° Ok, lady Izanami. ¡° Teuchi said with a smile.


    If it was any other person Teuchi would argue with them to pay even if the person is the Hokage himself. But Izanami is a special guest who helped him greatly so Teuchi would naturally help her too.


    And with her work done Izanami worked out of the restaurant and disappeared into the crowd.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 72

    Chapter 72


    In the Land of Fire not far from Konohagakure in the shadows hundreds of ninjas surrounded a waterfall that seemed natural at first glance. But behind this waterfall is the secret base where Danzo Shimura, the true darkness of Konoha, is hiding.


    Hiashi, who is leading the scout team, signalled his men to completely map out the terrain. They cannot let Danzo escape from here so Shikaku ordered that no one would make a move until every exit is secured.


    After a few minutes Hiashi presented a small map to Shikaku. After glancing at it for a few times Shikaku swiftly divided everyone into a few teams to secure the exits. After all his men were in position Shikaku gave the order to attack.


    The Uchiha clan was the first to make a move as they attacked each entrance with their signature Great FireBall Jutsu. Behind them the Anbu ninjas were the second to move. They swiftly dealt with the Root members who were caught in the fire blast and advanced forward.


    Hiashi and his clan members were like guides as they walked through the enemy base like it was a walk in the park. Of course this is only possible because the Uchiha members were like war machines as they harvested the lives of every root member who came their way.


    But even the Uchiha clan paled in comparison when the two Anbu ninjas made their move. One was a silver haired man who had his signature lightning jutsu gathered in his hand while the other. A 13 year old kid who had his short swords at the ready while his Three Tomoe Sharingan spin like crazy.


    Both of them were like death gods as they killed many Root ninjas in a matter of seconds. The Root ninja squad captain who was brainwashed to be emotionless were terrified as they watched the duo kill off all his men.


    And before he could even move he too was killed by them in the next second. In last breath he only heard the chirping of a thousand birds.


    Shikaku who also saw this frowned as he contemplated, ¡® why are these two so active? I can understand kakashi somewhat but why is Itachi also this aggressive? Is he angry because of what Danzo did to the Uchiha clan? ¡®


    But after a few seconds he shook his head and thought, ¡® well it doesn¡¯t matter. As long as those two don¡¯t hinder the mission I shouldn¡¯t interfere. ¡®. After surveying the battlefield again Shikaku ordered,¡± Team Ro continue your advance and leave the rest to the third Hokage¡¯s team. ¡°


    He then turned to Inoichi and said, ¡° Make sure the other teams have continuous communication. We can¡¯t let Danzo get away by any of those exits. ¡°


    ¡° I know that¡¯s why I¡¯m constantly checking everyone every few seconds. ¡° Inoichi said with a serious expression.


    While Kakashi and the rest continued on the offensive he and the Yamanaka clan members are doing their best to keep the information network running. In this situation every second counts so as soon as one of them spotted Danzo the whole team would be there in a second to capture him.


    While Konoha ninjas were advancing at a rapid pace inside the base, Danzo, the owner of the hidden base was not having a good time.


    Danzo narrowed his eyes as he looked at the masked man with heightened vigilance. He recognized the uniform he was wearing, ¡°Akatsuki ¡° Danzo said with a grave tone. He still remembered the day he witnessed the true terror of that Uzumaki brat.


    And looking at the sharingan on his eye Danzo also released something else. ¡° You , you are the one who attacked Konoha by controlling the nine tails ¡°


    ¡° Yes, that¡¯s right. My name is Madara Uchiha it i who controlled the nine tails that day ¡° Obito said with an arrogant tone.


    Hearing his words Danzo grew even more warrier. He didn¡¯t know why this person came here but he knows that it isn¡¯t anything that would help him. Furthermore he may come here to take revenge on him for what he did to the Akatsuki in the past.


    ¡° Oh don¡¯t be afraid. I¡¯m not here to take revenge, in fact I¡¯m here to offer you a deal, ¡° Obito said with a cold smile that Danzo couldn¡¯t see because it was covered by his mask.


    Danzo narrowed his eyes but he still lowered his weapon. He looked at Obito and said, ¡° I¡¯m listening. ¡°


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 73

    Chapter 73


    ¡° We have found Danzo¡¯s chakra signature. He is at a distance of 100 meters. ¡° one of the Hyuuga members said as he spotted Danzo¡¯¡¯s chakra signature up ahead.


    ¡°Everyone speed up. Leave these men to the third Hokage¡¯s team ¡° Kakashi ordered as rushed toward the direction the sensor ninja pointed.


    Behind him, all the members of the team Ro advanced. They even ignored the root members who they were fighting a moment ago. Fortunately, Hiruzen¡¯s team was there to cover them or the root ninjas may go to court for being abandoned suddenly.


    ¡° He is over there, ¡° the sensory ninja said as he pointed to a corridor. Looking at that direction Itachi did some hand signs and shouted, ¡° Fire Style Fire Dragon Flame ¡°


    A torrent of flames came out of Itachi¡¯s mouth. The flames completely lit up the dark corridor. The flames destroyed everything in their path.


    ¡°Wind Style violent whirlwind ¡°a gloomy voice was heard. A massive whirlwind came rushing at the firestorm and canceling each other.


    ¡° Everyone gets into position, the target has arrived, ¡° Kakashi ordered as he looked at Danzo who was coming towards them.


    ¡° Danzo you have been surrounded. It is in your best interest if you come with us without any resistance. ¡° Although Kakashi said this, even he didn¡¯t believe Danzo would agree to do this. And even if the off chance he agreed Kakashi would still attack him.


    For cornering his father into committing suicide Danzo must pay the price. So even if he couldn¡¯t kill him Kakashi would still cut a limb or two as revenge.


    ¡°Heh, who do you think you are brat? I am Danzo Shimura who gave you the courage to speak to me like this ¡° Danzo sneered at the audacity of these people. He is someone who could fight Hriuzen on equal terms. How dare they think of arresting him.


    ¡°Wind style: Vacuum blade ¡° Danzo shouted as he attacked.


    ¡°Earth style: earth wall ¡° two of the Anbu ninjas shouted in unison as they blocked the wind blades.


    ¡° water style: hydro blast ¡° another Anbu ninja shouted as he attacked Danzo at the same time to catch him off guard.


    Unfortunately, Danzo was a war veteran so he won''t go down that easily. ¡°Summoning Jutsu ¡°.


    A huge cloud of smoke erupted as Danzo¡¯s summoning beast Baku appeared. Due to his large size the roof of the secret cave was destroyed and rocks fell down towards the Anbu ninja.


    ¡° Wood Style: Wood Shield ¡° Yamato quickly did some hand signs and made a huge shield to protect them from the falling debris.


    ¡° Baku kill them ¡° Danzo ordered as he prepared to leave. With Baku, he could escape this place.


    ¡° earth style: rock bullet ¡°


    ¡°Wood style: great forest technique ¡°


    Numerous attacks came down on Danzo. Seeing no place to dodge, Danzo decided to defend. Danzo¡¯s right arm became a gigantic tree and blocked all the attacks that were aimed at him.


    While they were fighting Nanami and the youkai members who were still hiding in the shadows frowned looking at Danzo. Although it was subtle they could feel Danzo had changed. From what they have gathered Danzo isn¡¯t a person who would go on a frontal attack like this.


    He is like a poisonous coward who would only dare to take action himself if he had 100% confidence his plan would succeed. But Nanami is so puzzled by how he has the confidence to defeat the elite Anbu ninja team by himself.


    What¡¯s more, destroying his chance to escape is really worth it for just two Mangekyou eyes. No matter how you look at it, it really isn¡¯t worth it.


    Forget about getting the Mangekyou, can he even implant them in such a short amount of time? If he decided to implant one in his other eye he would simply die of chakra exhaustion as there is no seal to temporarily close it like what Kakashi does.


    ¡® what is this guy planning ¡® Nanami thought with a grim expression. It is at these times she really wishes she had Izanami¡¯s ability to predict what a person thinks.


    After all, if they don¡¯t know the situation clearly they couldn¡¯t possibly spring into action. Japan is hidden from the rest of the world for a reason. A person like Danzo should not be allowed to know of its existence unless he dies.


    And from the looks of it, he has absolute confidence to escape from this situation. And Nanami wanted to know how he was going to do that.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 74

    Chapter 74


    In the end, Nanami finally understood a part where Danzo got his confidence. From the beginning to the end, he didn¡¯t use Izanagi. So his escape method should be the same as what Uchiha Madara used.


    After finding this the situation made more sense to Nanami. If he is able to fake his own death then he could lay low for a few years and rebuild his own army so he could take revenge again.


    ¡° What are your orders madam? ¡° one of the Yokai members asked as they looked at Nanami.


    Nanami thought about it before saying, ¡°Let¡¯s go and take everything Danzo has stored in this base. That way even if he escapes from Konoha he would be crippled without any funds or equipment to start his revenge plan.


    ¡°But before that let¡¯s finish this boring fight. Injure him as much as you like, Oh, and don¡¯t forget to put the tracker on him ¡° Nanami said with a cold smile.


    ¡°As you wish lady Nanami ¡°The Yokai members nodded as one of them began to grow small into the size of an ant. Then another began to dissolve into a mist.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    On the battlefield, the fight was at its peak. Although Danzo had not fought recently his experience and straight was not something to be underestimated. And Dnzo, who has the habit of wanting to know everything, has enough information about Team Ro.


    So even when he is surrounded by them he isn''t suppressed. The only thing slowing him down is his chakra capacity. Not everyone is like Naruto who could make thousands of shadow clones at once and remake them again after they were defeated.


    And since they were continuously fighting for at least half an hour Danzo was running very low on Chakra. So apart from the wind blades, he didn''t have enough chakra to use anymore jutsus.


    Just like how Danzo knew he was at his limit, Kakashi and the others also knew this fact. So they began to attack more aggressively.


    Just as everything was at a stalemate Danzo suddenly felt his body become more sluggish as time went by.


    .


    .


    ¡°This is getting more complicated than I thought ¡° Izanami muttered as she felt a headache coming over. She leaned on the tree and closed her eyes to think about the situation more clearly.


    She came here to ensure Nanami and the others'' safety. Danzo can be considered the next best person after Orochimaru in terms of planning. So who knows what kind of traps he may set up?


    So just in case she arrived here sat on top of a big tree where she could access the secret base immediately when necessary. With her observation Haki all over the place nothing could escape her notice.


    And although she expected it she was really surprised that Obito would go out of his way to create an escape path for Danzo. This made her plans a bit complicated. Should she let him live so he would go for the Uchiha massacre which would allow her to bring the whole Uchiha clan to Japan or should she kill him now so he won¡¯t be a bother in the future?


    She did put a seal on Shisui¡¯s stolen eye so she could make sure his death was done swiftly.


    But she also wants to see whether Itachi would go down the path of clan slayer even after all of this. With Tsunade as the Hokage, she doubted she would issue such an order as Hiruzen would.


    ¡° Well, let¡¯s just let fate take its course for now. ¡°Izanami said as she finally decided to do nothing. If she met Danzo in the future he would die and the Uchiha would be staying with Konoha.


    And she is quite curious about what Nanami will do to Danzo when this whole mess is over. That girl put a tracker on him for a reason after all.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 75

    Chapter 75


    ¡°We have succeeded in our mission Hokage sama ¡° Kakashi and his team Ro knelt down as they presented the scroll containing Danzo¡¯s dead body. As soon as they finished storing Danzo¡¯s body they rushed here as soon as possible. So a few of them still had blood flowing on their fresh wounds.


    Tsunade tried her best to stop herself from fainting from the hemophobia. Although izanami helped her suppress it during her stay in japan she is still not cured fully as she would try to faint from time to time after seeing blood. According to izanami, unless she has a very good catalyst, she would be like this for the next 10 years.


    ¡°Good , you all take a good rest. I will inform others about the success of the mission. I will give out rewards for your contribution tomorrow after we stop this meaningless war. ¡° Tsunade said as she confirmed Danzo¡¯s body.


    Now with the Daimyo as the witness she could finally stop this farce Izanami started. After that she would have to do damage control due to the problems Danzo has caused due to his many crimes.


    ¡®Uggh why did i have to accept this position, There is nothing but work for me to do all day. Except for a workaholic no one would want this damn position. ¡® Tsunade grumbled inwardly.


    ¡° Shizune send someone to call for the Daimyo and Izanami. We can finally stop this foolish war. ¡° Tsunade said as she looked at Shizune, her unofficial secretary.


    ¡°Yes Tsunade sama ¡° Shizune nodded as she went to find someone to relay Tsunade¡¯s message.


    ¡°No need I¡¯m already here ¡° but before Shizune could leave the room Izanami came inside. After disarming the explosion traps, Black Zetsu set up secretly behind Obito¡¯s back, Izanami came here directly. That bastard wanted to cause more chaos by killing many elite ninjas at once.


    It was at these times izanami wondered whether Obito really had no brains. I mean that bastard didn¡¯t even hide the fact he was acting on his own.


    ¡® sigh Uchiha are really so narrow minded that they cannot even understand the obvious ¡® Izanami thought with a sigh. This is something she had to begrudgingly agree with Black Zetsu. They are too easy to deceive.


    ¡° Did you put a bug in my office? ¡° Tsunade asked with a raised eyebrow. The timing is too perfect for it to be a coincidence.


    ¡°Woah there calm your horses . I didn¡¯t put a bug in your office, I just came when I sensed Kakashi and his team coming back to the village, ¡° Izanami said immediately. ¡® And besides if I really want to hear or see what you are doing in your office all I have to do is use my Observation Haki. In the whole village there is no place where my observation haki cannot cover. ¡® she thought internally.


    ¡° I see, ¡° Tsunade said but her eyes still held a bit of suspicion. Izanami could only smile wryly at this, why can¡¯t anyone take her words at face value. Is she that untrustworthy?


    If anyone in Japan were to hear this they would unanimously say ¡° yes ¡°. when it comes to shamelessness if izanami were to say she is second no one would dare say they are first. Her shamelessness so much that even when she is caught doing something she would not admit it even against the evidence.


    ¡°But it¡¯s so boooring ¡° Naruto complained as he gave his puppy dog eyes to try to win over Izanami.


    ¡° Sigh well If you are that bored then there is one other way you could train ¡° Izanami said as she remembered something Ashura would do when they were young.


    ¡° You won''t beat me like last time, right ¡° Naruto asked fearfully as he remembered what happened last when he slept during meditation. Izanami made him fight her for hours straight.


    ¡° No it¡¯s not like that ¡° Izanami said as she got up from her seat.


    ¡°Try to follow my movements as much as you could, ¡° Izanami said as she began to do a dance every avatar fan would know. The moves she was using are the moves you would need to practise bending styles.


    If there were some special effects like water, fire, earth and air then they could say they are the avatar.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 76

    Chapter 76


    While Naruto and Izanami were doing their exercises, Tsunade, Shizune, Tengen, and Shisui looked at them with a weird look. It¡¯s just to them what those two were doing seemed to be a weird dance.


    ¡° Do you know what those two are doing? ¡°Tsunade asked as she turned to Nanami.


    Nanami shook her head and said, ¡° yes, although I haven¡¯t seen that exercise I could somewhat guess what it would do. ¡°. With her enhanced senses she could feel the chakra slowly being guided into their chakra points.


    ¡°They are opening the chakra points in their bodies. Normally chakra points would open as someone aged with their continuous use of chakra. But with that exercise, the process is being done at a faster pace. ¡° Nanami explained.


    ¡°But isn¡¯t forcibly opening chakra points a dangerous thing? If one were to damage their chakra points they would be forced to stop using chakra their whole lives. ¡° Tsunade said as she frowned. As a medical ninja, she knew how delicate a chakra point is.


    The chakra path is like a circuit. If one place is damaged the whole body would not be able to use the chakra paths again. And if you try to force it you would be having so much internal damage that you would be at death¡¯s door in a matter of minutes.


    And apart from the most experienced Hyuga, no one would dare try to mess with their chakra points.


    ¡° You are not wrong but not correct either. Although chakra points are a delicate thing, they are also very flexible. What Izanami is doing is guiding the spiritual and physical energy inside of Naruto to flow in a way that they would mix automatically and be released from the body after going through the chakra points. She is making his body remember the feel of gathering chakra. ¡° Kaguya who was lazing on the sofa explained in a lazy tone.


    That exercise is something Ashura found out when he was still learning hand seals. According to him, he wanted to make it look more cool. Although his experiment ended with failure he inadvertently managed to create a very interesting way to refine chakra.


    Others hearing Kaguya¡¯s words were stunned. Isn¡¯t this exercise something very valuable? Children no longer needed to force themselves to meditate every day for a long time. With this exercise, they could refine chakra at a faster speed with full concentration.


    ¡° Whoever found this method is a genius, ¡° Shisui said, making not only Kaguya but even Izanami, who was eavesdropping on their conversation almost trip.


    ¡®Well he was a genius whose test scores were way lower than Obito when he was a kid ¡® Izanami thought as she remembered the day Ashura was just a foolish kid.


    Although she didn¡¯t know whether it was fate but every Ashura reincarnation is very stupid in their childhood. And when she meant stupid she meant the kind who would rather run around and fight than read a book.


    They never change that habit until they are old. Izanami tried it and still didn¡¯t get any positive results.


    This is why when Naruto asked for another method to train Izanami didn¡¯t argue with him. She knew this guy would not change his habits even if she beat him till he was half dead.


    ¡°Should I use wooden swords too? ¡° Tengen asked as he looked at Izanami¡¯s wooden sword.


    ¡°No, don''t bother. Come at me with your usual swords. Since those are something you are most familiar with, your true fighting style can only be brought out when you are using them, ¡° Izanami explained as she did some practice swings.


    ¡°Yes lady Izanami ¡° Tengen nodded as she sheathed his twin blades. His weapons were two gigantic Nichirin cleavers that were amber in color. The blades each have a notch in the cutting edge and are held together by a metal chain, making it very reminiscent of nunchucks.


    ¡°Oh remember not to hold back, ¡° Izanami said as she gave a smile that was filled with coldness to Tengen. She knew Tengen is someone who liked to show off so he would first go easy and then gradually strengthen his attacks. He is the type of person who wants the other party to realize that he is getting stronger during the fight.


    Well during a fight that may be a good move as it would allow you to catch the opponent off guard. But now since we are just training, this time hobby shouldn¡¯t be allowed at all.


    Tengen shivered and nodded repeatedly, ¡° I will definitely give it my all Lady Izanami, ¡° he said almost immediately.


    ¡°Here I come, ¡°Tenegen said as he dashed towards Izanami in a flash. He wielded his blades and was about to behead Izanami in a matter of a second.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 77

    Chapter 77


    Facing the blades that were nearing her neck Izanami showed no panic. She calmly lowered her center of gravity and crouched down a little. The blade passed away harmlessly. Izanami then swung her wooden sword hitting Tengen in the abdomen.


    Due to Izanami using a bit more strength than usual, Tenegen was blown away. He took a few steps back while holding his abdomen in pain. His heart was very shaken at this moment.


    Although he knew Izanami was a great master swordsman he never expected he would be defeated in one blow. If Izanami¡¯s sword was a real one then he would be split in half.


    ¡°You are using too much of your concentration on your first move. Due to this, your focus is lost resulting in you being in a perfect state to be ambushed. ¡° Izanami said as instructed Tengen of his weakness.


    ¡° Instead of that, you could do this. While you are attacking with a blade to the head, use the other to block any attacks coming from below. You could also attack the top and bottom at the same time to make up for your weakness, ¡° Izanami then added her suggestion. As a twin sword user herself, Izanami knew how to deal with these situations.


    ¡° I see, ¡° Tengen said as he took a deep breath to prepare himself again. He then narrowed his eyes and attacked Izanami again. But this time he used his twin swords to attack from the top and bottom at the same time. Just like how Izanami instructed him to do.


    ¡° Good, ¡° Izanami said as she blocked one sword while sidestepping to evade the other. Then she used that momentum to deliver a roundhouse kick. The kick connected and Tengen once again was blown away. ¡° Don¡¯t stop and wait for your opponent. Connect every move with each other leaving no gaps for your opennet to respond. ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Tengen again.


    Tengen nodded and got to his feet again. He then once again dashed towards Izanami. This time instead of aiming for the head he aimed his sword at Izanami¡¯s side. Izanami easily blocked the sword but then she suddenly had to push that sword away and jump to the side as Tengen swung his other sword at her head.


    After that Tenegen turned to the side and swung his sword at Izanami again like it was a nunchuck.


    Izanami crouched down and swung her sword at Tengen''s feet. Tengen seemed to have predicted this as he jumped while rotating so his sword would once again attack Izanami.


    Izanami used her sword as a jumping pole and adjusted her center of gravity to bring her whole body up. While doing so she didn¡¯t forget to deliver a kick to Tenegen since his face is at her strike range.


    Tengen hastily used his other sword to block but he was still pushed away taking a few steps back. This action destroyed the flow he kept. And due to this Izanami had enough time to take her distance.


    ¡° Impressive. Although you still lack some experience your skills are able to cover that shortcoming. And if you manage to improve your defense and parry you may just become the best twin swordsman I have seen after me. ¡° Izanami said with a smile. This was high praise coming from her.


    Tengen is truly a genius. She only needs to point out his mistake once and he will do his best to correct it in the next minute. His only shortcoming in swordsmanship is the lack of experience he would naturally gain over the next few years.


    While he was sweating buckets, Izanami didn¡¯t even break a sweat. He couldn¡¯t last a single minute with her. She just needed a single move or two to completely defeat him. And up to now, he has never seen her use her famous breathing style.


    Even that barrier is something anyone could do by compressing wind chakra to a higher degree. But even that single technique seemed to be as strong as a mountain.


    Tengen couldn¡¯t accept this reality. He as a genius cannot lose like this. That¡¯s why he used his fourth form to destroy that barrier. Although he couldn¡¯t see any cracks in the barrier he could feel it was barely hanging.


    And just when he was about to get an upper hand his body had to give up like this. This is something he cannot accept.


    ¡®I will break that barrier even if it is the last thing I do ¡®Tenegen thought as he ignored everything and began to increase his speed. His muscles burst and blood gusted out of his arms but despite this, Tengen refused to back down.


    And what felt like forever a cracking sound was heard. Then in an instant, Izanami¡¯s wind diety¡¯s armour broke no matter how many times she tried to reinforce it.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 Chapter 79

    Chapter 79


    ~Time Skip A Year later ~


    A year went by after the whole incident with the World Bank. The situation in Konoha returned back to its original calm.


    During this time period, Tsunade solidified her authority and made many changes. She, unlike Hiruzen, stopped the excessive monitoring of the Uchiha clan. She thought it was too cruel to do that to a founding clan just because of one person.


    Of course, the next day her office was invaded by the Konoha corrupt trio saying this was a wrong decision, and demanded Tsunade to take her order back. But like what Izanami liked to do she gave the trio the middle finger and said, ¡°I¡¯m the Hokage and my decision is final. If you bother me again I won''t mind digging up the old records of your corruption and publishing it. ¡°


    This stunned the trio so much that they almost stopped breathing. And before they could argue anymore Tsunade directly kicked them out of her office. She was done with dealings with these clowns.


    She had read the book Izanami wrote about a governess and understood that tolerating these guys and changing her orders because of the pressure would not help her in any way. If you are the ruler and you are confident in your judgement then don''t change it because of a third party.


    Although democracy is good and all that¡¯s only when you have a group of people who truly care for the country and its citizens. So unless you have such people you should trust your judgment and not change your orders even if you are seen as a tyrant.


    It is never a bad decision to do the right thing. Many regret their past choices after seeing the consequences of not doing what¡¯s right. In this case, Hiruzen and two friends don''t accept the Uchiha clan because of their personal reasons that have no logic behind them.


    And decides it isn¡¯t like she completely dropped the surveillance on them. There was still an Anbu ninja unit that would periodically monitor every clan for any abnormalities. It¡¯s just she didn¡¯t make it too obvious that the Uchiha clan is under heavy surveillance like what Hiruzen did.


    Also during her time she changed the school curriculum and made it so that the kids graduating from school would not be like Sakura who is only good at theory. She added many courses such as Medical ninjutsu and Fuinjutsu etc.


    She also created an after-class for grown-ups who wanted to learn medical ninjutsu to increase the medicals in the Konoha hospital. For this, she invited many retired medical ninjas as teachers.


    As for the budget for these classes, Tsunade found it by cutting off unnecessary spending such as monthly bonuses for elders mainly for three extremely old people. Could you believe that these guys would take twice their pay just to travel from their homes to the Hokage Office. What¡¯s more, they also include the health and loans to be paid off by the Konoha treasury.


    And if that isn¡¯t enough most of the money of the treasury is used to build towers to monitor the Uchiha clan. Tsunade had to use every bit of willpower to stop herself from running towards that trio and beating the shit out of them for wasting this much money on something so stupid.


    Even Izanami was speechless about this. But this also made sense after thinking about it. I mean how many ninjas do you need to send to monitor the whole Uchiha clan for 24 hours every day? And those guys are Anbu ninjas who have very high salaries due to taking high risks every day.


    For Izanami¡¯s side nothing changed, every day she would train Naruto and occasionally Tengen too. Under her guidance, Naruto managed to perfectly control his chakra.


    After freshening up, Izanami had breakfast with everyone. After that, she and Naruto walked out of the house and went in the direction where Ninja School. Although it is still early many people were on the road with their children in hand.


    Most of them are like Naruto and Izanami heading towards the Ninja school. And almost everyone had their faces full of smiles. For a kid, their journey starts today. So everyone is very excited.


    Well everyone except for the Nara clan children who think all this is a drag.


    After a few minutes of walking Izanami and Naruto arrived at the gate of the ninja school. Although there is at least an hour till the opening ceremony starts there are still many people here.


    ¡° Hey Naruto, you finally arrived, ¡° Choji said as he greeted Naruto when he saw him coming through the gate.


    ¡°Hey there Choji ¡°Naruto greeted him back with a smile. He then looked around and asked, ¡°Where are Shikamaru and Ino ¡°


    ¡°Oh those two are with our parents. Come on let me show you where they are, ¡°Choji said as he dragged Naruto with him.


    Izanami sighed as she followed them. She was quite bored since there was no one who she was familiar with. If she knew this was going to happen she should have come with Tsunade.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 79:School opening day

    79:School opening day


    ~Time Skip A Year later ~


    A year went by after the whole incident with the World Bank. The situation in Konoha returned back to its original calm.


    During this time period, Tsunade solidified her authority and made many changes. She, unlike Hiruzen, stopped the excessive monitoring of the Uchiha clan. She thought it was too cruel to do that to a founding clan just because of one person.


    Of course, the next day her office was invaded by the Konoha corrupt trio saying this was a wrong decision, and demanded Tsunade to take her order back. But like what Izanami liked to do she gave the trio the middle finger and said, ¡°I¡¯m the Hokage and my decision is final. If you bother me again I won''t mind digging up the old records of your corruption and publishing it. ¡°


    This stunned the trio so much that they almost stopped breathing. And before they could argue anymore Tsunade directly kicked them out of her office. She was done with dealings with these clowns.


    She had read the book Izanami wrote about a governess and understood that tolerating these guys and changing her orders because of the pressure would not help her in any way. If you are the ruler and you are confident in your judgement then don''t change it because of a third party.


    Although democracy is good and all that¡¯s only when you have a group of people who truly care for the country and its citizens. So unless you have such people you should trust your judgment and not change your orders even if you are seen as a tyrant.


    It is never a bad decision to do the right thing. Many regret their past choices after seeing the consequences of not doing what¡¯s right. In this case, Hiruzen and two friends don''t accept the Uchiha clan because of their personal reasons that have no logic behind them.


    And decides it isn¡¯t like she completely dropped the surveillance on them. There was still an Anbu ninja unit that would periodically monitor every clan for any abnormalities. It¡¯s just she didn¡¯t make it too obvious that the Uchiha clan is under heavy surveillance like what Hiruzen did.


    Also during her time she changed the school curriculum and made it so that the kids graduating from school would not be like Sakura who is only good at theory. She added many courses such as Medical ninjutsu and Fuinjutsu etc.


    She also created an after-class for grown-ups who wanted to learn medical ninjutsu to increase the medicals in the Konoha hospital. For this, she invited many retired medical ninjas as teachers.


    As for the budget for these classes, Tsunade found it by cutting off unnecessary spending such as monthly bonuses for elders mainly for three extremely old people. Could you believe that these guys would take twice their pay just to travel from their homes to the Hokage Office. What¡¯s more, they also include the health and loans to be paid off by the Konoha treasury.


    And if that isn¡¯t enough most of the money of the treasury is used to build towers to monitor the Uchiha clan. Tsunade had to use every bit of willpower to stop herself from running towards that trio and beating the shit out of them for wasting this much money on something so stupid.


    Even Izanami was speechless about this. But this also made sense after thinking about it. I mean how many ninjas do you need to send to monitor the whole Uchiha clan for 24 hours every day? And those guys are Anbu ninjas who have very high salaries due to taking high risks every day.


    For Izanami¡¯s side nothing changed, every day she would train Naruto and occasionally Tengen too. Under her guidance, Naruto managed to perfectly control his chakra.


    After freshening up, Izanami had breakfast with everyone. After that, she and Naruto walked out of the house and went in the direction where Ninja School. Although it is still early many people were on the road with their children in hand.


    Most of them are like Naruto and Izanami heading towards the Ninja school. And almost everyone had their faces full of smiles. For a kid, their journey starts today. So everyone is very excited.


    Well everyone except for the Nara clan children who think all this is a drag.


    After a few minutes of walking Izanami and Naruto arrived at the gate of the ninja school. Although there is at least an hour till the opening ceremony starts there are still many people here.


    ¡° Hey Naruto, you finally arrived, ¡° Choji said as he greeted Naruto when he saw him coming through the gate.


    ¡°Hey there Choji ¡°Naruto greeted him back with a smile. He then looked around and asked, ¡°Where are Shikamaru and Ino ¡°


    ¡°Oh those two are with our parents. Come on let me show you where they are, ¡°Choji said as he dragged Naruto with him.


    Izanami sighed as she followed them. She was quite bored since there was no one who she was familiar with. If she knew this was going to happen she should have come with Tsunade.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 80: I want to destroy that invisible boundary that separates the village and Uchiha

    80: I want to destroy that invisible boundary that separates the village and Uchiha


    ¡°...And with that, I welcome you future ninjas to our academy ¡°With those words Tsunade finished her opening speech. Everyone gave a round of applause for Tsunade.


    After Tsunade got down from the stage a teacher came up and began to announce the names of the children and their classes. While he was doing this Tsunade came near Izanami while making sure not to attract attention.


    ¡° Good speech, did you make it yourself or forced Shizune to make one for you? ¡° Izanami asked in a low voice. Since there are many people here saying bad things about the Hokage is not a good thing.


    ¡° No, I made it myself. ¡° Tsunade said as she shook her head. At first, she tried to slack off by letting Shizune prepare it but regretfully that girl was not very good at preparing speeches. So Tsunade had no choice but to do it herself.


    ¡°Well, the crowd loved it. They have been so used to hearing the boring one-hour-long Will of Fire speech for so many years that they seem to appreciate the change¡± Izanami said as she looked at the numerous parents praising Tsunade¡¯s speech.


    Tsunade didn''t know how to comment on that. Should she be glad for the praise or be mad at the fact that her speech is only good because the third Hokage never bothered to give a shorter speech?


    ¡°Oh right, did you contact Jiraiya? I thought he would come running here when he heard we were going to war, ¡° Izanami asked. As Konoha''s best spymaster, Jiraiya¡¯s information network is not something you can underestimate. So Izanami actually expected him to come running back to Konoha.


    But for some reason, she didn¡¯t see him even after waiting for a year. So that is why she asked Tsunade.


    Hearing Jiraiya¡¯s name, Tsunade immediately put on an angry expression. She also wanted to meet that bastard. While she was dealing with that boring paperwork every day that bastard was enjoying himself to the fullest.


    She has read one of his depraved novels that were released in the last few months. She knew perfectly well how he wrote his books.


    ¡°No, that bastard only sent some letters saying he is on a very important mission. I was just thinking of issuing him a direct order to return. That bastard has played around enough, ¡° Tsunade said.


    ¡° That¡¯s good. Tell him that if he doesn¡¯t arrive in two weeks he would be punished for ignoring the Hokage¡¯s order and be sentenced to do community service for a month. ¡° Izanami said as had an evil smile. She wanted to give that man a very harsh lesson for ignoring his duties as a godfather.


    Tsunade¡¯s eyes lit up as she heard Izanami¡¯s idea. She knew how torturous community service could get. In Konoha, the people who are sentenced to do or have the job of doing community service have a title. And that is ¡® Green ninjas ¡®. The ninjas would have to collect the garbage and clean the roads early in the morning.


    And the worst part of this job is that if you didn¡¯t do a good job you would be scolded very badly by the stupid Karens who have nothing to do every day. This is the perfect punishment for someone like Jiraiya.


    ¡°hehe I¡¯ll go do that immediately, ¡° Tsunade said with an evil smile as she dashed to her office immediately. She knew just how to trick Jiraiya into that punishment.


    ¡°Yes. In every village, the police department is a place where they would gather resentment no matter what they do. And that place is a Uchiha-only place made so that normal people throw their resentments at the Uchiha clan. ¡° Izanami explained.


    ¡°And the attitude of Uchiha made the problem even bigger, ¡° she also added. The Uchiha would never look away from a fight. They are too proud to bear any humiliation. So they would often pick fights with normal civilians who don¡¯t know when to shut up.


    ¡°So Kiyomi, tell me what is your opinion of the Uchiha clan? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at Kiyomi. Depending on her answer Izanami may have to change some plans she has made.


    Kiyomi thought about it before speaking, ¡° At first when I was just reborn I thought this is a stupid clan. You could clearly see that Konoha''s higher-ups are looking at them like beasts who would break from their cage at any time but despite understanding this they still wanted to prove themself.


    But as I grew up I began to understand why they still clung to the hope of being recognised. It was them who founded Konoha and they still were reluctant to abandon the safe haven they created. ¡° she passed before looking at Izanami dead in the eye and said, ¡° And I respect that so that is why I want to destroy that invisible boundary that separates the village and Uchiha. ¡°


    Izanami smiled as she said, ¡°Then I as your aunt will help you. And besides I really can¡¯t let one of my student¡¯s clan be isolated from the very village he created. ¡°


    Kiyomi smiled as she heard Izanami¡¯s words. Although she is reluctant to say it, she really couldn¡¯t convince the whole village higher-ups. Although she has her Mangekyou Sharingan that alone is not enough. She is sure that Tobirama guy has made some plans in case a rogue Mangekyou were ever to appear.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 81: When do you want to transfer the authority?

    81: When do you want to transfer the authority?


    After the teachers were done announcing the classes of each student they began to introduce the kids to their new classrooms. The parents were then asked to leave the school premises to start classes.


    After making sure Naruto was fine and hadn¡¯t forgotten anything, Izanami walked out of the school building. However, instead of heading back towards her house, she made her way to the Police Department.


    She needed to have a word with Fugaku. As for why she didn¡¯t head towards the Uchiha clan. Well, there seem to be some problems in the police department prompting him to go there early in the morning.


    After a few minutes of walking, she arrived at the police department. Unlike last time, when she was rudely treated, there was a stark contrast in her treatment this time. As soon as she stepped inside the building everyone who was idle straightened up.


    One of the captains even came by personally to ask for the reason for her visit. After hearing that she came here to meet Fugaku he guided her to his office without asking any other questions. While on the way, every passing Uchiha gave a small bow to Izanami as she passed by them.


    The Uchiha respect strength, and Izanami, who performed the Hyakki Yagyo? and successfully defeated every single opponent within the clan, is someone they deeply revere. In fact, if Izanami decided to run for the position of clan head, the Uchiha clan wouldn¡¯t necessarily oppose her. She might even have a strong chance of winning.


    As she arrived at Fugaku¡¯s office she dismissed the captain and knocked on the door twice. ¡°Come in ¡°Fugaku¡¯s voice came from the other side after a few seconds.


    Opening the door she saw Fugaku sitting in his chair while on his desk there were mountains of paperwork.


    ¡®Oh, it seems like even the Police department has to share the same fate as the Hokage. Maybe this is something Tobarama did to show them how much of a bother being a Hokage is ¡® Izanami thought.


    As far as she knows the Police department like the rest of the village hasn''t changed their old system since it was founded. So most of the things are still done by one person or a select few. This is also why the Hokage office was always filled with mountains of paperwork that needed his signature as every small thing wanted his approval.


    And from the looks of it, the police department is also the same. The police department has a certain autonomy in the village as they have the authority to arrest criminals and interrogate them without needing the Hokage¡¯s approval.


    It was due to this system that the Uchiha managed to secure the village and keep it from being harmed by any spies or criminals. While this system is good and all since there wouldn¡¯t be an issue keeping public security the downside in this system is that there would be two ruling parties.


    While Toborama didn¡¯t mind this as he had full confidence in Uchiha¡¯s impartialness Hiruzen and more specifically Danzo didn¡¯t like this. Since their goal was to take complete control over Konoha they saw the police department as a thorn in their side. That is why they thought of isolating the Uchiha clan so they wouldn¡¯t be able to grab any more power.


    After walking out of the police station she used her Observation haki to find where Tsunade is. Sensing her in the Hokage office, she decided on her next destination. She needs to have a permit to open an auction house in two weeks.


    That¡¯s right she is going to auction off her new rights as she has no use for it. And besides she is pretty sure only wealthy clans would have the ability to purchase these rights.


    So from two weeks from now on the police department would have many members from different clans. And if Tsunade were to do a perfect job, many team combinations like the Ino¨CShika¨CCho? would be born in the new police department.


    Thinking of the bright future, Izanami couldn¡¯t help but smile. She is very much expecting the changes that would happen in the future.


    ¡® Speaking of changes, I really need to tell Tsunade to install a new barrier. The Konoha barrier is too old and outdated. Maybe I should force Jiraiya to remodel the whole thing after he comes back, ¡® she thought while on her way to the Hokage office.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 82: A decision that affects the whole clan.

    82: A decision that affects the whole clan.


    ¡° Ok let me get this straight, you made a deal with Fugaku that in exchange for some of his rights as the Police head you will free him from 10% of his full debt


    And in two weeks, you will auction off these rights to any clan in Konoha. ¡° Tsunade asked in shock. Can money buy anything these days?


    The answer to that question is yes. There is nothing money can''t buy. It''s just a matter of what price.


    ¡° Yes, that''s exactly what happened. ¡° Izanami said, nodding her head in confirmation.


    ¡° Arrgg you know this is going to drop Konoha¡¯s reputation even more right ¡° Tsunade asked as he felt a headache coming.


    Even though it was a year Danzo''s actions are still negatively affecting Konoha. Ordinary people outside the village have been avoiding Konoha ninjas like a plague. This also meant that the mission requests had also dropped.


    ¡° Oh please, like ninja villages had any good reputation to begin with, ¡° Izanami scoffed as she replied. The number of ninjas from major villages committing crimes are too numerous.


    In the land of rain people used to run for their lives when they heard a ninja coming their way. And this situation is quite common in this world.


    Of course, if there were things like this happening in Japan then it would be Izanami who would deliver the punishment for those people. Although Ninja is an evil and dark job she would never let anyone from her village do stuff like this.


    That is her principle. And even if her actions led to a rebellion in the village she would still uphold her principle.


    ¡°Anyway, what is your motive in this anyway? Why bother going through all this to buy some rights and then auction them immediately? ¡° Tsunade asked changing the subject. She could tell Izanami was about to give her a long lecture if she kept talking about this subject.


    ¡°Well this is so those clans won¡¯t get too excited over this, ¡° Izanami said, making Tsunade raise one eyebrow.


    ¡°Oh please do explain, ¡°she said as she looked at her.


    ¡° Well, it¡¯s human nature to not value something we get for free. Let¡¯s take two kids as an example. If I were to give a poor kid and a rich kid a scholarship for free education, what do you think would happen? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at Tsunade with a frown.


    Tsunade thought about it and answered, ¡°The rich kid would not care much about it since he can pay for his studies himself. But the poor kid would use the money to its fullest and try his very best to learn everything. ¡°


    ¡°Yes, That''s right. The rich don''t need to work hard since he can always ask for more money from his parents but the poor kid on the other hand has no one to turn to so he would not waste the given opportunity.


    His friend shrugged his shoulders and said, ¡° I don¡¯t have a clue either. Maybe it is about the auction that is about to be held in two weeks. I think the clan leader was invited and he wanted to discuss who would go with him. ¡°


    ¡°You fool if it was because of that then why the hell would he also summon us. He would just have a meeting with the elders and decide who would participate with him ¡° his friend rebuked him immediately.


    ¡° hey I was just saying and don¡¯t curse me you bastard it was you who asked first, ¡° the man said as he glared at his friend.


    While they were arguing the door to the meeting room was opened and Fugaku, Itachi and Kiyomi walked inside the room. Everyone stopped what they were doing, stood up and waited in silence.


    After Fugaku sat down everyone followed suit and got seated. Fugaku inspected the room and asked, ¡°Is everyone here ¡°


    ¡°Yes patriarch apart from the ones who are tasked with long-term missions everyone else here ¡° an elder stood up and replied.


    Fugaku, hearing this, nodded and signalled the elder to sit down. After that, he looked at everyone and said, ¡° First of all I am thankful you all came to this meeting despite it being held on short notice.


    The reason I called you here is because we need to make a decision that affects the whole clan. ¡°


    Hearing his words everyone had a serious expression. Although they may fight amongst each other as factions they would unite when it comes to the survival of the clan.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 83: Sorry about it, I just had to teach some idiots what reality is

    83: Sorry about it, I just had to teach some idiots what reality is


    ¡° What is this decision, clan head? ¡° asked one of the great elders as he looked at Fugaku with a cold gaze that is typical for a Uchiha.


    ¡° I take it everyone has heard about the upcoming auction that the World Bank is hosting, ¡° Fugaku asked to which everyone nodded. Unless they are living under a rock, everyone in Konoha knows about that auction.


    ¡° Do you know that in that auction there is a mysterious item that would be only known after the auction starts? ¡° Fugaku asked, to which everyone nodded again.


    "Well, you see, that mysterious item is the right the police head holds to recruit more men into the police department," Fugaku said, dropping a bombshell on everyone in the room.


    The soon suddenly got noisy as many elders stood up in shock, ¡° Fugaku explain yourself now ¡°one of the old grand elders shouted as he looked at Fugaku with a gloomy look.


    ¡°Yes, patriarch, please explain the situation to us, ¡° even one of the elders from Fugaku¡¯s faction also said. Even if they belong to the same faction they couldn¡¯t allow such a decision since it affects the clan as a whole.


    ¡°Explain yourself, patriarch, ¡° Many elders and clan members said as they began to get restless. The police department was always something Uchiha owned so many were protesting.


    ¡° Calm down ¡° Fugaku ordered as he activated his Mangekyou Sharingan. He knew if he wanted to make all of them agree then he needed to go all out.


    Seeing the Mangekyou pattern in Fugaku¡¯s eyes, everyone who was making a scene was shocked. Especially the hardliners who were the most unreasonable.


    ¡°Father, ¡° Itachi softly said as he looked at his father with a complex expression. As a person who had the Mangekyou Sharingan, he knew how broken one must be to awaken it. He himself awakened his when Shisui committed suicide in front of him.


    ¡°Fugaku, when did you awaken the Mangekyou? ¡° a grand elder asked as he looked at Fugaku with excitement. The clan had no idea how to awaken the Magekyou sharingan as Madara had taken away everything known record about it. They only know that after awakening the Mangekyou sharingan they could control the nine tails.


    And for hardliners who wanted to throw a rebellion, controlling the nine tails was crucial. So that is why the grand elder was very excited about it. Although Danzo was not causing trouble for them, the hardliners are still unhappy with the treatment they are getting from the villagers.


    ¡°Since the third ninja war, ¡° Fugaku said after some hesitation. He knew what was about to come next so he had to remove the bud before it could bloom any further.


    ¡°Hahahaha wonderful, the clan finally had given birth to a Mangekyou Sharingan user. With this we no longer need to fear and take back what is rightfully ours. ¡° the elder laughed maniacally as his sharingan shone with insanity.


    After all, the Mangekyou Sharingan which was said to be a legend seemed to be a very common thing for these young people who are considered geniuses.


    ¡°Kiyomi, that is enough, release the great elder from your genjutsu, we are still in the meeting place, ¡° Fugaku said as he looked at his daughter. He knew that his daughter is a genius more monstrous than his first son. But even he didn¡¯t expect her to awaken the Mangekyou Sharingan.


    But despite his shock, he wanted to stop her. Although the great elder¡¯s behavior disgusted him he was still a great elder. And the other elders wouldn¡¯t sit still if she went too far. So he had to use his aura to calm her down.


    Kiyomi hearing her father¡¯s words looked at him and unconsciously released her aura that terrifies everyone present. Although it may not look like it, Kiyomi could be said to be the one who understands the Mangekyou Sharingan best as she had her own eternal Mangekyou in the past.


    And so her handling of Mangekyou Sharingan was far greater than Fugaku so when the clash of aura started he lost very badly. Fortunately, Kiyomi stopped releasing her aura as if not Fugaku would have to get serious and that may accelerate his upcoming blindness.


    ¡°Sorry about it, I just had to teach some idiots what reality is ¡° Kiyomi said as she turned off her sharingan.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 84: Should ask Kiyomi to do this often in future meetings

    84: Should ask Kiyomi to do this often in future meetings


    Although Kiyomi was still insulting the great elders no one dared to reprimand her. They saw the horror of her Mangekyou Sharingan as she trapped the great elder into a genjutsu. The great elder couldn¡¯t even resist as he was helpless against her.


    What greatly made them fear her the most was how she managed to win over Fugaku. They all saw that in that clash of aura, Fugaku lost miserably like how the great elder did. And Fugaku as the clan leader is the strongest of them all. So if she managed to defeat him wouldn¡¯t that mean she is much stronger than him?


    ¡° Coming back to the topic at hand I have many reasons to sell those rights as this is the best outcome for the village. ¡° Fugaku said as he decided to not bother with Kiyomi anymore.


    ¡° Firstly we are short-staffed and due to this many of our clan members were overworked. ¡° Fugaku began his explanation. Although the police department is handled by the Uchiha clan not everyone can become a part of it.


    The basic requirement for one to join the police department is at least have the rank of chunin. Otherwise, the whole department would be flooded with people who only have the rank of gennin. After all, why should they go out and do missions while risking their own life when you could just join the police department?


    ¡°Secondly, due to the police department having solely Uchiha clan members, the clan has gotten more and more negative reputation. It has been affecting our family businesses. And if this went on those businesses would go bankrupt. ¡° Fugaku stated.


    Hearing this, many Uchiha clan members clenched their fists. This is the ugly truth everyone was purposely avoiding. At first, things were not that serious but after the nine-tails incident things went downhill.


    ¡° And the third and last reason is because of the deal I made with Lady Izanami, ¡° Fugaku said, surprising everyone. They didn''t expect that.


    ¡° As you all may already be aware, we are currently very tight on our finances because of the amount of debt we are paying to the World Bank.


    And with our family businesses are no longer able to earn enough to pay that amount. So that is why Lady Izanami proposed this idea one year ago.


    If our family businesses are suffering huge losses every year due to the negative impact the police department has then we would have to sell the rights to the World Bank and they would buy these rights in exchange for 10% of our total debt. ¡° Fugaku finished his explanation.


    Many clan members had various reactions to this. Some were nodding in agreement while some were very dissatisfied. The most dissatisfied were the elders who belonged to the hawk faction.


    But despite their dissatisfaction, they didn''t argue back. Everyone who isn''t a fool could see that Izanami was giving them a favor.


    ¡°Good since we all came to an agreement let¡¯s go into the next subject. Who amongst you would volunteer to protect the auction house next week? They have asked for at least fifty personnel. ¡° Fugaku said as he ignored the disbelieving looks from the rest of the clan members. He knew if it wasn¡¯t for Kiyomi scaring the shit out of these guys they would argue with other for the next few days without arriving at a decision.


    So when his daughter made his work easy why should ignore her help and complicate things? No one likes to work overtime after all.


    With that, the meeting went on for the next 2 or 3 hours. During the whole meeting, the clan members felt their whole worldview change as they finally realized how shameless a clan leader could be.


    Since the elders were still too scared to show any opposition he changed many old rules that were unchanged due to the old geezers refusing to change. Of course, Fugaku kept the changes to a minimum since even he didn¡¯t dare to push his luck too much and face a backlash afterward. After all, who knows whether these old geezers may get too angry and go insane.


    ¡®Should ask Kiyomi to do this often in future meetings ¡® Fugaku thought as he pondered this very seriously.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 85: Are you up to the challenge

    85: Are you up to the challenge


    Although Fugaku was tempted, he ultimately decided against it. He knew that would only bring more disaster in the future. After all, what if a decision that they made would harm the clan in the future? If that happened those guys would be all over his head blaming them for everything. So Fugaku decided that unless it is a very important decision they would not use this method.


    ¡° Good work out there Kiyomi, ¡° Fugaku said as he looked at his eldest daughter with a smile.


    ¡° Hn ¡° Kiyomi nodded with the iconic Uchiha sound.


    Fugaku then looked at her daughter and after hesitating for a bit asked, ¡° When did you awaken your Mangekyou Sharingan Kiyomi¡±. Usually, Fugaku wouldn''t ask such a question since it isn''t polite for a person to ask this. But as a father, he was very curious and worried.


    For a Uchiha to awaken the Mangekyou Sharingan he or she must go through intense emotional moments. One can say that they must come close to having their mind completely broken.


    One can say that only mentally unstable people could hold the Mangekyou Sharingan. This is why Tobirama said those who awaken the Mangekyou are dangerous as they always have extreme reactions.


    And Fugaku has never found his daughter in such a state so he was worried about it. Even though he may not look like it he always tries his best to be the best father to his children. It¡¯s just that his parenting methods can be very unique.


    To teach his first son about the cruelty of war he brought him to the battlefield. Fugaku wanted his son to understand the consequences of his actions if he ever became clan leader and be swayed to form a rebellion against the Leaf Village.


    For Sasuke, he always gave him the cold shoulder due to him getting very arrogant for the simplest compliment. Fugaku understood that if his second son could keep his pride in check then he was a true monster much greater than his older brother. This was shown when Sasuke managed to outclass his brother in the range of his fireball jutsu after some hard work.


    Kiyomi thought about it before answering ¡°Hmm I think I accidentally awakened it when I was three or maybe it was five, I don¡¯t really remember since it was a long time ago ¡°.


    Hearing her words Fugaku and Itachi who was eavesdropping on their conversation almost tripped and fell. Both of them looked at Kiyomi and thought, ¡®What the hell do you mean you accidentally awakened your Mangekyou? The Mangekyou Sharingan isn¡¯t something like a fruit that someone could pluck at any moment. And how the hell did you awaken them at such a young age? ¡®


    Although they both wanted to scream out their frustrations they were a little scared to voice them out. You know the longer you have your Mangekyou the stronger one gets as it would take a long time for one to master it to the fullest. This is true as Itachi despite having the Mangekyou Sharingan didn¡¯t think he is a match for his father much less his elder sister.


    They had enough time to familiarise themselves with the Mangekyou Sharingan to use it optimally while he would just go blind after using his for a few times. This is also the reason why Sasuke was the fastest person to go blind after getting his Mangekyou Sharingan. He clearly didn¡¯t have the patience or time to slowly master his new powers and only used the Mangekyou in such a crude way he was out of juice in no time.


    If Madara was like him then the warring states would be over much sooner as Hashirama would have no problem defeating a blind Madara.


    Izanami just smiled at her and didn¡¯t answer her question. This made Nono even more anxious. She knew the person in front of her was a very big shot who could make wars happen in days.


    So she was very cautious and afraid of what this person wanted when she arrived at the orphanage doorsteps. But unexpectedly Izanami said she was here to offer her a job opportunity to be the host of the auction house. And what¡¯s more the salary she is about to receive is astronomical.


    But although Nono was very happy about it, she was also very anxious about the reason why she was offered such a job. Nothing comes for free in this world she knew that better than anyone.


    ¡° Well, you see I have heard about how good of a caretaker you are. Although you have limited funds you still use them to take good care of the children without sparing any expense.


    I greatly admire that about you. But you see I don¡¯t have a habit of giving charity. In my book giving away charity is just wasting someone¡¯s determination to strive further. After all, if you can get charity every day, why waste effort working?


    So that is why I decided to come up with this proposal. So what do you think, are you up to the challenge? ¡° Izanami said with a meaningful smile.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 86: Can I go with you

    86: Can I go with you


    Izanami hummed a tune as she walked out of the orphanage. She was in a very good mood since she managed to make Nono agree to her proposal.


    Truth be told the real reason she wanted to help Nono was actually very simple. Nono reminded Izanami of herself. She too cared for her children deeply even if they had no blood connection to her.


    And what¡¯s more, Izanami felt that Nono was a very pitiful character. Had it not for Danzo screwing things up she would still be living a happy life with Kabuto and the rest of the kids.


    ¡®Speaking of Danzo I wonder what that guy is up to these days. The last time I heard about him he was near the Land of Rain. Did he go to Amagakure to seek shelter from Hanzo? Well, I doubt he would come alive if he actually went there. Nagato¡¯s surveillance technique is quite ingenuous if I say so myself. ¡® Izanami thought as she took her smartphone to check whether her guess was correct.


    After a while, her expression turned strange as put away her phone. She didn¡¯t what to say after reading the latest information the youkai members got on Danzo.


    It turns out that Danzo somehow managed to secure a base of operations in the Land of Wind near the borders Land of Rain. And he was now in the process of making a new ninja village similar to how Orochimaru was doing.


    In fact, calling it a ninja village is wrong as it looked like a cult at first glance. Danzo seemed be wanting to create a batch of death warriors as he began to brainwash some poor civilians to start a cult.


    Every now and then he would select some talented people and brand them with the curse seal. And of course, he also gave them some good training manuals that would allow him to train his army. As for the funds to run this cult he seemed to use the nearby mine that he found and purposely kept it secret from the village.


    ¡® Should I give away Danzo¡¯s location to Nagato? ¡® Izanami thought seriously. She didn¡¯t expect Danzo would go this path. She thought he would go into hiding in one of his bases while trying to increase his influence through the remaining root ninjas.


    After all, this is his usual way of doing things. That bastard is the person who wants to use his tools to do everything for him. She never expected him to be this active.


    Of course, she didn¡¯t fear Danzo as she could kill him with her eyes closed. What she is worried is about the civilians who would be brainwashed into doing his dirty work. Although she isn¡¯t a saint she didn¡¯t want innocents to get caught up in this.


    After thinking for a bit she decided to let Shisui go there. That guy has been very idle these days. So it''s time he does some exercise every very often. And this would be a good mission for him.


    His Eternal Mangekyou abilities are quite suitable for this. After all, now he could use Kotoamatsukami without any cooldown. In addition, he also has another new ability which is quite similar to Aizen¡¯s Kyo?ka Suigetsu.


    ¡°No, I know they would finally talk to me. ¡°Naruto said stubbornly as he shook his head.


    ¡°Anyway big sis is it true that you will be opening a new auction house next week? ¡°Naruto asked curiously as he looked at Izanami.


    ¡°Yes I originally wanted to rent an existing auction house but who knew the great Konoha doesn¡¯t have an auction house. So I had no choice but to build one myself ¡°Izanami sighed.


    Building that auction house wasn¡¯t cheap. She had to issue a huge commission to Yamato so he could build the building with his wood release. Originally he wanted to reject the mission as he had never built a building with a complex design like the one Izanami wanted but money does make wonders. After she directly doubled the price that guy finished the whole construction work in less than two days without any rest.


    ¡°Hey, Big sis Izanami I was just wondering can I also come with you when the auction house is opened. ¡° Naruto asked shyly.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 87: So you want to go to the auction?

    87: So you want to go to the auction?


    Although going to the auction house has no age limits, usually adults don¡¯t really bring any children with them. Especially to an auction that might affect the whole village.


    So the little children of these invited people are expressing their jealousy these days. After all, they too wanted to see what it was like to go to an auction house. And like any other kid, Naruto was also curious.


    Well, he might have also wanted to go and brag in front of his friends. Who knows Kids can be unpredictable, especially Naruto who is known as the No. 1 Unpredictable ninja at an early age.


    ¡° So you want to go to the auction?¡± Izanami asked, raising one eyebrow.


    ¡° Hmm ¡° Naruto nodded eagerly as he said, ¡° Everybody at school was talking about it so I wanted to see what it is really like. ¡°


    ¡° Well I don''t mind you coming to the auction with us since it wouldn''t be much of a hassle to take you with us, ¡° Izanami said as she smiled.


    ¡° But you need to behave okay. You can''t make trouble in the Auction House''s opening ceremony. ¡° Izanami warned as she looked at Naruto. Although she herself didn''t believe her words she still had to tell.


    ¡° Okay I''ll be on my best behavior,¡± Naruto said as he puffed his chest.


    ¡® yeah I should make some preparation so he won''t take things too far ¡® Izanami thought inwardly while still smiling as though she was believing Naruto''s words.


    ¡° Oh right, do you want some tickets to give your friends?¡± Izanami asked as she remembered something.


    ¡° Huh, is that fine? ¡° Naruto asked, surprised. He didn''t think his big sister would even allow them to come.


    Although he wants to brag in front of his friends, going with them is also fine.


    ¡° Yeah, I don''t really mind. You go and ask Nanami for some invitation cards and give it to them tomorrow. ¡° Izanami said.


    She thought with his friends there Naruto would be stable as Ino and Shikamaru could contain him to a certain extent.


    ¡°Yay Thank you big sis Izanami ¡° Naruto exclaimed as he gave a big hug to Izanami. Then he ran inside to find Nanami to ask for the tickets. He is going to surprise his friends with them.


    Seeing him running away in such a hurry Izanami chuckled and said, ¡°Well it seems someone is excited. ¡° She then turned to the side and asked, ¡°Do you also want an invitation Kiyomi ¡°


    As the name suggests it is a memory-searching jutsu. This is one of the standard jutsus the interrogation unit in Japan uses to collect information from their captives. Although this jutsu is quite similar to the Yamanaka clan''s secret techniques the principles are completely different.


    Instead of forcibly reading through memories and harming the person this jutsu puts the person into a trance and sends signals to his brain to remember his past without damaging his mind. It¡¯s like the brain is rewinding the ongoing movie and a third party is secretly watching it.


    After a while, Izanami stopped the technique. She had read enough of his memories to understand what really happened.


    ¡°Sigh, I can¡¯t believe how idiot a person can get ¡° Izanami muttered as she looked at Obito with a very complex look. She was considering whether to teach this brat some common sense since his intellect didn¡¯t seem to grow with his Sharingan.


    ¡°What did he do this time ¡° Kaguya asked with a raised eyebrow. She was curious on what made even the normally chil Izanami this agitated.


    ¡°Sigh this idiot...sigh.... ¡° Izanami started to speak but just sighed heavily. She was hesitating whether to say this. Obito¡¯s image as the hidden boss may be in danger if she says what she saw in his memory.


    ¡°Just say that damn thing, I won¡¯t be a brat who is a hundred times younger than me for being stupid. I have seen many stupid people to judge ¡° Kaguya said iratedly. And she really didn¡¯t think there would be any other idiot than her two sons who would try to kill their own mother because a toad said she was evil.


    After hesitating for a bit Izanami began to explain, ¡°Well the thing here is,....... ¡°


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 88: He will always be my best friend

    88: He will always be my best friend


    ¡° Well, you see our Obito has been gathering some intel on the World Bank due to heavy movements we have been making last year. And somehow he had come to the conclusion that we are walking money bags. This idiot thinks we are like the Daimyos who are all just talk.


    So this idiot decided to control me with an heir that is easily accessible to him with his Genjutsu. He hoped after taking control over me he could get enough finances to fund his plans. ¡° Izanami explained with an annoyed look. She didn¡¯t like being compared to those pigs who only knew how to order people around.


    Kaguya looked at her blankly and asked, ¡° I still don¡¯t hear anything that would make you hesitate to speak. And why the hell did he come here after transforming into Kiyomi ¡°


    Hearing this Izanami said, ¡°That¡¯s the part I¡¯m mad about. You see apart from controlling me he had another objective. And that is to find a way to collect some spare Sharingans.


    You see after being very close to death under Minato¡¯s hand he had become more paranoid. So he began to take lessons from Madara and mostly Danzo and began to study Izanagi. After finally being able to cast Izanagi he ran into the problem of not having enough Sharingan to use.


    This dumbass copied Danzo and planted 3 spares Sharingan Madara had kept with him into his body. The process was smoother since half of his body is already made out of white Zetsu.


    And after the experiment, the first thing he did was to find a way to restock on his Sharingan since he wanted to at least plant 7 Sharingan in his body. And the first thing he thought of was to cause fighting in the Uchiha clan so many would die.


    And since he was going to control he had the wonderful idea of impersonating Kiyomi so even if the likelihood of his involvement was found by Konoha they would only blame the Uchiha clan and further deteriorate the relations with them.


    So no matter what he would get what he wants one way or another ¡° Izanami explained in one breath.


    ¡°Really that plan came out of a Uchiha brat who almost failed to graduate from school. ¡° Kaguya asked as she blinked her eyes in surprise.


    ¡°Yeah surprising, I know ¡° Izanami nodded as she too agreed with Kaguya on this.


    ¡°But I still didn¡¯t hear the reason why you were upset. You are not a person who gets angry over being seen as a pawn or even cares much when someone takes action against the Uchiha clan. ¡° Kaguya said as she looked at Izanami with a look that said, ¡®I¡¯m tired of waiting around just to tell the damn reason¡¯.


    ¡°Well the reason I got mad at him was his thinking pattern. You know if he really needed some money all he had to do was take control over some businessmen and make them take a loan from the Bank and take away all the money.


    Not only is this method very safe it is also very practical as there is no way a normal person could track him down. But no, this idiot didn¡¯t think of such a simple solution and went to control a very high-ranking member who is monitored 24 hours by Anbu ninjas who could easily find her in a Genjutsu.


    If that isn¡¯t stupid I don¡¯t know what. And what¡¯s with his mindset of taking away Sharingan after killing some innocents? Couldn¡¯t he rob Danzo of his collection? Did he really need to make a huge fuss to do one task? ¡° Izanami complained as she looked at Obito as though he was a mentally unstable fool who needed help.


    ¡°This guy definitely needs to go through some therapy to change his thoughts that are always leaning towards violence and murder. ¡°Kaguya had agreed with Izanami on this matter.


    And without hesitation, he tried to separate them but his hand passed through them like how it would be when he activated his Kamui.


    After almost stumbling and falling Obito managed to readjust his center of gravity. He looked at the two of them with doubt.


    ¡°Rin, what are you saying we need to take you to a medic immediately, ¡° Kakashi said with distress. ¡°I won¡¯t let Obito down, what would he think when he woke up from his coma and found you not beside him? ¡° He said as he tried to take his hand away from Rin.


    But Rin caught it and said with a helpless smile, ¡°Hey Kakashi we both know I have very little time. So can you fulfill my last request ¡°


    ¡°No Rin I will save you ¡° Obito shouted as he once again rushed towards Rin. Even when he knew this was an illusion he still couldn¡¯t let Rin die in front of him.


    But like his previous try, he passed through them. It looked like he was a ghost as both of them didn¡¯t seem to notice him.


    ¡°Tell me Rin, whatever it is, I will do it, ¡°Kakashi said as a sad expression appeared on his face.


    Rin took a moment to calm her breath and said slowly, ¡° Tell Obito when he wakes up that he will always be my best friend ¡°


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 89: I hope you don’t go back on your words in the future,

    89: I hope you don¡¯t go back on your words in the future,


    ¡°Aaaaahhh ¡° Obito screamed as he woke up. He looked at his surroundings and saw that he was in the old hideout that he had inherited from Madara.


    ¡°What happened Obito did you poop in your sleep. ¡° Tobi asked jokingly as he came to see Obito. It¡¯s not every day they see him showing such emotions after Rin¡¯s death.


    ¡°Haa haaa ¡° Obito breathed heavily as he wiped his sweat from his forehead. He felt that he had a very bad nightmare but he can¡¯t remember what exactly. ¡®Wait, when did I return to the base to sleep?


    ¡° Hey Guruguru when did I come back here ¡° He asked as he looked at Tobi. He didn¡¯t remember coming back after completing his mission.


    ¡°Well, you came back yesterday evening like usual. ¡° Tobi answered as he looked at Obito with puzzlement.


    ¡°I see, ¡° he said as he began to remember yesterday¡¯s memories. After he snuck into that Izanami girl''s mansion he heard about an auction house being held in Konoha. And they were discussing what items to highlight as they have collected many treasures for all these years.


    And this piece of information had his interest peaked. He wondered what sort of artifacts would they auction there. So after stealing a VIP ticket, he came back. If this auction house has some decent artifacts then he would steal them and cause chaos in Konoha.


    Not only would this cause the World Bank to clash with Konoha again he could also rope the other hidden villages and start a new ninja war.


    The more chaotic the hidden villages the better it is for him. Not only would that in fighting make them weaken each other it would also allow him to rope in some customers to Akatsuki. After all apart from large ninja villages, independent organizations like Akatsuki were the general public¡¯s second option.


    And Konan has been nagging that they are not making enough money these days. So Obito had to find a way to solve this situation.


    ¡®Sigh things I do to create my perfect world with my Rin ¡® Obito thought as began to freshen up. He still has numerous jobs to do like finding new potential members for the organization.


    ¡®But still, I feel I just forgot something important. Hmm, maybe it was the dream I had. Although I can¡¯t remember it my instincts are telling me it is something I would dread ¡® Obito muttered inwardly.


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° I see I didn''t think of that possibility ¡° Kaguya nodded, accepting that explanation. She isn''t that much of a schemer so she doesn''t see the much bigger picture like Izanami.


    ¡°Well, anyway do you guys also want to come to the auction house? I¡¯m sure you guys would surely love the experience ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Kaguya with a smile. Her eyes had a calculating light that she hid perfectly from Kaguya.


    Izanami had a very crazy business idea that she wanted to try. If this idea works then she would be able to start another new successful business.


    ¡°Hmm, sure why not ¡° Kaguya said not knowing that she had doomed her animal friends to a day full of torture.


    ¡°That¡¯s wonderful I hope you don¡¯t go back on your words in the future, ¡° Izanami said with a sweet smile while secretly storing away the recording device that she activated when this conversation started.


    In recent years her grandmother seemed to have developed her shamelessness into a very high limit. So unless you have hard evidence she would not agree to anything even if there was a contract. Izanami wondered whose influence that was, as when she was just freed from the seal, she had been quite honorable.


    She should find that just in case Naruto was also led astray like her. She didn¡¯t want him to go to the dark side. At least not until he became the Hokage.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 90:THE AUCTION

    90:THE AUCTION


    Today, the Konoha streets were extremely lively, even with the sun already set. Most of the streets were filled with high-profile individuals, all walking and chatting happily. Whether they were well-known businessmen or clan elders, everyone with power in Konoha could be seen heading toward a single destination.


    And that destination is the newly opened Red Fox auction house. The new auction house that was built recently. Due to almost every high-ranking individual coming here, the security was very tight.


    The police department took this matter very seriously as everyone knew what would happen if they displeased the owner of this establishment. So as to ensure everything was okay they mobilized almost a quarter of their own troops to this place.


    And with them keeping public safety everything was very peaceful. The invites just had to show their invitation and then they could enter without any problem. As for troublemakers they were swiftly dealt with and escorted to a prison cell.


    While everything was happening so smoothly outside, inside the auction house in a special VIP room Izanami observed everything with her observation Haki. She made sure to memorize those troublemakers who were being escorted to prison cells.


    She knew who these people were as there were only a few people who would dare to cause trouble for her. And those are the two corrupt elders.


    Yes after Tsunade took over Konoha their influence was severely weakened. Especially Hiruzen who lost almost everything. Especially after the scandal where all of his silent support was shown to the whole world.


    Although the reports didn¡¯t show any of his involvement in Danzo¡¯s crimes but ninja clans are not fools. How could Danzo do all of that without him knowing? If that was totally true and he actually didn¡¯t know anything wouldn¡¯t things be even worse?


    As the Hokage he didn¡¯t know what his assistant was doing under his back wouldn¡¯t that clearly show how incompetent he is?


    So in short Hiruzen lost almost all of his support from the major clans. And with him, his two dear friends also came down with him. Without him or Danzo holding the fort, how could those two clowns keep their authority?


    Their only saving grace was that Tsunade didn¡¯t revoke their status as elders. But even so, they don¡¯t have any departments as Tsunade took over everything. Their only duty is to come to the Hokage Office and give their suggestions if Tsunade ever asked them.


    And with their high pride, they didn¡¯t like this at all. Originally Izanami was thinking of letting them go since they are harmless but with these actions, she decided to teach them a lesson.


    ¡® It seems it is time for Shisui to initiate his hunt ¡® Izanami thought as a very dangerous light passed through her eyes. Shisui has been learning from Nanami about the art of silent assassination. And this seems to be a very good assignment for him.


    And Silent assassination isn''t like your original assassination where you sneak up on a guy and slit his throat. In Silent Assination you will kill a guy without anyone knowing he was killed.


    For example, you will put a poison in his drink that will only get active when he comes closer to something very specific. You could even make it so that he or she would be killed in a natural cause like a heart attack.


    Jutsu scrolls are very rare. Most ninjas would only get to master one or two jutsus due to how rare they are. For a clan ninja, they would need to make some connections to go through their libraries to read Jutsu scrolls.


    And for commoner ninjas, they would at least need to make some serious contributions to even borrow some D-rank jutsus.


    Even when someone is assigned a Jonnin Sensei that person necessarily doesn''t need to teach them some ninjutsu.


    As students, killing their masters for Jutsus is a common thing in this world. So unless you are absolutely sure no one would teach one''s Jutsus to another.


    And with Izanami auctioning off some Jutsu scrolls, that''s just asking for trouble. Not to mention sealing tags that are more rare than jutsu scrolls.


    Due to Fuinjustu being very uncommon with ninjas, these sealing scrolls are like trouble magnets.


    Tsunade wouldn''t even be surprised if there was a bloodbath due to many parties wanting specific sealing scrolls.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 91: We are just having a Garage Sale

    91: We are just having a Garage Sale


    ¡° Oh please you worry too much about it. ¡° Izanami said as she waved her hands at Tsunade¡¯s concerns. Although that stuff may be very precious here in Japan they are garbage.


    Yes, in this auction Izanami wanted to sell all of the unnecessary stuff stored in their storehouses. Most of the stuff at this auction is mostly failed but effective products.


    For example, the jutsu scroll may include a C-rank fire jutsu that allows the user to shape their fire chakra into a phoenix and use it to attack the enemies. But the problem with this jutsu is that the chakra needed for this is too costly.


    Since the jutsu just needed some tuning Izanami branded these jutsus failed but still effective. In Japan, there is a whole building full of this stuff.


    You see in Japan you get to learn how chakra really works in the human body. And teachers actively encourage students to research this on their own. Due to this more and more research entuastics were born.


    And with these people spreading their new findings more and more people gradually began to understand how jutsus work. This led to the school implementing a crazy graduation exam. To successfully graduate one must create their own jutsu.


    The jutsu doesn¡¯t need to be offensive. It can even be E rank jutsu that could only be used in household cleaning. In this exam what the examiner would look for is whether the child truly understands how the jutsu works and how creative he can be.


    So in the end even if you make a defective jutsu that only you can do you will still pass the exam as you have already met the passing criteria. And for these jutsus the school will take in them for further research and try to modify them further.


    And after they are modified and safe for the generous public they are released while the original scrolls are stored in the storehouse as a memento. And gradually a whole building was full of this stuff.


    Originally vali was thinking of selling them on the black market since that would be the fastest option to get rid of them. But Izanami thought auctioning them would be even better since that would make earn them more profits.


    After discussing this with everyone they finaly decided to auction all of the garbage Japan doesn''t need to bring in more space for the new jutsu scrolls. So instead of calling this an auction, it is better to call this a garage sale.


    ¡°Arrg whatever if anything happens you gotta do all the cleanup. ¡° Tsunade said as she gave up thinking of this insanity. She would just get herself drunk and forget about everything.


    .


    "Ladies and gentlemen, Welcome to the grand opening of the Red Fox Auction House! Today is a momentous occasion, and we are honored to be hosting this event under the leadership of Lady Izanami from the World Bank.


    We have two exciting auctions today: one for the general public and a special auction for our distinguished invitees. Please remember that each item you win will be delivered directly to you, so be ready with your payment for smooth transactions.


    Without further ado, let the bidding begin! Thank you for being part of this incredible day, and may the best bids win!" a beautiful auctioneer dressed in a black gown said as she walked on the stage.


    Flipping the small catalog on her hand she began to speak, ¡° Now our first item is an E rank earth justu named Ground Ploughing. As the name suggests it is a justu used to loosen the soil. Very useful for farmers. Our researchers also found out that they could use this technique to make a small quicksand. Another added use is that one could simply soften the ground around them when camping ... ¡°The auctioneer began to continue speaking as list out all the ways this jutsu could be used which were researched by Japan for the next few minutes.


    After what felt like forever she stopped her lengthy explanation and finaly said, ¡°With that said the starting price of this product is 2000 ryo ¡°


    There was silence before one businessman raised his hand and declared, ¡° 2500 ¡°. Then chaos started.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 92: There are at least 100,000 here

    92: There are at least 100,000 here


    ¡° 3000 ¡°


    ¡°3500 ¡°


    ¡°4000¡±


    ¡° 5000 ¡°


    The price kept going high up until it reached 6000ryo. Although this is an E-rank jutsu due to the long speech of the auctioneer many were aware of how useful this particular jutsu is. As businessmen how could they discard such a great opportunity?


    While the one who got the jutsu was feeling proud of himself the auctioneer continued to do her duty, ¡° For our next item is an artifact that was said to be from the late Uzushiogakure. According to our appraiser, this artifact can allow the user to issue simple commands to animals. The starting price is 10000 ryo ¡°


    ¡° 11 000 ¡° one of the Inuzuka clan elders quickly bid as the bidding started. This artifact is very useful for those who have numerous businesses concerning animals. Although they use ninja dogs to command normal animals that is not a very reliable option since those ninjas have better things to do than take care of herds.


    ¡° 12 000¡± another elder from another clan bidded. This artifact would allow them to train some ninja pets. Not everyone has years of experience like the Inuzuka clan.


    ¡°13 000 ¡° a wealthy lady also joined the bidding. She wanted this artifact so she could communicate with her pet cat who is always running away from home.


    Like this, the auction continued never losing its energy for even a moment. Every new item that came up sent the crowd into a frenzy, each bidder crazy for their own reasons. Whether it was the rarity, the power, or just the bragging rights, every single thing had them on the edge of their seats.


    While the auction buzzed with excitement, in one of the private rooms next to Izanami''s, Naruto and his friends were having the time of their lives.


    The private rooms had everything a kid could ask for¡ªplenty of food, soft drinks, and a level of luxury they''d never experienced before. The sofas were unbelievably comfortable, and the furniture looked like something out of a dream. Even the air conditioner was fancy, automatically adjusting the temperature to keep everything just right.


    For these kids, all from ninja clans, this kind of luxury was unheard of. Even their fathers, the clan patriarchs, wouldn¡¯t be able to afford such a high-class experience. So, naturally, these little brats were living their dream world, soaking up every moment.


    ¡° I gotta say Naruto this place is super good. I wonder if I can stay here forever ¡° Shikamaru said as he lazily laid on the sofa. He could already feel the sleepiness hitting on.


    ¡°Yeah Naruto this place rocks, ¡° Choji said as he happily devoured the numerous snacks that were placed in the room.


    ¡° But Naruto is it really okay to spend that much money? ¡°Ino asked worriedly. That amount isn¡¯t small at all.


    ¡°Don¡¯t worry it¡¯s totally fine. ¡° Naruto said with confidence. He heard Izanami saying that the money is just a number to her. And what is important is the experience you get after making a satisfying purchase.


    ¡°And besides aren¡¯t you all interested in participating ¡° he added as he looked at them with a smile that is quite similar to Izanami when she ropes in a poor soul to do something bad.


    ¡°Not really, ¡° Sasuke said cooly but his body was very honest. He came near Naruto and took the catalog to search for interesting treasures.


    Seeing Sasuke agreeing Ino also joined in. She was also very curious and excited on joining the bidding.


    Shikamaru and Choji also stopped resisting. They were also curious. After they browsed through the catalog they decided on a few treasures that had yet to be presented.


    After that when those items are presented they join the bidding war. Since they were still children their voices were easily discovered by their parents.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 93:What the hell are those kids doing?

    93:What the hell are those kids doing?


    ¡°What the hell are those kids doing? ¡° Shikaku Nara frowned as he looked at one of the private rooms where he could see his son and his friends.


    ¡° Shikaku, did you give those kids money for them to participate in the auction ¡°Yoshino Nara, mother of Shikamaru Nara, asked as she looked at her husband with a deep frown. She didn¡¯t think her kid would be foolish to participate in a bidding without having any funds.


    ¡°No, I didn¡¯t. ¡°Shikaku shook his head and looked at his friends and asked, ¡°Did any of you give them any money to participate ¡°


    Cho?za also shook his head and so did Inoichi. They didn¡¯t give any money to them. Even if then they wouldn¡¯t give them that much money to participate in the bidding.


    ¡° Then who is it ¡° Shikaku frowned as he began to think about it.


    ¡°Do you think Fugaku may have given them some money? ¡° Inoichi asked as he looked at Shikaku.


    ¡°No, that is impossible. Although the Uchiha clan is wealthy even they don¡¯t have the luxury to give some kids this much money ¡° Shikaku shook his head immediately. He knew better than anyone how tight the Uchiha clan finances are these days. There is no way they would have the luxury of giving their child this much pocket money.


    While they were thinking this, a waitress came near them and whispered some words in Shikaku¡¯s ears before handing him a letter.


    ¡°I see, please convey our gratitude to your mistress, ¡° Shikaku said after reading the letter. The waitress nodded as she left the room.


    ¡°What was that dear ¡° Yoshino asked as she looked at her husband who looked like he was having a very big headache.


    Shikaku didn¡¯t say anything. He just handed over the letter to his wife. ¡° oh and you guys should also see it since this concerns all three of our kids ¡° he added as he looked at Cho?za and Inoichi.


    Hearing his words all six of them clamored next to Yoshino and looked at the letter. In the letter, there were only a few lines.


    ¡° it was me who allowed the kids to participate in the bidding. The money they are using is Naruto¡¯s pocket money I gave him. So don¡¯t worry about it.


    ~ Izanami Yosokuna ~ ¡°


    Reading those words everyone¡¯s faces had a complicated expression. Although they didn¡¯t want to admit it they are a bit of their kids. No one would say to a very generous and super rich friend.


    ¡° hey Shikaku, why do you still look so troubled? Since we know where our kids got the capital isn¡¯t this problem over ¡° Inoichi who is the only one who feels a bit complicated about this matter asked Shikau when he saw that his friend was still deep in his thoughts.


    Even she felt a bit jealous of Naruto''s situation. Especially when she heard the budget Izanami prepared for him.


    She also wanted someone to give her some pocket money. That way she could gamble all she wanted.


    ¡® wait can¡¯t I just borrow Naruto¡¯s money? After all, it¡¯s not a thing for a kid his age to have that money. Yep let¡¯s do it. As a responsible adult, I should make him understand this good lesson ¡® Tsunade suddenly thought with a grin.


    Since this isn¡¯t the first time she has done this sort of thing she has no physiological burdens. With her years of experience doing this to Nawaki and Jiraiya, this had become second nature for her.


    Izanami who didn¡¯t like Tsunade¡¯s grin narrowed her eyes. As a master of making trouble, she recognized that look from miles away. And with her recent question about Naruto, it didn¡¯t take a genius to make out the pieces.


    ¡°Tsunade I¡¯m warning you don¡¯t you dare try to take Naruto¡¯s poket money. Believe or not if you really dare try it I will bring Mito back to life ¡° Izanami warned her.


    Hearing her words Tsunade who was still drunk sobered up immediately. If there was one person she would fear the most then that would undoubtedly be her grandma. Unlike her grandpa who spoiled her rotten her grandmother was the strict one who kept her in check. So she would definitely not hesitate to spank her butt if she actually found out about her actions,


    ¡°Hehehe Izanami why get so serious. Weren¡¯t we just talking about you spoiling Naruto? Why do you suddenly want to bring back the dead ¡° Tsunade with a nervous smile said while sweating.


    She knew Izanami wasn¡¯t bluffing when she said she was going to bring her grandmother back to life. She knew some secrets about Izanami and her role in this world.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 94: THE MATRIARCH OF JAPAN

    94: THE MATRIARCH OF JAPAN


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    .....


    In Japan, there is a saying. Even if they die they would still be able to say their last goodbyes to their families as their matriarch would give them that last request as an honor for their services.


    While many may not know this but Izanami is the keeper and guardian of the Pure Land. She has the duty of managing the pure land and guiding souls through the cycle of reincarnation


    For a soul to go through the cycle of reincarnation they must leave all of their grudges and attachments. The sooner one manages to attain a calm state of mind the sooner one can leave the pure land.


    But in a world where wars are fought each decade not many souls could achieve such a state of mind. Especially the innocents who had their whole families annihilated because of being caught in the crossfire of two ninjas.


    So in short in the original story, the pure land was fully booked with souls due to many of them having regrets. But this obviously didn¡¯t happen since Izanami took her position.


    She arranged a false reality similar to Infinite Tsukuyomi on them and let them live the dream life they wanted. As for the sinners who are the reason for their deaths she gave them very unique punishments.


    Sometimes she reincarnated them into animals that would be hunted by humans similar to how they hunted the civilians. Sometimes she would let them experience the lives of their victims to make them realise their mistakes. The list went on as Izanami invented a new punishment each decade.


    Her most recent punishment method is letting them get reincarnated and letting them be experimental subjects for Orochimaru. That guy is doing excellent work being an executioner.


    The life of a ninja is very hard. No one knows what to expect in every mission. Some missions may cause people to go undercover for months. For example, if you don¡¯t have any experience being a farmer how could be disguise yourself as one? If an experienced ninja found out that you are a fake then you would be dead. Even during battles, a simple detail may lead to one¡¯s defeat and victory. For example, what if you suddenly encounter a sudden rain while fighting? Not only would this make a fire-style user more vulnerable, but a water-style user would be far stronger. If you are the fire-style user and your opponent is the water-style user you would be in deep trouble.


    To drop the death count the village decided to make fresh Genin takes on many odd jobs at the start of their career. This is so they could practice their teamwork while also gaining experience in various fields. This approach was effective as the death toll of these new ninjas dropped.


    ¡° But I still can''t understand why you gave him that much money,¡± Tsunade grumbled. Although Izanami''s reasoning is very solid it still doesn''t explain the fact that she handed that much money to a kid.


    ¡° Well, I obviously gave that much since he would have to buy presents for his friends. You can''t really expect Naruto to lose the few friends he had made due to jealousy right? ¡° Izanami explained as if this is a matter of fact.


    Although Naruto had a lot of money with him, if he truly wanted to give a present to his friends then that much would be barely enough.


    Of course, if he truly didn''t have enough funds Izanami would just give him another red envelope. As his guardian, she had the responsibility to help him at all times.


    But she wasn''t going to say this to Tsunade. Who knows what this girl would do to scam that money out of Naruto?


    Even if she threatened Tsunade, Izanami didn''t doubt for a second that her threats would be enough to deter her.


    ¡® I should warn Naruto to not say anything about money in front of Tsunade. ¡® Izanami thought as she secretly left a message to her soul clone in Naruto''s sealed place to inform Kushina about this matter.


    As someone who lived with Tsunade Kushina has enough experience in dodging Tsunade¡®s money-borrowing attempts.


    While Izanami was thinking about such random thoughts, Time slowly went by and the auction house was entering its end. The public auction has ended and now is when the real auction starts.

 95: The legendary Phantom Thief

    95: The legendary Phantom Thief


    ¡°Ladies and gentlemen the public auction is now over. I ask the guests who have the public tickets to please leave the auction house. We hope you all enjoyed our auction house ¡° The auctioneer said with a salesman tone.


    The guests who were sitting in the auditorium sighed as they all began to leave. Although they were very curious to see what sort of items would be auctioned in the private auction they didn¡¯t dare to make any trouble. Especially after realizing that many muscular guards were guarding each door.


    After the people from the stalls left the auction house doors were once again closed. But this time numerous seals began to appear and isolate the auction house. This way no one would be able to sneak in or sneak out.


    ¡°Well then ladies and gentlemen we will start the private auction. Our first item is a sword from the warring state.¡± the auctioneer said as her assistant brought a sword that was placed in a glass container.


    ¡° According to our appraiser, this sword was made by the legendary blacksmith Lord Shimotsuki. From the records we found this sword was once wielded by the past Senju clan leader Butsuma Senju who is also the father of our revered God of shinobi Hashirama Senju. It is said that he himself has wielded this blade in the past when he was just appointed as the clan leader.


    Our initial price starts at 50,000,000ryo ¡° the auctioneer said with a bit of excitement. After all, this is a relic that has some connection to Hashirma. Even his broken armor is worth much more than an S-rank mission.


    And just like auctioneer expected the participants were all like horny dogs who saw a beautiful female dog as they began to bid crazily. The competition was very fierce as many wanted this sword for themselves.


    ¡° 100,000,000 ryo ¡° a clan elder shouted as he looked at the ninja sword with red eyes.


    ¡° 200,000,000 ryo ¡° another clan elder from a ninja clan directly doubled the price. For major clans, this much money isn¡¯t that big of a deal. Especially if they could get a sword that has a connection to Lord Hashirama.


    ¡° 250,000,000 ¡° someone from the Sarutobi clan shouted as he raised the price. Due to the fact that the Third Hokage was not invited only a few clan members were allowed to come here.


    ¡° 300,000,000, ¡° a Hyuga clan elder said as he raised the price. Although they don''t use swords, having this sword is not a bad thing for them. After all, apart from the Uchiha, they have the most wealth in the hidden leaf. So they could afford to have such luxury.


    ¡° 350,000,000 ¡° the Sarutobi clan member shouted as he increased the price again.


    ¡°400,000,000 ¡° the Hyuga elder didn¡¯t back down as he also increased the price.


    Like this, the bidding intensified as each clan elder refused to give up.


    .


    .


    As a chakra weapon that Senju clan members used, it still contained a trace of their chakra that was filled with vitality. The unique chakra signature that only Senju clan members could have.


    ¡° This is definitely the real deal, ¡° Tsunade muttered as she held the blade. Even now she was sceptical of this blade as she had never heard of it.


    ¡° See I told you, ¡° Izanami said as she drank her cup of soda. She was enjoying the commotion downstairs. ¡° And besides, my auction house only sells legitimate goods. ¡° She added as she looked at Naruto''s room.


    Those kids were now messing around with the new toys they just got. Sasuke got himself a pair of sunglasses that not only looked cool on him, but he was also able to take some photos.


    Truly a great product for a bro con to record his favourite times with his big brother.


    ¡° But how the hell did you even get this sword? Shouldn''t this be in the Senju clan treasury? ¡° Tsunade asked as she looked at Izanami with suspicion. She didn''t steal this in the past, right?


    Izanami, who could somewhat read what''s on Tsunade¡¯s mind, was speechless. What kind of person does she appear in Tsunade''s eyes?


    Ok, she may have had the title of the legendary Phantom Thief in the past but that was ages ago. She stopped doing that after Japan was founded.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 96: Don’t worry about financial constraints

    96: Don¡¯t worry about financial constraints


    The auction continued as many treasures appeared one after another. The bidding war was intense as each item seemed highly coveted by each clan. Numerous treasures like S-rank jutsus, forbidden techniques, and ancient weapons and artifacts appeared one after another.


    Each one of these items, any of which would typically cause a massive stir, was now being presented in this auction. Izanami was certain that, after today, the Red Fox auction house would be renowned throughout the Land of Fire.


    ¡°Well then, ladies and gentlemen, we have now come to our last but certainly not least special item. For this, I invite Lady Izanami to do the honors,¡± the auctioneer announced as she walked over to Izanami, who made her way to the center of the stage.


    ¡°Well, thank you, Nono, for giving me the stage,¡± Izanami said as she acknowledged Nono. Yes, this beautiful auctioneer was none other than Nono? Yakushi, the orphanage caretaker.


    When Izanami first met her, this was the business opportunity she had in mind. Nono possessed excellent speaking skills, which, whether due to her training as a spy or her natural charisma, made people listen intently to her words.


    Of course, it wasn¡¯t mind control, but more like a very persuasive salesperson¡¯s gift. With talent like that, Izanami couldn¡¯t let it go to waste.


    ¡®I should have her come here more often,¡¯ Izanami thought, smiling at Nono with satisfaction. She was thoroughly impressed by Nono¡¯s abilities and resolved to get her away from that fool Danzo.


    How could she let her skilled auctioneer end up dead because of Danzo¡¯s trust issues?


    ¡°Well then, my dear guests, as you may all know, this private auction is exclusive to Konoha. And that is because of this final item.


    Without further suspense, let me introduce our last offering.¡± Izanami snapped her fingers, and a projection screen lit up behind her, displaying a few bold words.


    **[Konoha Police Department Chief¡¯s Rights]**


    ¡°Yes, everyone, our last item pertains to the rights of the Chief of the Konoha Police Department. As everyone knows, the Police Department has a certain level of autonomy from the Hokage¡¯s office due to the nature of their work.


    Because of this, the department enjoys specific privileges, one of which allows the Chief to appoint any clan member they approve to join the force, regardless of that member''s formal qualifications,¡± Izanami explained, smiling as she sensed the tension in the air.


    Although they were clan leaders and high-ranking members of Konoha, many were still unprepared for such a revelation. The invitations hadn¡¯t mentioned the exact items up for auction.


    ¡°Now, let¡¯s start the bidding for the second portion of the rights,¡± Izanami announced, pulling everyone¡¯s focus back to her.


    ¡°Oh, and before I forget, this time, you may form groups to bid. However, keep in mind that we have no role in the division of shares. That¡¯s entirely up to the clans involved,¡± Izanami added, making everyone pause momentarily. Then, as though a switch had been flipped, many attendees began forming alliances.


    You must know that in the previous bid, small clans didn¡¯t participate as they didn¡¯t have enough funds. Although teaming up may make them divide the loot it wasn¡¯t a big deal for them as their clans also don¡¯t have that many ninjas to begin with.


    So for the next few minutes, numerous alliances were made between various clans. Surprisingly even major clans decided to make alliances. The most eye-catching one was the Ino¨CShika¨CCho? which included the Yamanaka, Nara, and Akamichi clans, and the alliance between Aburame and Inuzuka clans.


    But Izanami expected this as these clans always had good relations with each other. What surprised her the most was that Sarutobi and Shimura clans didn¡¯t form any alliances. Although Hiruzen and Danzo had a fallout that shouldn¡¯t explain this as even during the Sengoku era these two clans had a very good relationship.


    She refused to believe that two people could completely destroy the connection these clans had for hundreds of years.


    ¡® something is wrong ¡® Izanami thought as she narrowed her eyes. She could practically smell a scheme. It seems she should pay some attention to what Danzo and Hiruzen were doing these days.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.

 97: The Scheme between two Friends

    97: the scheme between two friends


    the auction went on for another hour as with most of the clans forming teams they were able to pour in more money making every bid last a very long time. the competition was at its highest due to many clans wanting to have the piece of the pie that is called the police department.


    although they would only be able to let their clan members join as newbies that itself is enough. in a few years when these clan members would be able to get promoted and have enough status in the police department. on that day they would be able to spread their influence and bring back the money that they invested.


    with those thoughts, all the clans went all out with their bidding. especially the small clans. unlike the major clans who have various businesses all over konoha, they were very desperate to find any way to increase their influence.


    at the end of the day, the other two quotas were won by the group that was made by the aburame and inuzuka clans and the group that was made by various small clans. the ino-shika-cho dropped the competition during the second quota.


    although shikaku said that it was not worth it since they had enough influence over konoha. but izanami suspected that he purposely lost the bid just so he could sell a favor to the inuzuka and aburame clans. if it wasn¡¯t for their retreat these two clans would undoubtedly have lost the bidding war.


    "ladies and gentlemen, thank you all for joining us at the red fox auction house today. we¡¯ve seen incredible energy and enthusiasm, and we hope each winning bidder leaves with something truly special.


    on behalf of everyone here, including lady izanami from the world bank, we extend our gratitude for making this auction a success. safe travels, and we look forward to welcoming you back to red fox for future events. thank you, and have a wonderful evening!" nono said as izanami went back to her room after the bidding was over. she has zero interest in this as she had to check up on something very important.


    arriving at her own room she saw tsunade was still drinking. without shizune here to contain her this girl seems to want to be like the second cana from fairy tail. speaking of shizune that girl said that she was too tired to come as tsunade most of the time left the non-important stuff to her.


    yes while tsunade deals with the important stuff shizune is the one who handles the documents that are not important enough. for example, the complaint letters that numerous businessmen sent when ninjas damaged their properties are handled by her. even the small complaints from parents about naruto are also handled by her.


    tsunade would never do this work as after reading a few letters tsunade would lose all patience and break everything or even find that idiot who wrote the letter and beat him up. this had already happened once during the days when tsunade first took over the office. at that time the hokage office table that has been there for ages broke due to tsunade¡¯s violent actions.


    it was after that incident that shizune volunteered herself to do this duty for everyone¡¯s sake. they can¡¯t be like kumo who would buy office tables in bulk every month.


    ¡° you should stop drinking now. haven¡¯t you already finished five barrels already. ¡° izanami said as slapped away tsunade¡¯s arm that was reaching for a new barrel.


    ¡°oh come on ¡° tsunade was going to complain but a forehead flick stopped her from speaking.


    ¡°hey ¡° tsunade glared at izanami hatefully. that really hurt.


    ¡° did you keep in track of hiruzen¡¯s movements with the shimura clan? ¡° izanami asked, ignoring her glare.


    ¡° yeah, there was nothing too suspicious. even after danzo¡¯s death, their relationship didn''t change. ¡° tsunade said, making izanami confirm her guess.


    ¡° i see you may leave, ¡° danzo said in his gloomy voice as he gestured for the man to leave with his hands.


    c25 bowed and left the dark room.


    after he left danzo relaxed on his chair and looked at the dimly lit ceiling deep in thought. it has been a year since he made his escape from konoha. originally he thought he would be able to get back what belonged to him in a short amount of time after overthrowing hiruzen. but he then he found out that his best friend had already been kicked out of his own office.


    not only that all the businesses that they started had been targeted by tsunade who not only stopped monitering the evil uchiha clan she even gave them recognition.


    how dare she do that? doesn¡¯t she know that the evil clan should only be annihilated and not be given medals for killing an important person like him.


    ¡® tsunade has betrayed tobirama sensei¡®s wishes and is now a puppet for the world bank ¡® finally danzo arrived at this conclusion after reading all the changes tsunade made to the village.


    so after thinking it over for a few days, danzo decided to contact hiruzen. although he was angry because of the betrayal he knew that he should forget all those grudges if he wanted to protect konoha.


    he is the darkness of konoha; he would not let konoha fall into the filthy hands of the world bank.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    if you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my patreon account.

 98: A Uchiha Hokage

    98: a uchiha hokage


    the outfit consists of a long black coat with straight edges and tattered ends. it features silver shoulder plates with a metallic texture. the coat has red vertical stripes running along the front and is fastened with a visible silver belt buckle at the waist. the sleeves are long, and the character is wearing black gloves. the outfit also includes a high collar and black pants that match the coat. the design has no patterns, just solid black and red accents with metallic details. although he decided to forget the past, danzo wasn''t stupid enough to reveal his location to hiruzen without any backup plans.


    if hiruzen decided to betray him again danzo would run towards the land of rain to seek refuge without any hesitation. with all the flavours he had done to hanzo that old man would not betray me.


    this is also one of the reasons he made his secret base near the border. if anything went wrong he could escape at any time.


    thankfully hiruzen didn''t disappoint him this time as he agreed to cooperate with him. and not only that he even sent some funds as a sign of goodwill.


    and it was these funds that allowed danzo to build his new secret base underground.


    and in the past few months, he and hiruzen managed to gather a small enough manpower to replace the root ninjas.


    with them using tsunade''s mission of killing missing nin as a cover he and hiruzen managed to capture a few missing nin and brainwashed them to become his new root ninjas. although their capabilities are not worth mentioning it is better than nothing.


    although the progress was slow but danzo was confident enough that in a few years, he could make up his army of root ninjas.


    and his confidence rose even more when he heard about the auction house that was happening in konoha. if he could get some interesting artefacts then his root army would be stronger than ever.


    that is why he ordered one of his sleeper agents to go to the auction house and buy some interesting trinkets in his place. as for the money of course he ordered some of his men to go rob some villages and also asked for some from hiruzen who didn¡¯t mind sponsoring him.


    he even went out of his way to order some of his men to go to the shimura clan and threatened them to support his agents. danzo knew that apart from submitting to him there is no way for the shimura clan to survive in konoha. and even if they wanted to be independent they could only survive as a small clan and give up many of the privileges they have.


    but how could they who used to live like kings give up their privileges so easily? but they couldn¡¯t go against tsunade as she alone could annihilate their entire clan so their only option was to submit to danzo.


    now all he needs to wait is for his men to send the artifacts he bought so that he can continue with his plan. danzo thought as he began to dream about the future where he would once again regain all his authority and become the hero of konoha after driving away that traitorous bitch.


    .


    .


    ¡°what are those rights specifically, ¡° hiruzen asked getting a bad feeling. the police department is the only department that the hokage has the least control over. but it is also the department that the hokage needs to pay extra attention to.


    this department was one of the many ways senju toborama used to control the uchiha clan while also ensuring the safety of the village. so any decision concerning the police department needs to be taken very seriously.


    ¡° the rights the police department has over accepting new members. now the few clans who won the bid can appoint a fixed number of their selected members to work as police department personnel. ¡° hisoka explained.


    hearing his words hiruzen had an ugly expression. he knew perfectly well what this decision would ensure. from today onwards the police department will not be a uchiha-only place making the resentment that people would have for the police department would not be transferred to the uchiha clan.


    not only that with other clan members working under the uchiha clan the tension and resistance they have against the uchiha clan would gradually disappear allowing the uchiha clan to really integrate into the village.


    if this continued in just a few years they would be a uchiha as a hokage.


    ¡® i need to meet tsunade no i need to meet danzo, konoha should never have a uchiha as a hokage. ¡® hiruzen thought gloomily.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    if you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my patreon account.

 99: The Bounty of 1 billion

    99: The Bounty of 1 billion


    ¡°It seems I have let my arrogance cloud my judgment. ¡° Izanami muttered to herself as she read the files containing the list of actions Danzo had done for the last year. It also contained the latest letters he and Hruzen sent to each other.


    Which also included the recent argument about the Police department. Apparently, the indecisive Hiruzen wanted Danzo to make a move and kill many Uchiha clan members so there would be a rebellion due to the unnatural deaths. This would allow Hiruzen to persuade the other clans to either detain the Uchiha or make them suffer some heavy losses so they would be reduced to a minor clan.


    So even if a Uchiha wants to be a Hokage they would face many oppositions as they have no capital to hold that position. Although it is a bit radical it is quite effective. And what¡¯s more, this is the best he could do with his limited authority.


    But Danzo resued due to obvious reasons. Although many Uchiha clan members go on missions more than usual for Danzo to kill even one of them he would need to sacrifice at least one of Root ninjas.


    In the past, he wouldn¡¯t mind sacrificing one of his root ninjas as he could just openly abduct many more ninjas to fill their ranks. But now with his limited manpower, Danzo is very hesitant to even sacrifice one of them as who knew when he could recruit a strong ninja to his Root.


    ¡°It seems their roles are reversed ¡° Izanami commented with a chuckle. In the past, it was Hriuzen who hesitated for everything while Danzo was decisive to the point of ignoring the consequences.


    ¡° But it doesn¡¯t matter. Now that I¡¯m aware of their scheme I would never let these geezers do what they want. ¡° Izanami said with a cold smile.


    ¡°Do you want me to send the kill order matriarch? ¡° Nanami asked as she looked at her adopted mother with a bit of expectation.


    Izanami was going to say yes when she suddenly thought of a brilliant plan. ¡° hey Nanami we still have that bounty on Danzo¡¯s head right ¡°


    ¡° Yes due to your orders we didn¡¯t close the bounty on his head, ¡° Nanami said with a bit of puzzlement. ¡® What is she going to do now ¡® she wondered as she saw Izanami¡¯s smile growing wider.


    ¡°That¡¯s perfect, ¡° Izanami said as she took her phone and sent a few messages. From today onwards dear Danzo would be on the run for his life to even care about


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° Not interested, ¡° Kakuzu said flatly. He wasn''t loyal enough to care about this.


    ¡° Oh even if this information is connected to a person who has a billion bounty on his head. ¡° wang asked, still not losing his smile.


    ¡° A bounty¡± these two words caught Kakuzu¡¯s attention. Now he is interested.


    ¡°Yes but everything comes at a price, ¡° Wang said as he made a money gesture with his hands.


    ¡®Greedy bastard ¡® Kakuzu wanted to curse at him for making him pay for the information after getting him this curious. ¡° How much ¡°he asked. If this costs too much then he would just forget it.


    ¡° I million Ryo and the premise that you must finish this job no matter what, ¡° Wang said as he looked at Kakuzu seriously.


    ¡°Deal, ¡°Kakuzu said after hesitating for a bit. Since the bounty is 1 billion it meant this is a very high profile target. So the bounty hunter would only get one chance at this. These missions are not rare as there are many missions like this in the black market. These missions are called death missions as failure meant death no matter what.


    And Kakuzu is one of the few who usually take such missions due to them giving him high rewards.


    ¡°Here I¡¯m sure your leader would be very interested in this information too. ¡° Wang said as he took out a scroll from his sleeves and handed it to Kakuzu.


    Kakuzu unfolded the scroll and read the contents. In the scroll, there was a bounty poster pasted at the top. And that photo is the most famous Darkness of Konoha Danzo Shimura.


    Celebrating 1 Year on Patreon!


    To mark this special occasion, I¡¯m offering a 45% discount for all free members.


    This discount applies to the Fallen Angel, Demon God, and God of Death tiers.


    Discount Code: 04524


    If you¡¯d like to read up to 15 advanced chapters, consider joining my Patreon for exclusive early access.


    Join here: /Nauty_Manu


    Thank you for your support over the past year¡ªI truly appreciate it!

 100: Hmph ungrateful girl,

    100: Hmph ungrateful girl,


    ¡°Is this information reliable? ¡° Nagato, who is disguised as Pain, asked Kakuzu with trembling hands. Thankfully this is just a puppet so Nagato could still control his expressions to appear indifferent.


    ¡°Yes, the black market prides itself on their correct information. So far there has not been a single case of anyone getting false information. ¡° Kakuzu said with a nod. At the very least he had not seen any cases for his entire life.@@@@


    ¡° Good, then go and tell that manager and inform him that we will take this commission, ¡° Nagato said as his voice turned cold and indifferent.


    ¡° Okay, ¡° Kakuzu said as he turned around and left. He was in a good mood. Although the boss coming with him would make him split the bounty but this is way better than getting blacklisted.


    In the information, it was said that there are are least 100 of ninjas under Danzo''s command. With such a number even he wasn''t sure of capturing Danzo if he wanted to escape. After all for a man who could be called the darkness of Konoha, he may have many escape techniques.


    After Kakuzu left the room descended into silence until a woman¡¯s voice sounded, ¡° What do you think about this Nagato ¡°


    Nagato looked at the side and saw Konan appearing from the shadows. Her usual cold indifferent face suggests that the earlier conversation was just trivial but the pressure coming out of her tells another story.


    ¡° we will wait for now and check whether the information the black market provides is true or not, ¡° Nagato said as he looked at the raining sky from the window.


    ¡° I will go and confirm the intelligence by myself, ¡° Konan said quickly.


    Nagato hesitated for a moment before he finally agreed. ¡°Okay but be careful, our objective is to investigate and not attack. ¡°


    Konan nodded as she said, ¡° I know we can¡¯t let that bastard escape like last time". And with her words, she disappeared into a pile of paper.


    ¡° Yes, Danzo Shimura you shall know pain,¡± Nagato said as a coldness flashed through his eyes. Just like Konan he also wanted to rush there and kill Danzo once and for all but he couldn''t do that.


    Now that he controls the Land of Rain he can¡¯t let his decisions affect the land. What''s more, they cannot allow Danzo to escape like last time.


    .


    .


    .


    Kiyomi gulped as she nodded like an obedient chicken. The reason why she was shocked is actually not because of the blood refining method as the Uchiha clan refined theirs instinctively after they unlocked the Sharingan. The part why she was so shocked is because of what is written in this book.


    This book had many details and descriptions of the blood refining process so thoroughly that one would be able to learn it easily. Reading this one would be able to improve their bloodlines no matter how much purity they held. For Izanami to write such thorough explanations she would need to do a lot of research. And for this research, she needs experimental subjects.


    From what Kiyomi could tell at least a hundred human experimental subjects were used. And this is the count she could get from reading the first few pages as there were various examples of how to explain each process that went wrong.


    ¡® It seems like second aunt¡¯s death broke Aunt''s sanity after all. After all if that person was there Aunt Izanami would never do human experiments even if the humans were criminals themselves ¡® Kiyomi thought as she stored the booklet and other stuff away. She would review them more thoroughly later.


    ¡°Is that all? ¡° Kiyomi asked as she looked at Izanami.


    ¡°You brat you should be satisfied with the gifts I gave you. Don¡¯t be greedy ¡° Izanami said as she flicked Kiyomi on the forehead.


    Kiyomi just stuck out her tongue and disappeared in a flash. She left just like that.


    ¡°Hmph ungrateful girl, ¡°Izanami said but her she had no anger in voice. Instead, there was a trace of sadness in them. She knew why Kiyomi ran away like that. After all, remembering that person even if it was just a thought was enough for Izanami who could read minds to remember the dark past she had.


    Just like Kiyomi said if that person was there Izanami would have never even dared to conduct human experiments. After all, she really didn¡¯t like Izanami doing such stuff.


    ¡° Hinami I really miss you ¡° Izanami murmured as a tear drop came down her face. She previously thought she never be able to meet with her as she couldn¡¯t find her soul even when she took over the pure land. But Kiyomi¡¯s situation gave her some new hope. The hope of seeing her best friend and lover again.


    Celebrating 1 Year on Patreon!


    To mark this special occasion, I¡¯m offering a 45% discount for all free members.


    This discount applies to the Fallen Angel, Demon God, and God of Death tiers.


    Discount Code: 04524


    If you¡¯d like to read up to 15 advanced chapters, consider joining my Patreon for exclusive early access.


    Join here: /Nauty_Manu


    Thank you for your support over the past year¡ªI truly appreciate it!

 101: A Long Time ago

    101: A Long Time ago


    Long ago there was a time when chakra was limited to a few people except for a small village. The reason why this village is special is because this village is the home to the Ninshu religion headed by the famous Sage of Six Paths Hagoromo O?tsutsuki.


    Years had passed since the catastrophe that engulfed the world. With the help of his brother, Hagoromo managed to seal away their mother on the Moon. After that, he took the role of spreading and teaching the wonders of chakra while the younger brother took the responsibility of monitoring the seal.@@@@


    Ninshu was the name of the religion Hagoromo decided as he did his duty. For years he traveled all over the world spreading his teachings and helping those poor souls who suffered due to his mother¡¯s rule.


    After a few years of traveling, he finally settled down in a small village. He got married and had three kids.


    The oldest inheriting his father''s eyes was a genius who perfected his father''s ways creating many new techniques that use chakra and help the daily lives of the villagers.


    The second son inherited his father''s special constitution, although not as much of a genius as the first, was a genius in his own way. His strength lies not in power but in the ability to bring people together. He was like a social butterfly that everyone knew and loved dearly.


    The third who was the youngest of all of them was a girl who could be considered the oddball in the family. She has not inherited anything from her father making any of her efforts pale in comparison to her siblings.


    But in this era, this is expected as women are not treated very equally. So even when she didn¡¯t inherit anything no one discriminated against her as they didn¡¯t have any expectations to begin with.


    This led to the girl feeling quite dejected. Even though the adults didn¡¯t bully or do anything mean to her she always felt she was being treated badly.


    Every time she accomplished something no one would praise her as her older siblings were bringing in results way better than what she could do. And to top it all off every adult wanted her to behave like an ordinary lady and just be a trope for her future husband.


    Although the girl wanted to lash at these adults she couldn¡¯t as this is the norm in this era. Daughters are expected to behave and be obedient to their husbands and be competent enough to look after children and the elderly.


    If it was any normal girl she would have grown up to be a lady just like the elder wanted her to be. But how could Izanami who lived her first life in the 20th century accept living a boring life like that?


    What¡¯s more, as a transmigrater she had her own pride. How could she be a nobody while her two brothers live the life they were destined for?


    When Izanami was just 10 years old their family was visited by Hamura and his family who lived on the moon.


    Hamura Otsutsuki has two children. The oldest was a boy named Hiyashi and the youngest was the girl named Hinami.


    Both of them are similar to Indra and Ashura inherited their respective parent''s genes perfectly. The oldest inherited Hamura''s talent in taijutsu while Hinami inherited the sealing talent.


    At a young age, Hinami¡¯s talent in sealing arts was second to none. So when she saw some seals she couldn''t help but get curious.


    And this curiosity was what led to Izanami being discovered.


    ***


    Celebrating 1 Year on Patreon!


    To mark this special occasion, I¡¯m offering a 45% discount for all free members.


    This discount applies to the Fallen Angel, Demon God, and God of Death tiers.


    Discount Code: 04524


    If you¡¯d like to read up to 15 advanced chapters, consider joining my Patreon for exclusive early access.


    Join here: /Nauty_Manu


    Thank you for your support over the past year¡ªI truly appreciate it!

 102: The Dream

    102: The Dream


    ¡° Hey, what are you doing with all those rats? ¡° A girl who was about 8 years old shouted as she held her finger.


    The girl had long black hair and white eyes that would honestly scare someone if they were caught off guard. The girl wore a white kimono that had floral patterns all over. She looked like a princess from another world.


    ¡° Huh what are you talking about? ¡° Izanami said as she activated the emergency seals she placed. The containers that were filled with various test subjects suddenly began to distort and disappear.


    What Izanami used is a space distortion seal that has a function similar to Kamui, except the fact that one cannot access the stuff that was caught up in the distortions. Think of it as banishing some items forever.


    This is the self-destruct function Izanami created in case she was found again. She knew her father wouldn''t poke in her room, so the only person who could even have a slim chance of catching her is Ashura.


    But with all of the evidence being removed, Izanami was confident in her ability to escape away.


    ¡° Hey, what did you just do? Where did you send those poor guys? ¡° Hinamai shouted as she looked around. Although she is a sealing genius, she has still not learned many sealing jutsus that have space properties.


    ¡° Hmph I have no idea what you are talking about, ¡° Izanami said as she looked away while whittling.


    ¡° You ..¡± Hinami was so angry she was at a loss for words. She never saw someone this shameless.


    ¡°Oh, and before I forget, get the hell out of my room. ¡° Izanami said as she kicked Hinami out of her room like she was some garbage.


    ¡°No, I¡¯m not moving an inch from this place until you tell me what you were doing with those innocent animals, ¡° Hinami said stubbornly.


    ¡°Like I said earlier, I have no idea what you are talking about, ¡° Izanami said as she rolled her eyes in annoyance. She was pondering about activating her emergency escape seals to escape this annoying girl.


    ¡°You...I¡¯m going to tell Uncle Hagoromo about this. ¡° Hinami had enough of this and was about to go and complain when she suddenly found out that she couldn¡¯t move her feet. She tried to look down but found that she couldn¡¯t see her body at all.


    ¡°You little girls, like, shouldn¡¯t go around poking at other people¡¯s businesses. I was going to let you go since you looked like a brat with too much curiosity, but you just had to make things difficult for me. ¡° Izanami said in a cold tone.


    The reason why Hinami couldn¡¯t move was because she was now under Izanami¡¯s Jutsu Shadow of Medusa. This jutsu is her own creation after she took inspiration from the shadow imitation technique from the Nara clan.


    While Izanami was lost in her research, Hinami, whom she totally ignored, looked at her with confusion.


    Hinami couldn''t understand this person who changed her mood every so often. Earlier she was like a shameless person, and in the next second she turned into an emotionless killer, and now she had the look of a refined scholar.


    And although Hinami was terrified, her curiosity got the better of her. From that day, she would sneak in from time to time to check on this mysterious cousin of hers.


    At first Izanami was annoyed at this as Hinami would often come to annoy her with her sense of justice, but gradually Izanami got used to her presence.


    Gradually, Hinami managed to become Izanami''s first best friend and become the lock that is restraining her sanity.


    ¡° Remember Izi, never lose your kindness.¡±


    Izanami suddenly jolted awake from her sleep. She wiped away the sweat that gathered on her face.


    ¡° Haaaa it was all a dream, ¡° she mumbled as she lay on the bed. She would have never thought that the girl who sneaked into her lab would one day be able to restrain her research.


    This is because in pursuit of activating her bloodline, Izanami was on the verge of going on a path of no return.


    Had it not been for Hinami, she would have become a second Orochimaru or something even worse.


    ¡° Sigh ¡° Thinking about the past, Izanami sighed again. She wasn¡¯t proud of her past self, but she wouldn¡¯t change her actions even if she went back to the past. For her, gaining strength that surpassed her two brothers was the biggest priority.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 103: Throw this man into the Prison

    103: Throw this man into the Prison


    ~ The Hokage Office Konoha ~


    Tsunade was reviewing some documents like usual when she suddenly looked towards the window with a sharp gaze. She was about to call her Anbu guards when she felt the familiar chakra signature which made her calm down.


    Soon the window was opened and a man jumped right into the Hokage Office.


    The man was a tall and well-built man in adulthood with fair skin. He had a wart on the left side of his nose and waist-length, spiky white hair that was tied back into a ponytail, with two shoulder-length bangs framing his face. There were red lines under his eyes. His attire consisted of a green short shirt kimono and matching pants, under which he wore mesh armor that was visible at his wrists and ankles. He wore a forehead protector with the kanji for "oil¡± on his forehead.


    ¡° Hey Tsunade, did you miss me? ¡° the man who is known as Jiraiya, one of the legendary Sannins said with his iconic smile.


    Tsunade didn''t say anything, She just snapped his fingers, making three Anbu ninjas appear in the room.


    And ignoring Jiraiya¡¯s questioning look she ordered, ¡° Take Jiraiya to the Police department and lock him up for not following the Hokage''s orders. I will decide his punishment after I finish all this work .¡±


    ¡° Yes Hokage sama ¡° the anbu ninjas bowed as they dragged away the stunned Jiraiya who was still comprehending what just happened.


    ¡° Wait wait Tsunade please stop joking. ¡° he shouted anxiously as he looked at Tsunade.


    ¡° Well, then you should have thought about this before ignoring my orders to come a week earlier. Did you really think I was kidding when I specifically t gave you that time limit? ¡° Tsunade snapped as she shouted in anger.


    ¡°Ah well about that ¡° Jiraiya shranked as he fumbles for an excuse. The truth is that he completely forgot about that as he found a gorgeous spot for his research. That place was a newly created popular bath house that supplies various massages for their customers.


    But the reason why it was very popular isn¡¯t only becuse of that. The staff there all beautiful people that attract various customers. He even saw many noble ladies coming there just to get their services.


    He himself got hooked on their service so he stayed there for four days straight. And the only reason why he left was becuse he had spent all of his savings on their services. The girls there were so good at their job.


    But obviously, he can¡¯t say this to Tsunade. If he really did say this being locked up in jail is the last of his worries. So for the sake of his life, Jiraiya decided to keep his silence and let the Anbu ninjas take him away.


    ¡® well, I might as well wait there until Tsunade calmed her anger and finished her work. I¡¯m sure she won¡¯t keep me in a cell for too long ¡® Jiraiya naively thought not realizing that he would come to regret his words in the near future.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° So um big sis Izanami, why are we at the police station?¡± Naruto asked as he looked at Izanami with puzzlement.


    He was just training with big bro Tengen when Izanami suddenly appeared and dragged him away from the mansion.


    And before Naruto knew it he was already in front of the police station. Although he wasn''t against skipping training he felt it was extra weird that Izanami would actually drag him away amidst the training session.


    You know she is usually very strict about this stuff, saying some heavy things about wanting to bring out the full potential for the big fight to make it more epic. No matter how many times Naruto asked about this fight Izanami would always say, ¡° You will know when it is happening ¡°


    Izanami gave a small smile as she said, ¡°Well we are here to meet an idiot sage who is still living the life as a child despite being an adult already ¡°


    ¡° Hmm isn¡¯t that person a mentally ill person, ¡° Naruto asked innocently as he imagined an old man acting like a small brat.


    ¡° Yes Naruto what you said makes perfect sense, ¡° Izanami said as she began to seriously consider this. Is Jiraiya a mentally ill person he doesn''t seem to be getting any more mature even after living all these years.


    His whole life seems to be filled with naivety and innocence and most importantly pervertness. He abandoned his three students in a cold and brutal world without leaving any safety measures for them. He was absent when his best student¡¯s wife was giving birth. And what¡¯s more, he was supposed to be the Godfather to that child.


    For all his life Jiraiya the Gallant has never been a responsible person just like a child who doesn¡¯t know anything.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 104: Tell it to the judge

    104: Tell it to the judge


    Arriving at the police station, Izanami and Naruto didn¡¯t gain any attention as Izanami was using an illusion to hide their presence. She didn¡¯t want to upset the delicate balance with her presence.


    As a mega-celebrity, everywhere Izanami walks will bring in many people, which would disturb these honest police officers, so as a responsible person, Izanami made sure to hide her presence every time she walked out of the house.


    ¡° Hmm ¡° Izanami suddenly stopped as she felt a familiar presence locking on her. Although her illusion skills were top-notch, she isn¡¯t invisible. Well, not until she gets serious.


    ¡°Fancy seeing you here, Kiyomi, ¡° Izanami said with a small smile.


    ¡°Hey, big sis Kiyomi, ¡° Naruto also joined as he greeted her. With him going around with Sasuke and the others, he was very friendly with most of his friends'' families.


    ¡°Hello, Naruto. ¡° Kiyomi greeted Naruto with a smile, but her smile turned cold as she looked at her aunt. ¡° And please do tell me why you two are sneaking into the police department. ¡°


    ¡°Hey, sneaking in is a bit of a strong word. We are just here to visit an irresponsible guardian while not bothering any police officers, ¡° Izanami defended herself immediately.


    ¡°Yeah, yeah, tell it to the judge. ¡° Kiyomi rolled her eyes as she replied. ¡°Well anyway, do whatever you want and leave quickly. I don¡¯t want to do extra work catching an intruder who would never be found, ¡° she said as she left the two of them. She had no intention of getting involved in whatever Izanami was planning to do.


    The only reason she even came here was to make sure it was really Izanami who was here and not some imposter who could replicate Izanami¡¯s chakra signature. Although this is unheard of, you can¡¯t be too careful in this world.


    After Kiyomi left the two of them, Izanami wasted no time and walked towards their destination in a hurry. She didn¡¯t want Kiyomi to come back and scold her for taking too long to finish their work.


    After a few turns, both of them arrived at the place where the police department was keeping prisoners. The reason why Tsunade sends Jiraiya here instead of Konoha¡¯s prison is because the prison cells here are more comfortable and cleaned regularly.


    And unlike the cells in Konoha prison, the captured people are kept here temporarily and would be released on the same day most of the time. So even though Jiraiya defied the Hokage¡¯s orders, Tsunade didn¡¯t want to punish him too hard. After all, imprisoning a Sanin is just asking for trouble.


    When Izanami found Jiraiya¡¯s cell, she was dumbfounded to see him taking a nap while snoring. On the floor, there were various kinds of food and novels. He even had a book to cover his face.


    If someone didn¡¯t know any better, they would think Jiraiya was here to take a bit of rest after working all day.


    Izanami sighed as she wondered whether she should just let out the Kushina on him. This guy obviously let a clone out of his cell to bring him all this stuff here, as no sane guard would allow such stuff to be brought here.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° Haaaaa ¡° Jiraiya jolted awake as he looked at his surroundings with a weary glance. His surroundings were no longer of the small prison cell he was in. Instead, it looked like he was in sewage.


    As Jiraiya was looking around, he suddenly heard the sound of footsteps. But strangely enough, no matter how hard Jiraiya tried, he couldn¡¯t find the direction this sound was coming. It¡¯s like the sound is echoing from every direction.


    Just as Jiraiya was getting nervous, he felt someone tugging at his shirt. Looking to the side, he saw a small child who looked about 6-8 years old looking at him with her innocent big black eyes.


    And just before Jiraiya could greet her, the little girl said something shocking, ¡° Jiraiya one of the legendary Sannin, you are hereby arrested for molesting a minor. ¡° And with those words, she placed two big handcuffs on him.


    ¡°Wait, I''m innocent. She said she was 18, ¡° Jiraiya said, trying to defend himself like every Lolicon out there.


    ¡°Tell it to the judge, ¡° the girl said coldly as she dragged the criminal away.


    ¡°Noooooooooooo, ¡° Jiraiya howled as he knelt on the ground in despair.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 105: The Trial Begins

    105: The Trial Begins


    ¡°NOOOOOOOO! ¡° Jiraiya screamed as he got up from his sleep. He wiped away the cold sweat that was on his face as he tried to calm himself down.


    After he was a bit calm, Jiraiya finally noticed that he was not in his prison cell. And when he recognized the place, he almost had a heart attack.@@@@


    Around him, there was nothing but water and deep darkness that seemed endless. Sitting up, Jiraiya began to observe his surroundings. It was the same surroundings that were in his dream.


    And then the sound of footsteps was heard, making Jiraiya tremble. He raised his vigilance to the max while scanning his surroundings. Soon the sound of footsteps stopped. But no matter how much he waited, there was no one.


    Just as Jiraiya was about to relax, nine golden chains sprang from the ground. Despite trying his best, Jiraiya was ultimately captured. Jiraiya tried to break free, but the more he struggled, the tighter the chains became.


    Soon the chains began to be pulled by someone. And with Jiraiya face-first on the ground, he was swiftly dragged away. Thankfully the surface was water, or else Jiraiya may have to get plastic surgery.


    After a few minutes of being dragged away, Jiraiya finally felt the chains stop moving. This allowed him to take a look at his surroundings. For the last few minutes, Jiraiya tried everything to break free from these chains. But he soon found out that he couldn¡¯t use any chakra at all.


    This made Jiraiya¡¯s options even more limited. So Jiraiya was left with no choice but to count on the possibility that Tsunade would come to help him after finding out about his disappearance. But Jiraiya held little hope about it.


    Someone who could kidnap him without even alerting him of his presence would not leave any clues for others to track them.


    ¡°Sensei, are you all right? ¡°Just as Jiraiya was thinking about this, a familiar voice called out to him.


    Jiraiya froze as he looked in the direction where the voice sounded like a broken robot. His mind was in chaos as he looked at the familiar blonde hair and blue eyes of his late student.


    ¡° Minato ¡° Jiraiya uttered the words shakily as tears came down on his face. For a second he thought he was in a genjutsu but quickly rejected that idea, as even after trying to dispel the illusion, nothing happened. And he pinched himself just to make sure this wasn¡¯t a dream either.


    ¡° Sensei ¡° Just as Minato and Jiraiya were about to have a touching reunion, someone''s shout completely destroyed it.


    Jiraiya didn¡¯t resist. He didn¡¯t even try to defend himself. He stood there, silently taking her beating without any complaint.


    What Kushina said was very reasonable. Although he didn¡¯t know what Naruto had been through, Kushina''s earlier words were more than enough for him to draw a good picture.


    It was his fault as he ignored his duties as a godfather and let his teacher take care of everything. He should have known how greedy his teacher had become for power.


    Jiraiya knew perfectly well that if his teacher really wanted, he would have stopped the rumors about Naruto. He just wanted to control Naruto after being the light in his dark world. A classic brainwashing trick.


    ¡® I should have just come over to check on Naruto instead of just asking about him through letters,¡¯ Jiraiya thought as the guilt was eating him away.


    Just then the sound of someone hitting the gavel was heard, making all three of them look in the same direction.


    In front of them, there was Izanami, who wore an imposing judge uniform that had ¡® JUSTICE FOR GOHEM ¡® written over it, sitting in a high platform and looking down at all three of them.


    ¡° Order in my court, ¡° like Izanami¡¯s words, was the law of this world. Jiraiya, Kushina, and Minato all felt their bodies being controlled. All three of them began to walk towards the seats that had their name tags on them.


    ¡° Now that everyone is seated, let this trial begin, ¡° Izanami said as she hit the gavel.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 106: This court judges you as….

    106: This court judges you as....


    There was a solemn atmosphere when everyone heard Izanami¡¯s words. Although the three of them had no idea what this is all about, as ninjas they could somewhat guess what this trial is about. So that is why they all had solemn expressions.


    ¡° What is a trial? ¡°Naruto¡¯s innocent question instantly broke the solemn atmosphere. This made Izanami, who worked very hard to create this atmosphere, almost stumble and fall.


    Izanami rubbed her temples as she explained, ¡°Well, you see, Naruto, a trial is something we do to judge whether the person who committed a crime is guilty or not. And in a trial, you are not allowed to talk unless you are asked to. "


    ¡°Oh, ¡° Naruto nodded as if he really understood everything. But his acting fooled no one; he was already sleep-talking while sleeping.


    Minato had a wry smile as he looked at his son, who was behaving very similarly to Kushina when they were young.


    While on the side, Kushina was covering her face in embarrassment. She was too embarrassed by her son¡¯s behavior. She didn¡¯t know who he inherited that behavior from.


    ¡® That¡¯s it; I need to educate him about manners after this,¡¯ Kushina thought, not realizing how hypocritical her thoughts were. Even she as an adult would often show such behavior. Especially during those high-level discussions that take hours.


    ¡° Ehem order in my court, ¡° Izanami coughed as he hit the gavel again, making everyone come to their senses. Just as everyone was about to return to the solemn atmosphere, someone else interrupted them again.


    ¡°Big sis Izanami, can you please let me down? I¡¯m beginning to get dizzy here, ¡° Kurama said with a weak voice. Although it was weak to him, the voice was very loud for others.


    Jiraiya, who was curious to see who had the audacity to interrupt this again, looked behind and saw something that made him almost stumble in fear.


    In the far corner, there was a huge Ferris wheel. But that¡¯s not what Jiraiya was scared of. It was a huge orange fox that was tied to the Ferris wheel. The poor thing was tied to the Ferris wheel while it was spinning at an alarming speed.


    ¡°Arrrggg, damn you, Kurama. ¡° Izanami had enough as he stopped with the trial play. She stood up from her seat, took off the judge''s suit she made on a whim, threw it on the ground, and ran towards Naruto¡¯s mindscape that was next door.


    Due to the technique Izanami used, Jiraiya, Naruto, and her mindscapes were brought together so she could travel through them very easily.


    ¡°Well anyway, now that all the distractions are over, let''s get this trial over with, ¡° Izanami said as she returned to her seat.


    ¡° Jiraiya with all the evidence pointed against you, this court judges you guilty for the crimes of shrinking responsibilities for Naruto after his parent''s demise. Your punishment is to teach sealing jutsu in the ninja academy for the next 10 years. In addition to that, you would be Kurama and Kushina¡¯s playmate for the next 30 minutes. ¡° Izanami said as she hit the gavel.


    ¡°I...¡± Jiraiya, hearing this, wanted to raise many questions and, most importantly, wanted to prove his innocence, but Izanami didn¡¯t give him a chance.


    She threw him towards Kurama, who had a very evil smile. He was feeling very frustrated, so playing Jiraiya would let him blow off some steam. Kushina also followed him the next second. She was also not done with him. That earlier beating was just a warm-up.


    While Jiraiya¡¯s miserable screams rang out, Minato wisely covered Naruto¡¯s ears with his hands. He knew better than anyone not to get involved with that. Truth be told, even he had some anger against his teacher, who failed to keep his responsibilities.


    So in his heart, he completely agreed with Izanami¡¯s punishment. Of course, he won¡¯t say it out loud as he didn¡¯t want to destroy the image of being the kind father in Naruto¡¯s eyes.


    Izanami, who could somewhat read Minato¡¯s thoughts, wanted to retort very badly. You know, had it not been for this world¡¯s common sense being somewhat different, Minato would be considered a mass murderer who is feared in the whole world.


    Izanami didn¡¯t even doubt that when Minato was alive, there were some adults in other hidden villages who forced their children to sleep, saying the yellow flash would come to hunt them for being naughty.


    He was that scary after all. He was the bogeyman who would make other village elites run away in fear just hearing his presence alone.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 107: Traumatized for Life

    107: Traumatized for Life


    After an hour, Izanami rescued Jiraiya from the hands of Kurama and Kushina. The poor man was about to get traumatized for life due to the excellent cooperation between Kurama and Kushina.


    Despite their usual fighting, Izanami had to admit that those two were a great team. Both of them had a great understanding of each other to the point they didn¡¯t need to speak words to convey what they were thinking.


    Izanami even guessed that if Kushina didn¡¯t die and was the Jinchuriki instead of Naruto, she would be considered the most powerful perfect Jinchuriki that was ever to exit. The degree of cooperation they managed to do in just one year is frightening.


    After she rescued Jiraiya, Izanami sent him back to his own mindscape that was next door. The poor man would probably take a deep sleep to recover his injured mind.


    After sending Jiraiya away, Izanami stopped the jutsu that was connecting all their minds together and left the police station with Naruto.


    Due to Izanami accelerating the time inside the virtual world, not much time has passed in the real world. So no one suspected that the soundly sleeping Jiraiya just had his ass handed by two crazy redheads.


    ....


    After they secretly left the police station, Izanami took Naruto on a shopping spree. Since the time for the clan kids to join the class is coming up, Naruto needed to buy some stuff for school.


    Previously, the ninja school only focused on teaching the commoner students the basic and common sense of this world. Things that may be taboo and such. Since they were mostly lectures, Naruto didn¡¯t need anything other than a notebook and a pencil.


    But with the arrival of the clan kids, the ninja school will finally start teaching them the real stuff like map drawing, tracking, survival techniques, taijutsu, ninjutsu, chakra control, and many more.


    And for these subjects, you need to buy some stuff, or else it will be very awkward during the whole lesson. After all, this isn¡¯t like modern schools where you can share the textbooks with everyone.


    This is particularly relevant for the upcoming sealing class that Jiraiya will be teaching. Izanami was confident that Jiraiya would follow her instructions and not disregard her judgment. Why do you ask? Well, for one, she placed a sealing tag on him; if he ever tried to back down, he would feel unimaginable pain anytime he saw a beautiful woman. Second, she had previously instructed Tsunade to let him choose the punishments of whether teaching in the ninja school or cleaning the public roads all over Konoha.


    So unless Jiraiya has some masochistic fetishes, he would definitely choose to become a teacher.


    ¡°Ahhhhhhh. ¡° Jiraiya¡¯s screams rocked the entire hallway the next second, making Fugaku shiver.


    Since the prison was built with soundproof materials, any sound should be muffled. And for Jiraiya¡¯s screams to be heard even here speaks volumes of the suffering he is facing under Tsunade¡¯s hands.


    Thankfully he made all the guards leave early, or else they would all rush inside to check the situation and get caught up in the aftermath of Tsunade¡¯s wrath.


    Jiraiya¡¯s screams went on for the next few minutes before they stopped. There was only silence that even made Fugaku wonder whether Tsunade had accidentally killed Jiraiya. Just as Fugaku was about to steel his resolve to go and check, he heard the sound of footsteps.


    From the darkness, Tsunade came walking. And in her hands, she was dragging the lifeless corpse. Oh, no, wait. It was still Jiraiya, although he was still breathing; it was just he was beaten to the point where no one could recognize him.


    ¡° I will be taking him since his sentence is over; you send someone to burn those filthy magazines in that cell. ¡° Tsunade said with a commanding tone. She didn¡¯t wait for Fugaku¡¯s reply as she walked out of the police Station.


    ¡°Yes, Hokage-sama. I will do it at once, ¡° Fugaku said with a stiff face and bowed his head until Tsunade left. Then, he raised his head and wiped away the cold sweat that had gathered on his face.


    For the first time in his life, he was very scared of someone other than Kushina, the school thug who is also known as the Red Hot-Blooded Habanero.


    Well, both of them are women who have blood from the Uzumaki clan, so this is an obvious result.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 108: Naruto’s Guardian

    108: Naruto¡¯s Guardian


    Jiraiya had some very strange dreams. No, calling them a nightmare was more suitable. In his first dream, he was caught by a younger girl who was dressed in an FBI uniform for assaulting a minor. In his second dream, he was put on trial by that same girl and was beaten to a pulp by the joint effort of Kushina and the nine tails. In his third dream, Tsunade, for unknown reasons, continued to beat him, adding to the terrifying experience.


    Well, the third dream might have actually happened as soon as Jiraiya regained his consciousness; he found out that he was in a hospital bed. Looking at the side, he saw Tsunade reading some reports while sitting next to the window.


    Sensing his gaze, Tsunade looked up from her report and looked at him calmly. ¡° I see that your bones are tougher than ever, ¡° she said as she put the reports down and stood up.


    Jiraiya could only smile wryly at her words. The reason he has some tough bones is because he was beaten by Tsunade for his whole life. Like they say, if you want to improve something, you gotta break it and rebuild it continuously.


    ¡°Well, I say you sure have some guts, Jraiya. Not only did you go out of your cell, but you even dared to go buy some porn magazines, ¡° Tsunade said with anger.


    ¡°Wait porn magazines. ¡° Jiraiya, who heard what she said, immediately got up despite the pain in his body.


    ¡°Yeah, don¡¯t worry; I destroyed that filth before taking you out of that cell. I didn¡¯t want Sannin''s reputation to be destroyed because of your pervertedness,¡± Tsunade said as if the three Sannins actually had any decent reputation left.


    If Izanmi were here, she would have started a 1-hour-long speech on how much the Konoha Sannin¡¯s reputation is in Japan, which has almost every detailed record about the important people in every hidden village.


    One is a snake who goes after the bodies of boys with red eyes. The other is a pervert who likes to write porn while peeing in the women¡¯s bathroom. And lastly is the fat sheep who managed to gamble away all of her clan wealth in just 6 years.


    And in the ninja world, these three are what they call the three legendary Sannins who got their butt kicked by Hanzo, who only wanted to humiliate them for their defeat.


    Well, the three students are just like their perverted gay teacher, who is very greedy and has a control freak nature. The apple doesn¡¯t fall far from the tree after all.


    "Hey, Tsunade, don''t slander me like that. I didn''t buy any porn magazines at all. I just went out of the cell to get something to eat because I was hungry," Jiraiya immediately defended himself.


    "Is that why you beat me up?" he suddenly realized as he looked at Tsunade in shock.


    ¡° Yeah of course I had to teach you a lesson. Do you even realize how much of a scandal it would have become if you were caught with those filthy magazines? The village just recovered from what Sensei did, and I don''t want to go through another storm because of you, ¡° Tsunade said angrily.


    You know if the person who did it was someone other than Jiraiya, Tsunade would have killed them for the offense. Sneaking out of prison is one thing, but do you have to come back while bringing those filthy magazines? Isn¡¯t this basically slapping the police department and, much worse, the Hokage¡¯s Authority?


    Just thinking of the consequences, Tsunade got angry. Had Jiraiya not been bandaged all over, she would have beaten him up again.


    ¡°Hey, Tsunade You really need to believe me. I really didn¡¯t buy those magazines. I just bought some food and some novels, ¡° Jiraiya said while he was almost broke down crying. He didn¡¯t even know such magazines actually existed in this world.


    If he had known it, he would have brought it during his travels, where he could enjoy himself to the fullest. He wouldn¡¯t need to read some novels to imagine the scene if he could see it with his own eyes.


    Tsunade narrowed her eyes as she looked at Jiraiya. Although Jiraiya isn¡¯t exactly innocent, it seems he wasn¡¯t the one who brought those porn magazines.


    ¡® Wait now that I think about it, did Konoha have such a magazine?¡¯ Tsunade wondered as she began to think about it. As far as she knew, such magazines were not something you could find other than in Japan.


    ¡®Wait, Japan.¡¯ Tsunade suddenly realized where those magazines came from. Unlike in Konoha or any other ninja village, Japan is what Jiraiya would call ¡® Very Cultured ¡®. There you can find various such magazines if you look carefully. And the magazines Tsunade found were the rarest kind, featuring big blonde big boobs girls.


    ¡° Damn that Izanami, ¡° Tsunade cursed as she finally realized what really happened. Izanami must have placed those magazines in Jiraiya¡¯s cell when he was asleep.


    ¡° Hmm who is Izanami? Wait, why does that name sound familiar? ¡° Jiraiya, who heard Tsunade¡¯s words, frowned as he began to think deeply about it.


    ¡°Hey Jiraiya, did you meet anyone during the time you were in your cell? For example, a little girl who has black hair and black eyes and wears a white kimono. ¡° Tsunade asked just to be sure.


    Hearing her description, Jiraiya suddenly began to remember the devil girl in his dream. He began to tremble as he remembered what she did in the dream.


    Seeing Jiraiya tremble like this, Tsunade already got her answer. Izanami once told her that she has this weird skill that allows her to manipulate the memories of each person she meets. If that person didn''t have her permission, then they wouldn''t be able to remember her face no matter what.


    Tsunade looked at the shivering Jiraiya and asked, "Jiraiya, what did that girl Izanami tell you?" She was very curious about what he went through to get this scared.


    Jiraiya hesitated a bit before he spoke about everything in his dream. Of course, he kept the part of him acting like a lolicon to avoid the embarrassment and punishment.


    After hearing his story, Tsunade had only one thing to say, ¡° You honestly deserve that beating. ¡°


    ¡° Well..¡± Jiraiya didn''t know what to reply. Honestly, he himself knew he kind of deserved that beating for being irresponsible, but he still felt the punishment was too brutal.


    " Well, Jiraiya, as Izanami told you, you should obey and become the ninja academy''s sealing instructor," Tsunade said after a sigh.


    ¡°What? No way. I''m way too busy to take care of a bunch of kids every day. ¡° Jiraiya immediately protested. He had many duties to consider than teaching some brats.


    ¡°This is not negotiable, Jiraiya. For your own sake, you should obediently accept the punishment Izanami gave you, ¡°Tsunade said coldly.


    Jiraiya wanted to argue, but seeing Tsunade this serious, he swallowed his words back. A smart man knew when to back down.


    ¡° Just who is that girl Izanami? Tell me, Tsunade, why do you seem to obey her? " Jiraiya asked after a sigh.


    Tsunade thought about it for a bit and answered, ¡°Well, she is Naruto¡¯s legal guardian. ¡°


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 109: Izanami is a Saint

    109: Izanami is a Saint


    ¡°WHAT? " Jiraiya screamed as he asked in shock. He looked at Tsunade as if she was crazy.


    ¡° How could that be? wasn''t I supposed to be...?¡± Jiraiya wanted to complain, but he stopped mid-sentence as he realized his own words.


    ¡° HMPH, at least you are aware of your own responsibilities. ¡° Tsunade snorted as she let down her raised fist. Had Jiraiya continued, she was going to beat him up regardless of his injuries.


    ¡° How did it happen?¡± Jiraiya asked as he took a deep breath and calmed down.


    ¡° Well it''s a long story, ¡° Tsunade sighed as she thought about when to start.


    ¡° Well, I should first start by introducing who Izanami really is. ¡° Tsunade spoke, to which Jiraiya listened attentively.


    ¡° Izanami is a great sage. In fact, she is the first human sage. ¡° Tsunade said, making Jiraiya for a moment consider Tsunade was fooling him. But looking at her serious face, he realized what she said was 100% true.


    This revelation made Jiraiya feel his worldview crash. Unlike Tsunade, he knew many things about sages and great sages due to him reading some books from the archives at Mount Myo?boku.


    A sage is a person who has perfected sage mode. But a great sage is a person who became one with sage mode. In other words, they are always in sage mode and have no time limit to their sage mode. This made them, in theory, immortal, as they are constantly able to regenerate and have a very long lifespan.


    For example, the Great Toad Sage is said to have been alive since the era of the Sage of Six Paths.


    ¡° And what''s more, Izanami is actually the founder of the World Bank, which makes her our loan shark. ¡° Tsunade continued, describing the severe financial crisis they were facing. She didn''t hide anything and began to tell Jiraiya about the debt they owed to Izanami.


    As Tsunade was talking about the village debt, Jiraiya felt as if his worldview had begun to crumble again. Although he is called the legendary Sannin, he always lives a rather modest lifestyle. So hearing about the amount that the village owes made Jiraiya just for a second run away in fear. That amount is way too much.


    So by the time Tsunade finished speaking, Jiraiya could only say, ¡° The World Bank is really a saint for letting us still keep Konoha running for all these years. ¡°


    ¡°Well, ¡° Tsunade wanted to retort, saying that this is just one of Izanami¡¯s schemes to take control over Konoha, but looking at it in another way, Jiraiya¡¯s were also quite true. If it was Tsunade, even she would have kicked out everyone from Konoha to get her money.


    ¡® No what am I even thinking? How could Izanami be a saint? I¡¯m sure she must have made some moves so the teacher and the others didn¡¯t get informed about the debt before it was this high. I mean, how could someone miss such an astronomical amount while running this village for more than 30 years? Tsunade quickly dispelled her thoughts as she came back to reality. For a moment there, she was led astray by that stupid jiraiya. Thinking of this, Tsunade glared at Jiraiya hatefully, making him take a step back from fright.


    ¡®Why is she angry all of a sudden? Is it something I said? Jiraiya wondered as he readied himself to jump out of the building in case Tsunade really tried to hit him.


    ¡°Sigh, our conversation went sidetracked. Well anyway, the official reason Izanami became Naruto¡¯s legal guardian is because our dear teacher had touched Naruto¡¯s inheritance and emptied it. This made it impossible for the World Bank to cover Minato¡¯s loans, so under their law, Naruto, as an orphan, would be under their care. And when he is an adult, he will pay off the debts by working for them for free. ¡° Tsunade said plainly.


    ¡°The official, ¡° Jiraiya asked as he paid attention to these words.


    ¡°Yes, the real reason why Izanami is Naruo¡¯s guardian is because his parents appointed her with the role since some godfather failed to do his duties for the last 4 years, ¡° Tsunade said, looking at Jiraiya with obvious anger and disappointment.


    Jiraiya looked away in shame. He has no way to refute her claims. He also realized that what he might have seen must not have been a dream. Well, maybe the first one must be a dream.


    ¡° So Kushina and Minato are still alive, ¡° he asked just to make sure of his guess.


    ¡°Well, although I don''t know the real details, from what I know, they have their souls inside Naruto''s seal, making them able to communicate with Naruto through his dreams or when he actively tries to enter his mindscape. ¡° Tsunade said. She didn¡¯t get much information as Izanami was very tight-lipped about this.


    ¡° I see, ¡° Jiraiya said as he just looked out the window. His mind was a total mess. And desperately needs some time to sort out his thoughts.


    ....


    While Jiraiya and Tsunade were talking at the hospital, Izanami finished her shopping trip with Naruto and arrived back at their mansion. On hers and Naruto¡¯s hands were many bags full of various stationery that Naruto would need for the upcoming week in school.


    The one who came to greet them at the door was none other than Rin, the kitty cat who is called the Cat Princess in the Uchiha District.


    Maybe it was because her body was made by Izanami or because of Rin¡¯s kind nature; she was nominated by the Cats who worked with the Uchiha clan when she first went there due to nostalgia. According to them, she is the perfect princess who has the divine blood of their ancestor.


    Of course, the girl refused the title, but as time went on and due to the cat''s insistence, she ultimately gave in. And from that day, she would spend most of her day in the Uchiha District doing princess stuff that she refused to explain.


    ¡°Welcome home, Lady Izanami, Naruto, ¡° Rin greeted them with her ever-kind smile.


    ¡°Hey Rin, haven¡¯t seen you in a while, ¡° Izanami greeted Rin while Naruto ran to hold her. Among all the animals/reborn people, Rin was the closest person to Naruto.


    Yahiko was too ugly, while Kaguya and Sakumo were very reserved and wouldn¡¯t play with Naruto. So Naruto¡¯s playmate became Rin, who didn¡¯t mind spending time with him.


    ¡°Yes, I was a bit busy these days, ¡°Rin said as she nestled in Naruto¡¯s arms. After living as a cat for more than 8 years, she got used to such treatment.


    ¡°So mysterious, ¡° Izanami chuckled as she waved her finger to levitate the bags that Naruto dropped in order to hold Rin.


    ¡°Why are you not using a storage device to store all those bags? ¡°Rin asked curiously. Izanami gave everyone except Naruto their own storage artifacts, so Rin was curious as to why she wasn¡¯t using her own one.


    Izanami smiled and replied, ¡°Well, I wanted to get the feeling of shopping in the truest sense. ¡°


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 110:The customized course

    110:The customized course


    The next day in the early morning, Naruto was called to the training field in the backyard by Izanami. Although he was very sleepy, Naruto walked towards the training area while yawning constantly.


    Opening the door, Naruto found that Izanami was already inside. Next to her, there was a barrel full of scrolls.


    ¡°Good morning, big sis Izanami, ¡° Naruto greeted Izanami while yawning. Although he slept early yesterday, he was still a bit tired. Yesterday his parents doubled his training with them in the sealed space. They didn¡¯t stop until he was mentally drained. Well, he was allowed to watch a movie afterward with his parents, so he isn''t complaining.


    ¡° Well let''s first have you fully woken up, ¡° Izanami said as she snapped her fingers.


    The very next second, a ball of water appeared above Naruto and splashed water all over him. And before Naruto could exclaim in shock, a gust of warm wind passed by him and dried his clothes instantly.


    ¡° There that ought to wake you up, ¡° Izanami said with a chuckle. But all she got was an annoyed glare from Naruto.


    Ignoring his glares filled with resentment, Izanami continued, ¡° Well Naruto, as you may have heard yesterday, you will have a new sealing teacher at the ninja academy. ¡°


    ¡°You mean the white-haired old man who was beaten by Mom and Kurama yesterday? ¡° Naruto thought about it and asked.


    ¡°Yes, that¡¯s the guy. ¡° Izanami nodded her in confirmation. After thinking about it, she asked, ¡° Do you know why he was punished yesterday? ¡°


    ¡° Umm ¡°Naruto nodded and said, ¡° Yes Mom explained everything to me. ¡°¡± Yesterday his mother was not satisfied with the punishment that the white-haired old man had and was constantly cursing at him from time to time. From those curses, Naruto could make out the details.


    ¡° Good although I will still give you a brief summary. In short, that man is your godfather who should have been your legal guardian before I came. But as you may have already noticed, he failed to do his duties and was out of the village for many years. And yesterday he had to face your mother¡¯s wrath because of that mistake.


    But although he is very irresponsible, don¡¯t misunderstand him, Naruto. Jiraiya is not a bad person. I¡¯m sure he has never considered intentionally harming you, but that¡¯s just the way he is. In fact, that fool Jiraiya could be called an adult who has the mind of a child. ¡° As Izanami began to scold Jiraiya, Naruto, who was forcibly awakened, began to feel his eyelids becoming more and more heavy.


    Just as he was on the verge of mastering the secret art of sleeping during a conversation, he was once again drowned in water and dried the next second.


    ¡°Ehem, as I was saying, since Jiraiya had done such injustice to you, it is only fair that you have some revenge of your own, ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Naruto with a smile.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    While Izanmi was having this conversation with Naruto in the real world, a similar conversation was going on in his mindscape.


    ¡°What do you mean by this lady Izanami? ¡° Minato, who heard everything, asked as he looked at the spiritual Izanami, who was relaxing on top of Kurama. And the said fox was currently in a heated battle with Kushina.


    And no, they aren¡¯t fighting in the real sense. Both of them are just using the new video game console Izanami introduced to them. And boy, are these too good. They just needed a few minutes to get familiar with the rules, and boom, two professional players were born.


    ¡°What are you talking about, Minato? ¡° Izanami asked as she raised an eyebrow. Although she appeared clueless, the playful smile on her face said something otherwise.


    ¡°Why are you instigating Naruto against teacher Jiraiya? ¡° Minato asked. Although he was very disappointed by his teacher¡¯s behavior, he still respected Jiraiya. As Izanami said, Jiraya was like an adult with the mind of a child.


    So even though he is irresponsible, Minato knew perfectly well that Jiraiya didn¡¯t have any prejudice against Naruto. Even Kushina in her anger knew this. If Naruto was really threatened in front of him, Jiraiya would have protected Naruto without any hesitation.


    Knowing this, Minato didn¡¯t want Naruto to hate Jiraiya. Jiraiya was still his godfather after all.


    Seeing Minato¡¯s worries, Izanami sighed and said, ¡° You know you are taking this whole conversation too seriously. I have no interest in making Naruto hate Jiraiya. The reason I¡¯m saying all this is to motivate him. ¡°


    ¡°Motiuvate him, ¡° Minato asked in puzzelment.


    ¡°Yeah, the lesson I will teach Naruto is about sealing arts. And knowing how much Naruto hates studying, I figured he would definitely lose interest in seals very easily. So I decided to teach him in a more different way. ¡° Izanami said with a smile.


    ¡°And that is? ¡° Minato asked, getting a bad feeling about where this conversation was going.


    ¡° The most practical and efficient way to motivate Naruto is teaching him how to prank others. Especially those villagers who have more than enough free time to become practice targets, ¡° Izanami said with a smile that almost split her face. She looked like a devil who is about to break free from her restraints.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡°Pranks? ¡° Naruto asked with eyes shining. He was very interested.


    ¡°Yes, since I take it you would be bored while learning sealing arts so, I created this special pranking course, especially for you. ¡° Izanami said as she took one of the big scrolls from the barrel next to her and handed it to Naruto.


    Naruto unfolded it and began to read its content. Due to Izanami¡¯s and Nanami¡¯s influences, Naruto at least knew how to read and write at an early age. Well, he had to, or else he would be forced to run 10 laps around the house for being stupid. And just running one lap is very tiring enough that he is almost out of breath.


    Reading the bold lines that said, ¡° 30 pranking seals for beginners, ¡° Naruto couldn¡¯t help but have a very serious expression. Even as a seasoned prankster who had pranked the villagers for 2 years, Naruto had to say that these pranks mentioned here are simply genius.


    And what¡¯s more, even though he has no knowledge of seals, even Naruto felt he could learn these few seals very easily.


    Well, of course, he would find these seals easy after all; all these seals were custom-designed by Izanami herself to be the simplest but most effective. Although Izanami may not look like it, in her youth she was the one who even the great Sage of Six Paths feared. Because no one would know how they were pranked by her.


    Even during a serious fight, you may get yourself hit by a flying pie that appeared out of nowhere.


    ¡° So Naruto, what do you say? Do you want to learn these seals and try them on your new sealing instructor? ¡° Izanami asked, tempting him.


    *****


    Hey everyone!


    My sister''s birthday is coming up, and I''m feeling a bit cheerful. So, to celebrate this occasion, I''m offering a special discount for my free members who want to upgrade to paid membership!


    Discount code: AE22C


    Don''t forget to wish my sister a Happy Birthday!


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 111: The Teacher’s first day

    111: The Teacher¡¯s first day


    The morning sun shined on Jiraiya¡¯s face waking him up from his sleep. Yawning Jiraiya got up from his bed. Rubbing his eyes he looked around his messy room. Since he was out of the village for a long time there are some dust here and there.


    Ignoring the messy surroundings Jiraiya walked towards the window and peered outside. From his room, he could see the outline of the ninja academy.


    ¡°Sigh, never would I have thought that I would one day become a teacher at the ninja academy,¡± Jiraiya said with a depressed sigh.


    Although he had taught students who even became the Hokage he never thought of becoming a teacher at the ninja academy.


    Unlike a Jonin instructor being a formal teacher, one must obey too many rules. After all, the kids they are teaching aren''t even ninjas.


    They are just a bunch of undisciplined brats who only know how to throw a kick or two. So it is the ninja academy teacher¡¯s responsibility to shape these brats into qualified ninjas.


    ¡°Sigh.¡° Letting out another tired sigh, Jiraiya went back to get ready for the day. He didn¡¯t want to get scolded by Tsunade for being late for his first day at work.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° Lord Jiraiya, it is a pleasure meeting you.¡° The vice principal stood up as Jiraiya entered his office. Although Jiraiya is now a new teacher at the academy, it doesn¡¯t cover up the fact he is still one of the legendary Sannins.


    This is why the vice principal, despite having a superior position, was very respectable towards Jiraiya, a normal instructor. After all, Jiraiya only needed to tell Tsunade a few words, and he would definitely be fired the next day.


    ¡°Yes, it is a pleasure to meet you too, Mr. Renji,¡° Jiraiya said with a polite smile. He had memories of this opportunistic man. From what he remembered, this guy was from the Sarutobi clan. Although he is barely a chunin, he is very good at teaching and administrative work.


    Sensei was really satisfied with his work, so this is why he was able to become the vice principal just after five years of teaching in the academy. And after this guy became the vice principal, he managed to make a ton of connections with other clans to solidify his position.


    ¡°Lord Jiraiya, first I would like to express how grateful we are to have you as one of our teachers. Especially for the Fuinjutsu course, the Fifth Hokage recently added to the curriculum.


    At first, we were troubled as we have no personnel who are skilled enough to teach the students, but with Lord Jiraiya¡¯s presence, we can be rest assured about the students'' future. ¡° Renji said with a flattering smile.


    Jiraiya just smiled at his words. Only he knew the real reason why Tsunade introduced the sealing course. At first, it was because of that Lady Izanami said it, but as time went by, she herself realized how miserable Konoha¡¯s sealing situation was.


    In the whole of Konoha, there are no more than 5 sealing masters. Two of them belong to the barrier team, one being the previous teacher of the sealing class who was very old, and lastly, there are Danzo and Jiraiya himself.


    Although there are others who also have some rudimentary knowledge of sealing arts, like Kakashi and some Hyuga clan elders, compared to sealing masters, they could only be called rubbish.


    And the funny thing is, in the hierarchy of sealing arts, being a sealing master is barely anything special. Only when someone ascends to the rank of Sealing Grandmaster can someone say that he is proficient in Fuinjutsu.


    And in all of Konoha, there is no sealing grandmaster, which makes one question how much Konoha regressed in the past years. In the past, there were numerous sealing grandmasters, such as Uzumaki Mito, Senju Tobirama, Uzumaki Kushina, and Minato Namikaze.


    In a situation like this, one could imagine the shock and urgency Tsunade felt when reality hit her hard. In the future, if there was a situation that required the help of a sealing grandmaster, then Konoha would have no other choice but to ask for foreign assistance.


    And there is no more humiliating act than that. So this is why Jiraiya was strictly ordered by Tsunade to cultivate excellent sealing experts in hopes one day one of them could break through the rank of sealing grandmaster.


    Since this is related to the survival of the village, Jiraiya had to take this mission seriously. So after some idle chatter with Renji, Jiraiya swiftly walked towards the classroom he was assigned to.


    Coming towards the door, Jiraiya couldn''t help but notice the duster that was placed over the door in a very professional manner. If it was not for him having years of experience as an information collector, Jiraiya was sure he would miss this.


    ¡°Oh, it seems kids these days are full of mischief, ¡° Jiraiya said with a chuckle. He didn''t take such pranks seriously.


    After all, in his youth he was also one of the mischievous kids in his grade. So instead of being annoyed about it, he actually preferred such kids.


    With these thoughts, Jiraiya entered the classroom. And before the duster could hit him, he caught it without even looking.


    ¡° Hello, kids, my name is Jiraiya, and I''m your...¡± Jiraiya''s introduction speech was cut short when he was suddenly assaulted by a cake that mysteriously appeared in front of him.


    The attack was so sudden that he had no time to even dodge.


    ¡°Hahahahahahahahahaha.¡° The classroom erupted in laughter as they all watched Jiraiya standing there like a statue with his whole face covered in cake.


    Jiraiya had a gloomy face as he used his hand to wipe away the cake that was stuck on his face. He looked at the classroom again and wanted to speak but before he could the duster he was holding this whole time caused a small explosion completely dying him white.


    ¡° Hahahahahahahahahahahahahaha ¡°The children tried to control their laughter, broke out laughing even more as Jiraiya was pranked twice.


    ¡°Cough, cough, I will be back in a second, ¡° Jiraiya said as he vanished from the classroom immediately.


    He was honestly a little bit scared that he would be pranked the third time if he stayed there even for a second.


    During the time when that duster exploded, he vaguely saw some seals appearing. So whoever set up those pranks was definitely a sealing art expert.


    This is why Jiraiya chose to retreat. No sane person would go to a place a sealing master had prepared for them.


    So first Jiraiya needed to go clean himself up and then come back to investigate. He was very curious as to who had the audacity and skills to prank him.


    While Jiraiya was retreating, he failed to notice one of his students having a victorious grin on his face. The said student''s blue eyes shine brightly as he witnesses his prank was very successful.


    ¡® Big sis Izanami was right, pranking is art,¡¯ Naruto said as his hands began to itch for more action.


    That day the legend of the legendary prankster that would terrorize all the ninja academy teachers was born. And that was also the day when Jiraiya''s miserable teaching career began.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 112: The Fated Meeting

    112: The Fated Meeting


    The bell rang, signaling the end of today¡¯s school. The children all rushed out of their classrooms with joy.


    Among these students, Naruto, unlike others, had a disappointed expression. He had the look of a kid who wasn¡¯t able to fully watch his favorite show due to the electricity going out in the last few minutes.


    Well, that''s exactly what happened. Just to welcome Jiraiya, Naruto set up 10 pranks in the whole classroom. Originally, Jiraiya was supposed to come back to class after wiping away the cake from his face. At that time, due to his wariness, he would be suspicious of every single thing.


    So this is why Naruto next planned to activate a delayed prank seal formation that would activate with Jiraiya at the center.


    But Naruto''s plans went down the drain when Jiraiya didn''t show up to class. This left Naruto very disappointed as he had to cancel all the traps he set up.


    ¡® Stupid Jiraiya wasting all my hard work after I went through all the trouble to wake up early this morning,¡¯ Naruto cursed in his heart as he kicked a nearby stone.


    The stone hit a nearby bush, and the next second a scream came out of the bush as Jiraiya fell down on the ground holding his crotch. That stone may have accidentally hit Jiraiya¡¯s vital spot.


    ¡°Huh.¡° Seeing Jiraiya coming out of the bush, Naruto exclaimed in surprise.


    ¡®Why did this white-haired pervert come out of the bush? And why is he clutching his crotch like that? Does he perhaps want to go to the toilet ¡® he wondered. Even though Naruto is a man himself,, he is still too young to know how dangerous it could get when something happens to that place.


    After all, with Izanami as his guardian, who dares to touch Naruto or even dare to scold him? After all, one wrong move and all the hidden yokai members may make a move on that person, erasing them from existence.


    Don¡¯t underestimate the forces of Japan, which had managed to develop itself into a mighty force under the guidance of a millennium-old monster. And what¡¯s more, the said monster also has a huge library full of knowledge from countless worlds.


    ¡°Hey, old man, are you okay? ¡° Naruto asked as he crouched down and poked Jiraiya.


    ¡° Yeah, just give me a minute, ¡° Jiraiya said with a pained expression. That stone really hit the most painful spot right at its center. So the pain was almost unbearable.


    Fortunately or unfortunately, Jiraiya had very high pain tolerance after getting beaten up by Tsunade his whole life. So Jiraiya was able to keep his consciousness.


    After a while the pain subsided, making Jiraiya sigh in relief. For a moment there he almost lost his future.


    After calming himself down, Jiraiya finally looked at Naruto. As much as he wanted to beat this brat endangering his future generation, he had to be the adult and be reasonable.


    And besides, he needs to have a serious conversation with this kid who had the audacity to prank his teacher on their first day of school.


    After he left the classroom, Jiraiya created a shadow clone to sneak into the classroom and find the mastermind.


    With his skills as a spymaster, it didn''t take much time to realize that it was Naruto all along.


    At first, he was puzzled as to how Naruto even knew Fujitsu, but remembering what Tsunade said, Jiraiya thought it was either Kushina or Minato who taught him such stuff.


    As for why he never considered Izanami, well, the reason is simple. Although she is his legal guardian, logically she has no reason to give Naruto any special care. And Jiraiya never considered the possibility of Izanami being whimsical since, as far as he knew, the older one got, the wiser and more serious they would become.


    ¡° Hey kid, what''s your name? ¡° Jiraiya asked, deciding to introduce himself to Naruto. He got this weird feeling that if he didn''t get along with Naruto, his whole life would be hell.


    ¡°Hmm, my name is Uzumaki Naruto. don''t you already know this, uncle pervert? ¡° Naruto asked with a raised eyebrow.


    Big Sis Izanami clearly said that this uncle would recognize him at a glance due to his resemblance to his father, Minato.


    ¡°Ahaha, so you knew me, huh?¡° Jiraiya said with an awkward chuckle. ¡°Well, Naruo, can you come with me for a while? I need to have a small talk with you,¡° Jiraiya asked as he gestured to onlookers who were beginning to notice them.


    No matter how much of a disappointment Jiraiya is, he is still one of the legendary Sannins. And in Konoha, his position is like one of those celebrities in the modern world. So if he stays in one place for a long time, he may get surrounded by his fans.


    ¡°Okay.¡° Naruto hesitated for a moment before agreeing. If Jiraiya were to do anything funny, he would face the super-secret technique big sis Izanami taught him.


    Jiraiya brought Naruto to the school playground. Since school time is over, the playground is completely empty. Perfect for some private talks.


    Sitting on one of the swings, Naruto asked, ¡°So, Uncle Perv, what did you want to talk about?¡°


    ¡°Well, firstly I would really like it if you could drop that weird nickname. My name is Jiraiya, the toad sage of Mount Myo?boku. The toad charmer of one of the legendary Sannins that even celestials fear. Yes, that¡¯s me, Master Jiraiya,¡° Jiraiya said with pride. He tried his best and failed miserably to appear cool.


    ¡° So pervy sage it is, ¡° Naruto said, completely ignoring Jiraiya¡¯s antics. Compared to big sis Izanami and big bro Tengen Jiraiya¡¯s introduction skills are too poor.


    Big bro Tengen would begin with his flamboyant introduction while utilizing the flashy Ninjutsu to make himself look cool. As for big sis Izanami, well, it¡¯s better not to talk about her.


    Hearing his new nickname, Jiraiya almost collapsed. He had a wry smile as he saw Naruto addressing him the same way Kushina used to call him.


    ¡®Like they say, the apple doesn¡¯t fall far from the tree,¡¯ Jiraiya inwardly thought as he gave up persuading Naruto to change his nickname. If this kid is half as stubborn as Kushina, then it is a lost cause already.


    ¡°Well, Naruto I take it that Minato and Kushina talked about me. ¡° Jiraiya asked as he sat down next to Naruto.


    Naruto shook his head and said, ¡°No, Mom and Dad didn¡¯t speak much, but big sis Izanami did tell me everything about you.¡°


    ¡° I see, so you know who I am are to you ¡° Jiraiya asked with a nervous expression. Although he doesn¡¯t it but he wishes Naruto wouldn¡¯t show any animosity towards him.


    ¡°Yes, I know you are my godfather,¡° Naruto nodded as he replied. His voice was very calm without any emotional fluctuations.


    Hearing his words, Jiraiya came in front of him and bowed deeply, ¡° I¡¯m sorry, Naruto. When you needed me the most, I wasn¡¯t there for you, leading you to suffer for three years. "


    Naruto looked at the bowing Jiraiya for a while and finally said, ¡°Well, to be honest, I am very angry at you, pervy sage. Before big sis Izanami came, I had to starve and was beaten by villagers almost every day. Sometimes I had to drink expired milk since that¡¯s the only thing the shops would let me buy. And that alone took away all my allowance. ¡°


    Hearing Naruto¡¯s past experiences, Jiraiya clenched his fists in anger. He was very angry. Angry at the villagers who dared to do such horrible things to a child, angry at his teacher who let everything happen under his watch, and lastly angry at himself for not being there to stop any of those injustices from happening.


    ¡® It seems I need to have a talk with sensei,¡¯ Jiraiya thought with a cold gaze that Naruto thankfully couldn¡¯t see due to Jiraiya still bowing his face.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    ****

 113: Unreliable Adult

    113: Unreliable Adult


    ¡° But after big sis took me in, everything changed, ¡° Naruto said as he still remembered the day he and big sis Izanami met.


    From that day, Naruto never had to suffer like he used to. Not only did Big Sis Izanami give him a place to stay and a family that cared about him.


    Granny Tsunade, Big Sis Shizune, Big Sis Nanami, Uncle Sakumo, Aunty Kaguya, Sister Rin, and Big Bro Yahiko Naruto were able to meet all of them because of Big Sis Izanami.


    ¡° I see; I''m glad you found your happiness, Naruto,¡± Jiraiya said with a relieved smile.


    Hearing his words, Naruto looked at him with surprise. From a young age, Naruto could feel the emotions of everyone he met. And from Jiraiya, he only felt sincerity. Seeing the expression on his face, Naruto remembered something Big Izanami said about Jiraiya.


    ¡° Jiraiya may be a hopeless and irresponsible adult, but Naruto, you must understand that Jiraiya is the most humane person I have ever seen. Unfortunately, that guy''s IQ is too low for him to show his kindness. ¡°


    At that time, Naruto really didn''t agree with Izanami''s words. After all, Naruto couldn''t really make himself to accept the person who is responsible for his past suffering.


    But seeing the sincere care from Jiraiya, Naruto finally realized that, like Izanami said, Jiraiya is a better man; it''s just that he is an irresponsible adult.


    Like this, both of them continued their talk. During this time, Naruto and Jiraiya found out that both of them are very similar to each other. If Jiraiya were to be Naruto¡¯s age, there is no doubt that he would have become Naruto¡¯s first-ever best friend.


    Gradually, time passed by in a flash, and the duo, who were absorbed in their conversation, failed to notice this. The sky was slowly turning dark red, signaling that the evening is here.


    ¡°So this is where you were all this time, Naruto. ¡° Both of them froze as they heard this voice. Especially Naruto, who was beginning to form sweat all over his back.


    Looking back, he saw Izanami looking at him with a smile that didn¡¯t reach her eyes. There was this dark aura that was coming out of her body that proved how angry she really was.


    ¡°You know, although I don¡¯t mind you being late for coming home, you should at least give us a reminder of where you are if you are going to be 3 hours late, ¡° Izanami said as she glared at Naruto.


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry.¡° Naruto immediately dropped to his knees as he begged for forgiveness. He didn¡¯t dare argue with Izanami as he knew his punishment would only get worse.


    ¡° Good, at least you are aware. ¡° Izanami nodded her head in satisfaction, and then she turned to the other person who was trying very hard to erase his presence. ¡° And you, Jiraiya.¡±


    Jiraya stiffened as he felt a huge pressure come down upon him. He looked at Izanami with cold sweat running down his entire face, ¡° Yyyesss..¡± He asked in a stutter.


    ¡° Allow me to formally introduce myself. I am Izanami Naruto''s legal guardian. Although I knew you were unrealizable, I didn''t think it would be to this level. ¡°


    narrowing her eyes as she asked, ¡° Shouldn¡¯t you, as the adult, know any better? Did you know that if I were an ordinary person, I would be very worried about Naruto and that I would be running all over Konoha looking for him? ¡°


    ¡°I¡¯m sorry, ¡°Jiraiya also joined Naruto as he knelt beside him. He knew it was his fault for not sending a shadow clone to inform Naruto¡¯s guardian about why Naruto was late.


    ¡° Hmph, you guys can apologize all you want, but do you really mean it? I bet you two would do the same next time, ¡° Izanami snorted as she ruthlessly stabbed the duo. She knew them too well to be fooled by their lousy apology.


    Naruto and Jiraiya looked at each other and then asked, ¡°Then what can we do to make it up to you? ¡°


    Izanami''s face lit up with an evil smile. She was just waiting for these two to ask this. She has the perfect job for these two.


    Seeing the evil smile, both Naruto and Jiraiya shivered as they had a very bad feeling about this.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ¡° So let me get this straight, you mean that these two are volunteering themselves to help me with all these documents?¡° Tsunade asked as she looked at Izanami with a questioning gaze.


    ¡°That¡¯s right, didn¡¯t you always complain that you need some more hands in your office? ¡° Izanami said with a smile.


    Tsunade looked at Jiraiya and Naruto, who had dazed expressions as they looked at the mountains of documents that were placed all over the Hokage Office.


    ¡°I can understand Jiraiya, but what would Naruto even be of help for? He is just a kid. ¡° Tsunade asked again.


    ¡°Well, that¡¯s true, but don¡¯t you need some manual labor? He can do all those jobs,¡° Izanami said as she opened her fan that she brought out from her sleeves.


    ¡°Are you sure about that? ¡° Tsunade asked with a raised eyebrow. With all the documents gathered here, one would need to at least run around the whole Hokage tower a few times at least. For a small child, that would be very tiring.


    ¡°Yeah, don¡¯t worry; these two can handle it. Am I right?¡° Izanami asked as she gave the two of them a very kind smile.


    Seeing that smile, both Naruto and Jiraiya nodded repeatedly. They didn¡¯t dare to refuse Izanami¡¯s words.


    ¡°See, both of them are okay with it, ¡° Izanami said as she turned to Tsunade again.


    Tsunade was speechless. Although she didn¡¯t know the whole story, even she could tell that these two were threatened and didn¡¯t volunteer at all.


    But thinking about it again, isn¡¯t this better? Not only would she get two hardworking workers, but she would also be able to share her pain with the two of them.


    For her, who is cooped up in her office all day alone, this would definitely be a good way to entertain herself. Nothing beats the satisfaction of someone else suffering from the same pain as oneself.


    And so, under the unwilling eyes of the desperate duo, Tsunade gave the two of them their own jobs that kept them occupied and exhausted for the whole day. Tsunade perfectly fits the description of a boss from a black company who slave-drives his employees.


    Well, on the bright side, they at least managed to finish all the documents that were placed in the Hokage Office for a whole month.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    patreon.com/Nauty_Manu


    ****

 114: Break Time is over, back to work

    114: Break Time is over, back to work


    Days went by in a flash. In these past few days, the Hidden Leaf Village had a rare time of peace. Well, if we ignore the chaos Naruto was causing in the academy, it was very peaceful. And in such a peaceful time, a storm was closing on the house where Izanami and others live.


    ¡°Mother, your vacation is over. It is time you go back to your work,¡° Nanami suddenly declared as she glared at Izanami.


    Feeling Nanami¡¯s glare, Izanami began to sweat a little. She kind of forgot about the fact that her vacation was only for 15 months.


    Well, she can¡¯t be blamed since she was having a ton of fun here. In the morning she could torment little Naruto by training him to his limit. Then after that, she would enjoy the show of Jiraiya and Naruto¡¯s prank war. Maybe it is due to how unbelievable it is, but Jiraiya still didn¡¯t think it is Naruto who is pranking him.


    Well, he can¡¯t be blamed since he doesn¡¯t know how frightening Uzumaki can get with seals. What most ordinary sealing masters consider impossible is very simple for the Uzumaki. If the original plot didn¡¯t kill them, it wouldn¡¯t be strange for the Uzumaki clan to become the strongest clan.


    ¡°Did you hear what I said, Mother?¡° Nanami¡¯s voice broke through Izanami¡¯s thoughts.


    Coming back to reality, she found that Nanami is still waiting for an answer. With a bit of unwillingness, Izanami asked, ¡° Couldn¡¯t I continue to do my job from here like I did for the past year?¡°


    ¡°No,¡° Nanami denied Izanami¡¯s request ruthlessly. ¡° Do you have any idea how many of my team members were on sick leave because of how tired they are? Almost all the documents that need your approval are very confidential and important for Japan. So they must be delivered ASAP. So most members had to run from Japan to Konoha many times each day¡°. Nanami added.


    ¡°Come on, can¡¯t we just use the postal system? This way we don¡¯t need anyone to travel between Konoha and Japan. ¡° Izanami said as she didn¡¯t want to back down yet. For her freedom, she had to fight.


    ¡°Do you even hear yourself? Using the post system to transport important documents is simply stupid. What if someone hijacked the entire system? Wouldn¡¯t all those documents be lost or even destroyed? ¡° Nanami said exasperatedly.


    The post system is a system Izanami introduced to allow people to send documents to each other. For example, you need a warrant to search a person¡¯s house, so the police department would send an application through the post system to the Administration Office, and then the Administration Office would send the warrant through the post system. This method would save time and labor and is very efficient.


    This system is something that was created taking inspiration from the Heavenly Transfer technique and Thunder God technique. Although this technique looked cool, it has a severe downside, and that is that to send documents from one place to another, you must create a permanent pathway.


    This meant that after choosing two destinations, you can¡¯t change them at all. This also meant that if one end of the pathway is occupied by another party, they would be able to get all the documents. So this is why this system is not used for delivering important and secretive documents.


    ¡°Why don¡¯t we just create a portal that would let us go to Japan directly? That way I can work whenever I want,¡° Izanami said.


    Nanami just looked at her speechlessly. She plainly said, ¡°No, that would be too much work. I won¡¯t sacrifice the precious time of my subordinates so you can be lazy ¡°


    ¡°Oh, come on, Nanami, aren¡¯t I your matriarch?¡° Izanami whined like a little girl. Wait, it should be said she is a little girl.


    ¡°No means no,¡° Nanami said, not budging. She knew if they really made that portal, then this shameless mother of hers would definitely find some excuse to slack off and run towards Konoha, where the yokai members wouldn¡¯t mobilize their whole unit to find her.


    ¡°But wouldn¡¯t it be unfair for Naruto if I left? After all, I am his guardian. ¡° Izanami tried using another tactic.


    ¡° He would be fine since he still has his friends and parents in the mindscape to keep him company. And there is Tsunade too. ¡° Nanami pointed out.


    ¡°But, but,¡° Izanami began to stutter as she began to look around, trying to find a reason to stay. Ultimately, under Nanami¡¯s intense glare, she slumped her shoulders in defeat. She knew that no matter how much she tried to argue, this stubborn daughter of hers would not change her mind.


    ¡°Arrggg, fine. I will go back in three days. Nanami, start preparing for my journey. I¡¯m going out for some business. ¡° Izanami said as she disappeared into the shadows.


    Seeing her departing figure, Nanami sighed in relief. She was very nervous and anxious during the whole conversation. Although it may look like Izanami was obeying her command, the truth is far from that.


    If Izanami was really resistant to going back, there is no way Nanami could take her back. Don¡¯t forget Japan was built by Izanami alone with her iron fists. Her commands are the laws. Others could only give suggestions; the final decision is entirely on her.


    No amount of threat could move Izanami, a millennium-old monster. And if they push their limits too much, what awaits them is death. Even Nanami, her adopted daughter, is no exception to this rule.


    ¡°Sigh,¡° Nanami sighed as she snapped her fingers. From the shadows, two yokai members appeared as they knelt on the ground.


    ¡° Go and inform Lady Luna that the Matriarch is returning to Japan in three days. Tell her to prepare a double so no one would notice the matriarch¡¯s absence in the ninja world. ¡° Nanami said as she looked at the three of them.


    ¡°Yes, Lady Nanami.¡° The two of them bowed and left the room to do their duties.


    In the past, Izanami wouldn¡¯t need someone else to replace her, as she kept a very low profile, but since her grand reveal in Konoha, various forces have been keeping an eye on her. Especially the duo of Black Zetsu and Obito.


    If Izanami went missing for a period of time, they would definitely investigate. So if they somehow found traces of Japan during the investigation, that would definitely be bad. So to avoid any mishaps, it¡¯s better to be safe than sorry.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    ~Uchiha clan clan head¡¯s house~ ~


    In the courtyard, there were Itachi and Kiyomi, who were having a very intense match of shogi. Today is a free day for both of them. Since Sasuke still hasn¡¯t come from school, both of them decided to kill time with a shogi match.


    In this shogi match, Itachi, the ever genius who is hailed as the strongest of his generation, had sweat forming on his face. Itachi may have a broader vision than most ninjas while also having excellent combat talents. But when it comes to a mind game like shogi, he is as helpless as a lamb facing a tiger.


    But thankfully his opponent is Kiyomi, who, like Tsunade, has a curse of losing. It¡¯s not that Kiyomi is not good at board games it¡¯s just that she has been very bad with shogi since she was young.


    Due to their unique circumstances, both Itachi and Kiyomi were able to keep their matches interesting to any dear audience who had the bad luck to see it.


    Just as they were absorbed in their match, a sudden darkness enveloped Itachi, swallowing him whole.


    Kiyomi, who was about to make a move, paused when she got a telepathic message from her stupid aunt.


    ¡°Sorry, Kiyomi. I will be borrowing Itachi for a while. ¡°


    ¡°Sigh, you¡¯re such a pain in the ass, Aunt,¡° Kiyomi muttered as she groaned in displeasure. She just felt she was going to win this match.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    patreon.com/Nauty_Manu


    ****

 115:The Dark Truth

    115:The Dark Truth


    Darkness¡ªthis is the only word Itachi would use to describe his surroundings. All around, he could only see darkness that even his Mangekyou Sharingan couldn''t overcome.


    Trapped in this darkness, Itachi felt a strange sense of peace. Even his Sharingan began to turn off on its own.


    Just as Itachi was one step away from achieving the state, the darkness around him began to disperse.


    When the light suddenly returned, he had to cover his eyes to adjust to the sudden brightness. When his eyes adjusted, he could finally observe his surroundings.


    Looking around, he saw that he was in front of the marketplace of the Uchiha clan. Itachi was no stranger to this place, as he often came here to buy groceries with his brother and mother.


    But this time, he felt the marketplace felt a little off. Despite the bustling, crowded streets, the atmosphere felt a little off. It was almost like the clan members were about to suffocate from pressure. This feeling was vaguely familiar.


    At first, Itachi didn''t recognize it, but after a few moments, he finally realized it. This was the same atmosphere the Uchiha clan had a year ago. No, this atmosphere is way worse than it was a year ago.


    From his point of view, he would already spot a few Anbu ninjas in plain sight. They didn''t even bother hiding the fact that they were monitoring the Uchiha clan.


    Seeing this situation, Itachi felt a chill up his spine. The way Anbu was monitoring the clan alone gave Itachi a dreadful idea of what was happening.


    ¡° I take it that you got a vague idea of what is happening, right?¡° Suddenly, a voice came from behind Itachi, startling him.


    Turning around, he saw it was Izanami who was speaking behind him.


    ¡®How did she come behind me without me even noticing her presence? ¡® Itachi thought as he kept his guard up but didn''t show anything outside.


    ¡° Is this a Genjutsu? ¡° Itachi asked Izanami. Earlier, he found that no one could see or hear him.


    ¡° Well, in a way, yes, ¡° Izanami said in a cryptic manner, making Itachi frown.


    ¡° Itachi, let me ask you a question. If someone can protect thousands by massacring a few hundred, would that man be considered an evil person? ¡° Izanami asked as she looked at the Uchiha clan.


    Itachi frowned even more as he heard that question. As someone who valued human life and loathed war, that question is very troubling.


    So after a long time, Itachi finally answered, ¡° I think that person is evil. No matter how many lives he saved, all his accomplishments were made under the corpses of hundreds. ¡°


    Although this answer would go against the usual ninja teachings of nipping the bud before they could even bloom and cause trouble but this is his honest thought.


    And besides, Itachi didn''t really attend school that long to get his mind filled with ninja values. He only attended the Will of Fire classes since those were things the ninja school taught first.


    Hearing his words, Izanami smiled and then said, ¡° Then what if there is a situation where one had to wipe out his whole clan because he needs to protect his brother? ¡°


    Although he didn¡¯t know why but when Itachi heard those words, he began to get a very bad feeling. But nonetheless, he still asked, ¡° But wouldn¡¯t the said brother be safe with his clan? ¡°


    ¡°Ha ha haha, yes, compared to some strangers, the younger brother would definitely be safer in a clan where almost everyone is family. ¡° Izanami suddenly laughed as she heard those words.


    The bad feeling Itachi had was getting stronger and stronger as he heard Izanami¡¯s laugh. But before he could ask anything, the scenery suddenly changed.


    The bustling crowd suddenly became deadly silent. The sky was filled with dark clouds, and the moon had an eerie red tint to it.


    ¡° Itachi, you should know how much hatred the village higher-ups had for the Uchiha clan. Especially the Konoha corrupt four, who want nothing but their destruction. ¡° Izanami spoke as Itachi nodded inwardly.


    As someone who had repeatedly taken on guard duty in the Hokage Office, he perfectly knew how much blind hatred the Third Hokage and his advisors had for the Uchiha clan. In the meeting room, they didn¡¯t even bother to hide it. And there is Danzo, who had repeatedly killed off various clan geniuses and harvested their Sharingans.


    ¡°But did you know, more than hatred, they are more afraid of the Uchiha clan? As one of the clans that had previously dominated the Warring States, the Uchiha is a clan that could rival a small village by itself.


    In the whole of Konoha, the Uchiha are undoubtedly the strongest in strength and financially. And unlike the Senju, they didn''t approve of Hiruzen, so they are like walking time bombs.


    This is why Hiruzen approves of any dark thing that is aimed at the Uchiha clan. He wanted the Uchiha clan to weaken enough that they would have no choice but to obey him and be his dog. ¡° Izanami said with a sarcastic smile.


    She really wondered what Tobirama would think if he saw how power-hungry his precious disciples are. To remain in power, they even weakened two of their founding clans without even considering the consequences.


    ¡° Itachi, do you want to know why the Uchiha clan had that depressing atmosphere? It is all because of Danzo and Hiruzen¡¯s doing. Danzo, using his root ninjas, made the Uchiha clan bear the malice of all the ignorant villagers, while Hiruzen would ignore or hide any contributions the Uchiha clan made to the village. With their teamwork, they made the Uchiha clan become the most hated clan in all of Konoha. ¡°


    After saying all this Izanami paused and then with a cold smile, she asked, ¡° So what, Itachi, do you think would happen in the future? The Uchiha clan is a clan that is quite prideful. But due to Hiruzen¡¯s and Danzo¡¯s actions, they are forced into a corner, so what do you think they would do next? ¡°


    Itachi trembled as he understood what Izanami was saying. He understood the truth very well. But despite this, he refused to believe it.


    Seeing Itachi¡¯s silence, Izanami shook her head inwardly and spoke the words. Itachi dared not speak, ¡° The Uchiha clan is pushed to revolt. As one of the founding clans of Konoha, how could they endure all the injustice? They all knew if they continued to stay like this, they would have no future for their clan. ¡°


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    patreon.com/Nauty_Manu


    ****

 116: Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan

    116: Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan


    ¡°No, there is no way.¡° Itachi had despair written all over his face as his mind began to think of the consequences of the Uchiha clan¡¯s rebellion.


    With this civil war, the village would be at its weakest state, making it vulnerable to all the other hidden villages that are waiting for the right chance to attack Konoha. So no matter which party won the civil war, the village would only harm the village.


    And if a war broke out, the ninja school students would be forced to graduate early, which meant that his little brother would also be forced to go to the battlefield.


    As someone who loved his brother to death, this is something Itachi absolutely cannot allow. He had been traumatized by war at a young age and didn¡¯t want his brother to go through the same experience as him.


    Just as Itachi was getting more and more restless, his mind began to calm down suddenly. This feeling was the same one he felt when he just came to this place.


    ¡° Okay, you should stop panicking already. Don¡¯t forget that this is just an illusion. The reality isn¡¯t that bleak after all. ¡° Izanami spoke as she used one of her mind-calming jutsus on Itachi. She brought Itachi here to prove him a point and not freak the poor boy out.


    Hearing her words, Itachi finally calmed down. Yes, what he is witnessing is just a Genjutsu. With the fifth Hokage in power, the Uchiha clan would never be forced to such lengths.


    ¡° Of course, this would also happen if that old fox Hiruzen got back into power,¡° Izanami added, subtly brainwashing Itachi. With Itachi¡¯s naiveness, he may once again be caught by Hiruzen¡¯s fake words.


    Itachi had a complex expression as he listened to her words. Although he wanted to deny such claims, but he had no words. In the whole of Konoha, the only good thing the Third Hokage did was train the three legendary Sannins. After that, there is nothing worth mentioning.


    During his time he didn¡¯t bring any improvements to Konoha like the previous two Hokages. The previous scandal clearly showed how corrupt he actually is. In fact, if he wasn¡¯t the Hokage who had ruled over Konoha for more than 3 decades, he should have been executed for the crimes he did.


    Suddenly, Itachi, who was deep in thought, noticed that his scenery seemed to be moving again. This time it showed the Police Department Headquarters.


    ¡° You should prepare yourself for what is happening next. This is the future that should have happened if I didn¡¯t arrive at Konoha that day,¡° Izanami warned as she played everything that happened during the Uchiha Massacre.


    Itachi witnessed it all. How two people with Mangekyou Sharingan massacred the whole clan, leaving no survivors. Be it civilians, old disabled people, or even women, everyone was brutally murdered in cold blood.


    No one could escape, as the whole clan seemed to be enclosed in a barrier that isolated the whole clan from the village. He could also see how some Root ninjas were even actively hunting the people who tried to flee from the clan.


    Some of the elite members of the clans who wanted to interfere were caught off guard as they were poisoned before being murdered by a masked man who wielded a scythe. In addition, every time he kills someone, he also seems to be absorbing their corpses by using his Mangekyou Sharingan.


    Maybe it is because of his actions or because of how dangerous and bizarre his abilities were that most of the elite ninjas rushed towards him with anger and hatred. They tried every possible method but ultimately couldn¡¯t even leave a scratch on the masked man. Many jonnins were killed without anyone being able to find the masked man¡¯s weakness.


    While the masked man was harvesting the lives of the elite ninjas, his accomplice, who had his face covered by a cloak of darkness, was killing everyone else in the clan. He would barge into every house and kill all the inhabitants before they could even cry out for help. Even when some ninjas tried to stop him, they were easily dealt with by his Mangekyou Sharingan.


    Itachi watched, horrified, as the two Mangekyou Sharingan users massacred everyone in the clan. He watched as they killed the people who were dear to him. He watched as they killed Izumi and her mother.


    Itachi wanted to shout or even try to stop those traitors from killing everyone, but he couldn¡¯t. For one, he was suddenly trapped by 9 golden chains, and secondly, because this was just an illusion.


    Itachi cried as he watched the whole massacre. His eyes were filled with anger and hatred as he glared at the two people who were responsible for the massacre. Itachi vowed that he would definitely find those two people and kill them by himself.


    After half an hour, the horror show was finally over. Itachi knelt on the ground, powerless as the chains began to dissolve into thin air. His Mangekyo Sharingan was already on full display as they were rotating every so often.


    Izanami even wondered whether Itachi could get his Eternal Mangekyou Sharingan without refining his bloodline or transplanting someone else¡¯s eyes. Theoretically, it is possible, but achieving such a feat is no easy task.


    ¡°Itachi, do you want to know who these two people are?¡° Izanami asked as she was very curious of her guess. Well, she was going to reveal the truth to him eventually, so why not use this opportunity to satisfy her curiosity?


    ¡°Who are they?¡° Itachi asked as his bloodshot eyes turned to Izanami. If a normal person were to see Itachi now, they would have run for their lives, as Itachi with his Mangekyou Sharingan opened is very scary.


    Izanami smiled mischievously as she said, ¡°Well, don¡¯t be too surprised, okay?¡° and with a wave of her hand, she removed the veil of darkness that covered Itachi¡¯s face from the projection.


    Seeing his own face in the projection, Itachi¡¯s mind froze. He turned to look at Izanami like he was some robot to check whether it was some sick joke. But unfortunately, Izanami¡¯s next words completely shattered his only hope.


    ¡°Sorry to break it to you, Itachi, but this is the original future that was supposed to happen. You, under the pressure and wanting to protect your little brother, took your blade and swung it towards your clan, massacring everyone present.


    Of course Hiruzen and Danzo also had some responsibility for pushing you to take that decision, but ultimately you are still responsible for your own actions. ¡° Izanami spoke as she watched Itachi drop on the ground due to his legs giving out.


    The truth was so shocking for Itachi that his mind was a complete mess. He stared blankly at the scene of his self massacring everyone. All those flashed in his mind as he was living at that moment, and he was doing the massacre himself.


    Soon all the mental stimulation reached its peak, and a shocking thing happened. Itachi¡¯s Mangekyou Sharingan, which was rotating continuously, suddenly stopped. Then it began to rotate in reverse, and his eyes also began to change.


    His eyes now had three curved comma-like shapes within the iris, with one large, elongated curve in the center and two smaller, more pointed curves flanking it on either side, all appearing as dark, swirling patterns against the background of his eye.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    patreon.com/Nauty_Manu


    ****

 117: Itachi You Made Your Ancestors Proud

    117: Itachi You Made Your Ancestors Proud


    ¡°Congratulations, Itachi, you just achieved something that even your ancestor Madara would consider impossible, ¡° Izanami said as she looked at Itachi, who was still trying to process the fact he would become a traitor who would massacre the whole clan.


    He was so distracted that he didn¡¯t hear Izanami or even feel the sudden increased power in his eyes.


    "Hey, Itachi," Izanami said, observing his lack of reaction as she waved her hand in front of him.


    Seeing him still not reacting, Izanami got worried and began to check on him.


    ¡®Phew, he is only unconscious. The stimulation must be too much for him, Izanami thought.


    As she breathed a sigh of relief.


    If something did happen to Itachi, Kiyomi would not let this go easily.


    ¡® I should use that technique to calm his mind just in case he is traumatized, ¡® Izanami thought as a green light appeared on her fingertips. She then placed her finger on Itachi¡¯s forehead.


    What she is doing now is a healing jutsu for the mind. This ninjutsu would calm the chaotic mind slowly while healing any spiritual wounds. The difference between this ninjutsu and the other mind-calming jutsu is that while this one slowly and carefully calms the mind, the other ninjutsu forces the mind to calm down.


    The main difference lies in the way one car slows down and applies the brakes gradually, while the other car applies the handbrake abruptly. If both cars were driving on a steady, smooth road, then nothing would happen, but if they were driving on a bumpy road with many turns, then the second car would definitely be over.


    And like the earlier situation, using the forceful mind-calming ninjutsu on a chaotic mind is just asking for more trouble. Instead of healing the mind, it may even make things worse. That is why Izanami was using the second slow and steady method.


    After 15 minutes, she stopped the ninjutsu as the healing was over. While stepping back, she sneakily wiped away the cold sweat that had formed on her face.


    ¡®Phew, that was a close call. Note to self: never try to stimulate an Uchiha into achieving their Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan ever again,¡¯ she thought.


    Despite accomplishing the seemingly impossible, the trauma nearly destroyed Itachi''s spiritual body and mind. The pain needed to unlock the Eternal Mangekyo Sharingan is 25 times stronger than the pain needed for a Mangekyo Sharingan.


    Itach literally had to produce the special yin chakra and forcibly refine his bloodline while also handling the mental strain needed to produce enough yin chakra. And a human body can barely handle that strain. If it were not for Izanami¡¯s timely healing, Itachi would become a mentally unstable person or even go into a coma.


    The reason why Indra was able to manage it was because his O?tsutsuki bloodline was already pure enough to handle the strain.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    The marketplace was bustling with activity, with numerous merchants shouting to attract a large customer base.


    Itachi, holding Izumi¡¯s hand, walked by, evading the crowds. As ninjas, both of them could do something as easy as that without any problem. Today was one of the rare days Itachi and Izumi hung out.


    They usually went to the lakeside near the clan, but Izumi insisted they go to the marketplace, saying she had a surprise. Itachi was curious about what it was, so he tagged along with her.


    ¡° So Izumi, when are you going to say what the surprise is? ¡° Itachi asked as he looked helplessly at the girl who was dragging him.


    ¡°Hehe, Itachi, don¡¯t worry; we are almost there, so wait just a little more, ¡° Izumi said as she chuckled softly at his adorable face.


    Soon both of them arrived at the edge of the marketplace next to the police department. Arriving there, Izumi let go of Itachi¡¯s hands and turned to him.


    Itachi looked around and saw that apart from the random passerby and a few merchant stalls, there wasn¡¯t something he would call a surprise. So he turned to look at Izumi again and asked, ¡° So where is the surprise? ¡°


    Izumi smiled and said, ¡° Itachi isn¡¯t taking my life enough surprise for you. ¡°


    ¡°Huh? ¡° Itachi didn¡¯t get it until he looked down and saw that his sword had stabbed Izumi in her heart. The floor under them was already overflowing with blood.


    Horrified Itachi tried to let go of the sword and take a step back, but the sword seemed to be glued to his hand as it came out with him.


    ¡°No, Izumi. ¡° Itachi panicked and tried to speak, but his words were cut mid-sentence when Izumi, with blood dripping from her mouth, asked, ¡°Itachi, why did you kill us all? Weren¡¯t we, your family? ¡°


    ¡°No Izumi I never wanted to... ¡° Itachi tried to explain, but his voice faded when he looked down; he saw that he was already in his Anbu Ninja uniform that was already soaked with blood flashes.


    ¡°You, Itachi, killed us because the village ordered it right. But aren¡¯t we Uchiha also a part of the village? Why, Itachi? Why did you kill us all? ¡° Izumi asked as she walked forward despite all the injuries she had.


    Itachi reflexively took a step back, but his foot slipped on something, and he fell down. When he looked back, he saw that he was already sitting on top of a mountain of corpses. All these corpses belong to the Uchiha clan members whom they met on the way. And all of them had knife wounds on them.


    ¡°Why, Itachi, why did you kill us all? ¡° Izumi once again asked as she held Itachi¡¯s face.


    ¡°NoOOOOOO!¡± Itachi screamed as he got up from the floor. Looking around, he saw that he was sitting on a white floor while the sky was pitch black.


    ¡° Oh, you got up early. I expected you to sleep for another hour at least. ¡° Izanami¡¯s surprised voice rang from the side as Itachi saw her sitting on a couch reading a book.


    ¡° What happened to me? ¡° Itachi asked as he held his head in pain. He seemed to have lost his memories of what happened earlier.


    ¡°Well, you should first open your Sharingan; you would be pleasantly surprised to see the new changes, ¡° Izanami said as she handed him a mirror she had taken from nowhere.


    Itachi accepted the mirror and took a look at him. He first activated his Three Tomoe Sharingan and then his Mangekyou Sharingan. And that¡¯s when he notices the changes.


    Not only did his ocular powers improve at least three times, but the blindness that he usually had due to using his Mangekyou Sharingan a year ago was also gone. His eyes also had changed and become more powerful.


    Feeling disbelief about what the hell happened to him, he turned to look at Izanami for answers. Izanami didn¡¯t disappoint him as she explained everything that happened.


    After hearing everything, Itachi took a deep breath to calm himself down. What happened was too surprising. He didn¡¯t know the Mangekyou Sharingan could evolve even further. But he began to throw these things to the back of his mind as he had way more important things to discuss.


    He looked at Izanami and asked, ¡° What do you want me to do? I don¡¯t think you gave me this new power while showing everything is just for fun.


    Izanami smiled as she said, ¡° You are right. I showed you all this for a reason. I want you to do something for me.


    Itachi swallowed as he readied himself for what Izanami wanted. But her next words stunned him. For a moment he even doubted his ears.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    patreon.com/Nauty_Manu


    ****

 118: The Favour And The Truth

    118: The Favour And The Truth


    **********


    Kiyomi was cleaning up the table when her shadow began to flicker, and Itachi came out of it. He had a dazed expression, unlike his usual expressionless face.


    ¡°Hey, Itachi, what happened? What did Aunt Izanami ask you?¡° Kiyomi asked curiously. She really wanted to know what her aunt did to make Itachi look like his worldview crashed.


    ¡° Nothing, she just asked me to have a girlfriend and get married, ¡° Itachi said truthfully.


    Yes, at the end the request Izanami asked him for is to get a girlfriend and get married. According to her, he is the least special amongst all his siblings, so she wanted him to get the special identity of making Fugaku¡¯s first grandchild.


    Hearing Itachi''s words, Kiyomi was silent for a moment. ¡®As expected, Aunt Izanami is still unfathomable as always,¡¯ she thought.


    She knew why Izanami wanted Itachi to get a girlfriend and get married. This is to tie him into protecting his family and making him a part of the Uchiha clan.


    She had noticed how distant he was becoming from the Uchiha clan. And in the last year he and Fugaku also had many arguments.


    Kiyomi didn''t know the full story, but she had an inclination of why Itachi was like that. Itachi is very much afraid of war due to his past trauma. And in the village there was an old fox who preached about the Will of Fire.


    Coupled with the fact that Itachi was actually recruited to the Anbu by the Hokage himself, it really isn''t hard to find who is brainwashing him.


    At first, Kiyomi didn''t care, as she could always beat the shit out of him if he went off track. But Itachi had lately been becoming more and more normal the last year, so Kiyomi thought things would be alright.


    But it seems she was a bit too lax. If Aunt Izanami had personally gone to correct it, then he must have done something very dangerous in the future.


    After all, she literally tied him to the clan. After Itachi got a girlfriend, she would become his sole emotional pillar. This is something that every Uchiha has in common.


    Itachi himself has Sasuke as his emotional pillar, but that is just his obsession and overprotective nature of his younger sibling.


    But if Itachi had a girlfriend, things would get different. Itachi would be forced to play the protective guard dog to keep her safe while not restricting her freedom.


    This also meant that he would have to listen to her. And if that girl was from the Uchiha clan, Itachi would have to mend the strained relationship with the clan, as he wouldn''t want to affect his girlfriend.


    So in short, by taking a girlfriend, Itachi is essentially forging new emotional attachments that he would strive to protect.


    And love might also change Itachi''s extreme mentality. After all, love can do wonders for people.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    After having the talk with Itachi, Izanami went around Konoha village to make some preparations in case something happened.


    Although Tsunade had the full support of the whole village, she really wasn''t that good of a leader. She is a decent one, but her control over the village is not 100% like Izanami''s.


    So some old fossils might make trouble for her with Izanami out of the picture to point out any schemes before they are implemented.


    And those guys might also try to make a move on Naruto. After all, Izanami couldn''t really take away Naruto.


    ¡® Wait, couldn''t I actually do that? ¡® Izanami paused as she suddenly realized this truth. She is not from Konoha, and she doesn''t need to obey Konoha¡¯s rules. And as a responsible adult, she couldn''t really abandon Naruto in a village full of malicious people.


    And with this thought, Izanami swiftly headed towards Tsunade¡¯s office. Although she doesn''t need Tsunade''s opinion, they still have to keep up the act in public.


    So under the eyes of the whole village, Izanami swaggered inside the Hokage Building in a fancy carriage she took out from her shadows.


    Due to their earlier experience, the receptionist didn''t even flinch as they asked a nearby Anbu guard to escort Izanami to the Hokage''s office.


    And like that, in just five minutes, Izanami was face-to-face with Tsunade, who didn''t even bother to look up from the stacks of documents.


    ¡° Hey Tsunade, I want to ask if you could.. ¡° Izanami was about to ask for her request when Tsunade cut her off mid-sentence while saying,


    ¡°Okay, you can do it, just make sure not to cause any chaos in Konoha.¡±


    There was a brief silence as Izanami and the Anbu guards all looked at Tsunade with disbelief.


    ¡®She didn''t even ask what I/she wanted,¡¯ they all thought in unison.


    Feeling the abnormal looks she was getting, Tsunade finally looked up from her documents and asked, ¡°What do you want to ask for anything else? ¡°


    Izanami looked at Tsunade seriously and asked worriedly, ¡°Hey, Tsunade, are you okay? Do you need me to call a doctor for you?¡°


    Tsunade, puzzled by the sudden care, said, ¡°No, I''m perfectly fine.¡±


    ¡° Then why did you agree to my request even without hearing what I wanted to ask? This isn''t like you at all,¡° Izanami asked. No matter how hot-headed and impatient Tsunade is, she still knows the basic rule of being a leader. And that is to hear the full story of someone¡¯s request.


    Hearing this, Tsunade looked at Izanami with a deadpan gaze that seemed to be asking, ¡® Are you serious?¡¯ Seeing Izanami still clueless, Tsunade rubbed her forehead and explained, ¡°Does it really matter what my opinion is when you would eventually do it one way or another? ¡° she added with an annoyed expression.


    ¡®Well, she got a point there,¡¯ everyone thought and nodded in agreement. Izanami had the capital to do whatever she wanted in Konoha.


    ¡°Well,¡° Izanami had an awkward expression as he felt the annoyance emanating from Tsunade. It seems she may have had too much fun in Konoha.


    ¡°Ah, so what did you want to ask anyway?¡° Tsunade grumbled as she asked.


    ¡°Well, I¡¯m leaving Konoha in a week, so I wanted you to look over Naruto while I¡¯m away. ¡° Izanami said. She didn¡¯t dare to say her real reason since that would make everyone realize Tsunade¡¯s earlier words were true.


    Of course, she would come back and take Naruto to Japan when his school vacation is coming in two months.


    ¡°Wait, what?¡° Tsunade suddenly shouted as she got up from her seat in a hurry. She was so shocked that she unconsciously dropped the documents she was holding. This is really big news.


    If Izanami is leaving now, then that means she would have to govern Konoha all by herself without getting any help from the Yokai members or Izanami herself. And this meant she would have to do a lot more work.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 15 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    patreon.com/Nauty_Manu


    ****

 Good News

    Good News


    Hey everyone!


    I¡¯ve got some great news to share¡ªafter a month of hard work, I¡¯ve officially introduced a brand-new tier on my Patreon! And yes, that means more advanced chapters


    are now available for you to enjoy. While some series may currently have only 3¨C4 chapters in the new tier, I¡¯ll be updating and adding more over the coming days.


    Also, I¡¯d like to kindly ask for your support:


    As I begin my journey at university, I¡¯m hoping to earn a little extra pocket money through Patreon. If you¡¯ve been enjoying my work, it would mean a lot if you could recommend my novels to others. Even helping bring in just one new member makes a big difference.


    Thank you as always for reading and supporting my stories.


    Please enjoy the new chapters¡ªand see you again soon!


    ****


    If you want to read up to 20 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    patreon.com/Nauty_Manu


    ****

 119: The Grudge

    After an hour, Izanami exited the Hokage building. She had a very tired expression as she got into the carriage.


    Today she learned another thing about Tsunade. And that is how she perfectly inherited Hashirama¡¯s shameless begging.


    The girl literally cried, holding her legs, saying that she would abdicate the next day if Izanami left.


    Izanami should have been very happy about this, but she really couldn''t. The reason Tsunade didn''t want her to leave was because her workload would be increased if she left. So in short, Tsunade was basically begging Izanami to find someone who would take care of her job until she was away.


    And if she didn¡¯t find anyone before her departure, Tsunade would resign from her position the next day.


    Although Izanami was hesitant, she ultimately caved in and asked Nanami to send someone who would act as her replacement.


    ¡®Sigh, the things I do for world peace,¡¯ Izanami thought as she came back home. She was mentally and physically exhausted. Although she could just let Nanami handle all these preparations and slack off, she couldn¡¯t do that with a clear conscience.


    After all, she is still the matriarch of Japan. Until she managed to find a suitable successor, she was responsible for all the citizens in Japan. And it is because of this duty that she is leaving Konoha.


    Even though she adores Naruto, she couldn¡¯t really abandon all those people who placed their trust in her and stay in Konoha forever. And she had already completed one of her missions by letting Naruto meet with Kushina and Minato.


    This time she is sure that Naruto won¡¯t be brainwashed by anyone because he now has his parent''s guidance and her backing. And with Tsunade and Jiraiya there, he wouldn¡¯t be isolated anymore.


    The only hidden danger Naruto would have would be Hiruzen wanting to control him, but Izanami had placed many guards so he won¡¯t be able to do that anytime soon. Izanami even prepared someone to assassinate Hiruzen if he really went mad and wanted to play rough. No matter how much chaos it would cause, Izanami wouldn¡¯t dare gamble on Naruto¡¯s safety.


    As for Hiruzen trying to make trouble with the Uchiha clan. Well, Izanami would love it if that guy did that. With her giving the talk to Itachi, she was pretty sure that guy would go ahead and kill Hiruzen the very next day he made a move.


    Don''t underestimate the determination of someone who could even massacre his whole clan. With Izanami''s advice, Itachi would slowly begin to fall in love and finally realize the true Will of Fire. And then he would do anything to protect his current lifestyle.


    Unlike in the original story, Itachi still hasn''t lost all hope and didn''t crumble under the pressure. With Tsunade around, Itachi didn''t need to fear Hiruzen and Danzo, as the Hokage is Tsunade and not these old fossils.


    And besides, Danzo will be out of the picture very soon. Well, she had already sent a very capable man to take care of him, so his death is just a matter of time. The only reason why Danzo was still alive was because Konan and Kakuzu were still arguing about how to split the bounty money amongst them.


    .


    .


    .


    .


    Danzo was reviewing the intelligence reports his men brought when the ground began to shake, startling him. He frowned as he looked up with confusion. He then ordered his men to go up and look at what was happening.


    While they were doing that, Danzo hesitated for a moment before deciding to go to the emergency escape route he had prepared beforehand. Although he didn¡¯t know why a sudden earthquake happened, he wasn¡¯t taking any chances. He had already stored all of his important stuff in a scroll just in case.


    As Danzo left his secret hideout with his men, a small snake came out from the cracks. It looked at the retreating Danzo with a smirk. And without anyone noticing, he slipped into the ground again, disappearing.


    As soon as Danzo exited his secret passage, he was not expecting a giant water bomb jutsu aimed at his head. Fortunately, one of his men used his own body as cover to protect him.


    Danzo wasted no time as he attacked, ¡°Wind Style Vacuum Blades! ¡° Danzo shouted as he took a deep breath and shot five vacuum blades from his mouth.


    The vacuum blades tore through the surrounding area as they shredded the wooden substitutes into pieces.


    ¡°Hehehe, I see you are still as lively as ever, Danzo. ¡° A hoarse voice sounded as Orochimaru walked out from the nearby trees.


    His eyes had a calculating light as he smiled like a snake.


    Danzo visibly tensed slightly as he saw Orochimaru appearing in front of him. In the past, he didn¡¯t fear Orochimaru since he had the whole Root and Hiruzen¡¯s support as his backing. But now he has none of them, so he was extra wary of this snake.


    ¡°Hehehe ¡°, seemingly feeling the nervousness from Danzo Orochimaru, began to chuckle ominously. In his eyes, he held a deep resentment and disgust as he looked at Danzo.


    In the past, he was always bossed around by this old man like he owed him money. He endured all of it since Danzo was sponsoring him with research materials. But this bastard had the audacity to report on him and kick him out of the village.


    Even though Orochimaru doesn''t have much love for the village, he still feels betrayed. After all, he did live and fight for this village for many years.


    And it was this old man who convinced his teacher to kick him out. Or else, with his teacher''s mentality, he wouldn''t have gone after him.


    After all, all he did was research. The materials and equipment were supported by Danzo himself, so why should he be the one who took all the blame? He was just doing his job as one of the researchers in Root.


    ¡° Orochimaru, what are you doing here? ¡° Danzo asked gloomily, trying to fish information out of him. He was sure he hid himself very well.


    Orochimaru smiled sinisterly and said, ¡°Why, Danzo, aren''t you supposed to be the smart one here? Why don''t you take a guess? ¡°


    ¡°Orochimaru, stop playing these games and speak up! ¡° Danzo shouted in anger. How dare this bastard talk to him like that?


    ¡°Hehehe, Danzo, do you still think you are head of Root and assistant of Hokage? Now you are just a wanted man who has a big prize on his head. ¡° Orochimaru sneered as he made a signal with his hand.


    He had done his part, acting as the distraction to keep Danzo in place.

 120: Money Bag

    ¡° Earth Release Bottomless Swamp, ¡° another gloomy voice said as the ground around Danzo began to change into a swamp and began to act like quicksand.


    Danzo, with his years of combat experience, managed to escape in time by jumping to the side. But unfortunately, his new Root members were not so lucky. These guys were mostly made up of rogue ninjas and some small ninjas who were supplied to him by Hiruzen. All his elites were already killed, and he didn¡¯t have any resources to make more.


    ¡°Tsk, what a pity, ¡° Kakuzu, who was the one who attacked, said with his voice laced with pity and annoyance. If Danzo had been caught in that attack, he could have used that to increase his share.


    ¡°You!¡° Danzo was instantly enraged seeing his remaining men die. If Danzo had any Uchiha blood in him, he might even be able to awaken the Mangekyou Sharingan himself with that intense reaction.


    But the enraged Danzo couldn''t really vent his emotions, as suddenly he was bombarded with paper strikes that came out of nowhere.


    Danzo, despite his age, managed to dodge almost every paper attack. He quickly took some distance in order to counterattack.


    But just as his feet touched the ground, his danger instincts suddenly flared up, issuing a warning that came too late.


    He was suddenly stabbed in the back by the giant chameleon that appeared out of nowhere. Danzo looked at the chameleon with an expressionless face before his whole body suddenly disappeared.


    He appeared a few feet away unharmed, but one could see one of the Sharingans that were on his arms began to close. The bandage that covered it had come off in the earlier fight.


    Danzo didn''t waste any time as he quickly did some hand seals after biting his palm.


    ¡° Summoning Jutsu ¡° A huge cloud of dust erupted as Danzo summoned his loyal summon beast, Baku.


    ¡° Kill them all, ¡° Danzo said as he ordered coldly as he made a run for it. His actions and words are simply too contradictory.


    Kakauzu, who didn¡¯t want to let go of his money bag, immediately acted. His hands were like a blur as he released one jutsu after another.


    ¡° Fire Release: Intelligent Hard Work ¡°


    ¡° Wind Release: Pressure Damage ¡°


    ¡° Lightning Release: False Darkness ¡°


    ¡° Earth Release: Earth Flow Spears ¡°


    When it comes to money, no one is more serious than Kakuzu, so in order not to let this money cow slip away, Kakuzu went all out. He used four chakra natures at once.


    But to his surprise, the cannon fodder Danzo left behind wasn¡¯t useless. Baku roared and began to suck all the ninjutsu with its trunk. After its earlier battle with Itachi a year ago, it has gone through self-training under a waterfall and improved its abilities.


    Now it can absorb multiple ninjutsu at once without suffering any damage. Just as Baku was about to feel smug about his progress, someone slapped him back to reality.


    ¡° Summoning Jutsu! ¡° Orochimaru shouted as a cloud of smoke appeared and his ever-loyal brother Manda appeared.


    ¡°Orochimaru, you better have my sacrifice ready for me, ¡° Manda said as he looked coldly at Orochimaru. Unlike other summoning beasts who would at least listen to their contractors, these snakes only work for profit. If there was no payment, they wouldn¡¯t even bother to lift a finger and may even attack their summoner.


    ¡° Hehe, Manda. You better show me your work quality first before you ask for the payment, ¡° Orochimaru, who was used to Manda, said with a cold smile.


    ¡°Hmph, you better give me a suitable offering. ¡° Manda snorted as he glared at Baku, who was now having a panic attack.


    Although Baku is invisible against ninjas as he can absorb ninjutsu, he is pretty weak against other summoning beasts. Especially those from the three sage lands.


    Manda just smiled coldly as he lunged forward at Baku. Despite their large size difference, Manda has many ways to defeat such prey.


    Baku tried to smash Manda with its large paws, but Manda was too slippery and got away each time. Baku tried various methods, like using his trunk to lash at him, but Manda was just that of an expert, as in just a matter of moments, Baku found himself wrapped under the firm grip of Manda.


    ¡°Dinner is served, ¡° Manda said as he bit down on Baku, injecting it with some deadly poison that would either kill it outright or paralyze it.


    Ignoring the snake eating its dinner, the rest of the Akatsuki looked coldly at Danzo, who had his escape method blocked by a huge paper wall.


    Konan, who was in the air, used her paper jutsus to create a wall so high and sturdy that Danzo wasn¡¯t able to break through. At least he wouldn¡¯t be able to break through it easily. And since Konan was in the air, Danzo also couldn¡¯t attack the caster to stop the jutsu.


    Seeing he wouldn¡¯t be able to escape, Danzo knew that he could only bite the bullet and fight for his life.


    ¡°Hehehe, Danzo, it seems you have no place to run, ¡° Orochimaru said with a sneer. He enjoyed humiliating this old man.


    Danzo said nothing as he just threw away the cane that he was still carrying for some reason. He then began to make hand signs with both hands.


    ¡°Wood Release: Deep Forest Emergence! ¡° Danzo shouted as roots came out of the ground, changing the surroundings completely.


    Orochimaru and Kakuzu both had to jump to dodge the tree roots that were about to pierce them.


    ¡° Paper Release: Paper Dragon! ¡° Konan shouted as she tried to attack Danzo from the air.


    ¡° Fire Release: Destruction Flame! ¡° Danzo shouted as he spouted a huge ball of fire at the incoming paper dragon. The paper dragon burned before it could even get close.


    But before Danzo could act all smug about it, his instincts flared again. The same tongue that had killed him earlier suddenly appeared from his back at some point.


    But unlike last time, Danzo managed to narrowly escape the dangerous tongue due to a tree acting as his cover and buying him enough time to dodge. After dodging, he finally saw his attacker; it was a summoning beast that looked like a giant chameleon. It has four limbs, each ending in four large claws. Its tail is a large snake.


    But that wasn¡¯t the thing that caught his attention; it was the giant chameleon''s left eye. Its left eye was purple and had ring-like patterns on it. Seeing that eye, a memory suddenly came to his mind.


    It was about an organization that he effortlessly crushed in order to get the two legendary eyes. If he remembered correctly, that uniform should be


    ¡°Akatsuki, ¡° Danzo said suddenly as he looked at Konan after noticing the chameleon had disappeared again. He vaguely remembered this lass. Isn''t she the one who was held hostage at that time?


    ¡°Oh, Danzo, it seems you are very well informed, ¡° Orochimaru said with a bit of surprise. He was truly surprised Danzo would actually know about a small organization like Akatsuki.


    Although they were filled with powerful people, they were still very low-key and not something one of the Five Great Ninja Villages would take notice of.


    ****


    Hey everyone!


    I¡¯ve got some great news to share¡ªafter a month of hard work, I¡¯ve officially introduced a brand-new tier on my Patreon! And yes, that means more advanced chapters are now available for you to enjoy. While some series may currently have only 3¨C4 chapters in the new tier, I¡¯ll be updating and adding more over the coming days.


    Also, I¡¯d like to kindly ask for your support:


    As I begin my journey at university, I¡¯m hoping to earn a little extra pocket money through Patreon. If you¡¯ve been enjoying my work, it would mean a lot if you could recommend my novels to others. Even helping bring in just one new member makes a big difference.


    Thank you as always for reading and supporting my stories.


    Please enjoy the new chapters¡ªand see you again soon!


    If you want to read up to 20 advanced chapters, go to my Patreon account.


    /Nauty_Manu

 121: A Bad investment

    Danzo didn''t answer but his expression was very grim. He really wanted to slap himself right now. How could he forget such an important organization? How could he forget about the Rinnegan that struck fear into him?


    ¡® Damn it, was I struck with a Genjutsu? ¡® Danzo wondered as he cursed.


    Letting such a powerful organization live and grow is not his style. Especially when that Rinnegan boy. He is too dangerous to keep alive. That Rinnegan should have belonged only to him. Only he can use it as The Darkness of Konoha.


    While Danzo was regretting his past decisions in his mind, his body was not idle. He was constantly making hand signs to use wood release to trap his opponents while also shielding himself from the sneak attacks from Konan and that strange chameleon.


    And although he was holding out against multiple opponents, he knew he couldn''t keep it at this phase for much longer.


    His chakra is running low due to the use of wood release. So he needs to come up with a decent plan to either kill one of his enemies or get the hell out of here.


    Thinking for a moment, Danzo made up his mind to risk it all. He needs a decoy to make an escape route for him. After considering his options, he began to move.


    Using a wide AEO wind jutsu to distance everyone from him Danzo locked eyes with Konan and activated his trump card.


    [ Kotoamatsukami ]


    Danzo shouted in his heart as he activated the pupil technique of his Mangekyou Sharingan that he took from Shisui. He wanted to control Konan so that she would switch sides and then use herself as bait to create his escape route.


    Konan, who was about to attack Danzo with one of her paper jutsu, paused in the air as she held her in pain. She felt someone was trying to rewrite her memories.


    Danzo smirked as he felt his plan was a success. He knew in a few seconds Konan would be his loyal slave. And with a Kage-level servant at his side, Danzo was sure he could make his escape. Although he had to pay the price of not being able to use his Magkeyou Sharingan for the next 10 years Danzo felt his investment was worth it. He could always get revenge against this Akatsuki another day.


    Just as Danzo was sure of his plan¡¯s success, he suddenly felt intense pain coming from his right eye, which had Shisui¡¯s Mangekyou Sharingan. Blood began to come out from it before Danzo could even do anything; his whole right eye began to light up with dark blue flames.


    ¡° Arhhhhhhhhhh ¡° Danzo screamed as he held his face in pain. The Mangekyou Sharingan had just combusted into flames. This also meant that Danzo had to endure the intense pain of having his face burned.


    ¡°Noooooo, ¡° but compared to the pain that Danzo felt, what hurt the most was the fact that he had lost his Mangekyou Sharingan. Those dark flames earlier had completely destroyed it without even leaving any ashes.


    Kakuzu and Orochimaru, who saw what happened to Danzo, frowned. They both released their perception to the max and searched around warily for the attacker who just used that jutsu on Danzo.


    Too bad for them, as they would find that person, as she is currently in her mansion drinking her tea while reading the reports Nanami had given her.


    Yes, the reason why Shisui¡¯s Mangekyou Sharingan suddenly got destroyed was Izanami¡¯s doing. On that day when Danzo tricked Shisui and snatched his right eye, Izanami did something.


    She secretly placed a curse seal on that eye so that if one day Danzo were to ever use its pupil technique, the eye would self-destruct itself.


    Due to Izanami¡¯s meddling, the time it took for the Mangekyou Sharingan to synchronize with Danzo was increased severalfold. After all, the seals on the eye needed to register the new host chakra for them to work. This is also why Danzo had to wait for a whole year to be able to use the Mangekyou Sharingan.


    ....


    With Danzo¡¯s sudden incident, the fight was at a standstill. Both Orochimaru and Kakuzu were tense as they wanted to find the hidden attacker. Danzo, for his part, was in too much pain to even concentrate on viewing any hand signs.


    The first to come back to reality was Konan. She looked at Danzo with a bit of fear and spoke in a cold tone, ¡° Orochimaru, Kakuzu, let¡¯s kill him immediately; we have wasted enough time already. ¡°


    And with her words, she pointed her hand towards Danzo and shouted, ¡°Dance of the Shikigami. ¡°


    Suddenly, Konan began to break into countless pieces of paper, filling the whole sky. Then in the next moment, these countless sheets of paper began to turn into countless paper shurikens as they all rushed straight toward Danzo.


    Danzo, gritting his teeth, used his willpower to overcome the pain as he shouted, ¡° Wood Release: Wood Locking Wall. ¡°


    A dome-like structure suddenly came out of the ground as it blocked all the paper shurikens that were aimed at Danzo.


    Then, without wasting any time, Danzo took out a kunai and used nature transformation to enhance it and block the incoming sword strike from Orochimaru, who sneaked up from the back.


    Then after that, he moved to the side, dodging Kakuzu¡¯s tentacle attack. Unfortunately, Danzo was unable to counterattack as he had to block another sword strike from Orochimaru.


    Seeing that he was getting nowhere with this, Danzo had a gloomy expression. He was completely cornered.


    His only option is to go on a suicide attack while using Izanagi on himself. But with Orochimaru near him, he didn''t dare to rely too much on the Sharingan.


    That snake had studied the Sharingan and knew about its abilities better than anyone. And he only had two more Three Tomoe Sharingans to use Izanagi. And after that, he would truly be out of any options.


    Just as Dannzo was hesitating, his instincts suddenly warned him off. And with his previous experience, he knew perfectly what it was. So Danzo tried to jump away from danger, but how could it be so easy?


    Before Danzo could move a muscle, his whole body was suddenly restricted by some paper chains that came out from the ground. So under Danzo¡¯s horrified eyes, the sharp sword-like tongue pierced Danzo in the chest.


    With Danzo¡¯s death, the most excited one was Kakuzu. As a person whose motto is ¡® Money is life, ¡® Kakuzu couldn¡¯t wait any longer, as he wanted to head to the bounty station immediately to collect the bounty on Danzo¡¯s head.


    Just as he was about to take a storage scroll and collect Danzo¡¯s corpse, he saw that the dead corpse was disappearing into thin air. This made Kakuzu extremely angry.


    How dare someone take his trophy? In anger, Kakuzu used all of his tentacles to rush straight toward Danzo in an attempt to keep the corpse from disappearing.


    But how could such things stop Izanagi? His tentacles went through Danzo like he was an illusion.


    ¡® Shit ¡® Orochimaru cursed as he realized what really happened. As someone who had studied many forbidden jutsus, he certainly knew this one. After all his dear teacher spoiled him the most and let him learn any ninjutsu he wanted.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 20 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu


    ****

 122: The Reason why Hiruzen is Hated

    After realizing this, Orochimaru immediately searched for Danzo¡¯s whereabouts. When using Izanagi, the caster could manipulate their respawn point to any location they had been to for the last 10 minutes.


    And in no time they found Danzo, who was running for his dear life. Orochimaru grinned evilly as he made hand signs: ¡° Earth Style: Multiple Mud Wall. ¡°


    Three earth walls came out of the ground as Danzo was once again trapped. Danzo''s heart was filled with despair as he looked back. After using Izanagi, he observed that the Hashirama cells in his arm were causing an intense reaction.


    Although Danzo wasn¡¯t a researcher, his instincts as a ninja veteran screamed at him that if he used Izanagi or even wood release again, he would die a horrible death. And Danzo, who feared for his life, didn¡¯t dare to gamble.


    So in short, Danzo has to face three Kage-level ninjas in addition to a hidden summoning beast/puppet.


    ....


    In Konoha, Izanami was busy writing some training manuals for Naruto when the door to her office was knocked, and Nanami entered.


    Izanami took her eyes off her documents, looked at her adopted daughter, and asked, ¡° What happened, Nanami? You seem in a very good mood. ¡°


    Nanami, who usually had an expressionless face, had a smile on her face as she reported the latest news: ¡° Mother Vali just reported that someone had claimed the bounty that was placed on Danzo. And from what I found, it was the Akatsuki. They had handed in Danzo¡¯s head to our branch office at Amegakure. ¡°


    ¡° Oh, that sure is some good news. Go tell Tsunade to throw a big party and especially invite that monkey after someone tipped him off about Danzo¡¯s supposed death. ¡° Izanami said as she stood up. She had a very big smile as she said the last part.


    ¡°Yes, Mother. ¡° Nanami nodded as she went to work immediately. She was fully on board with her mother¡¯s plan. But just as she was about to leave, she suddenly stopped. She turned around and asked, ¡°Mother, I don¡¯t think Tsunade would have the budget to throw a big party for the whole village. ¡°


    Izanami looked at her daughter as if she were stupid and said, ¡°Idiot, just say this is my farewell party and take the money out of one of my accounts. Even if you throw a party for a whole month, I won¡¯t care about that little expense.¡°


    ¡°Yes, Mother,¡° Nanami said as she left immediately. Although she knew how wealthy her mother was, she still had to ask before she used her money to do something. Even if that amount of money is like a drop of water compared to her big pockets.


    After Nanami''s departure, the office once again returned to its silence. Izanami didn¡¯t go back to reviewing the documents immediately as she rested on her chair.


    ¡° So Danzo¡¯s already dead, huh? ¡° she muttered as she looked outside her window. From here she could see a big part of Konoha. Her gaze lingered on the Sarutobi clan that was situated near the Hokage Office.


    ¡°Now, monkey, what would you do? Will you still go with that crazy plan of yours without Danzo¡¯s help? Or will you be more honest and maintain a low-key demeanor like a good boy? She asked, a cold smile spreading across her face.


    ¡°Well anyway, I¡¯m looking forward to what you will do in the future. After all, I really want to kill you. You can only blame fate for the fact that you resemble my old man way too much, ¡° Izanami said with a smile that screamed danger. Her eyes were like an infinite abyss that was filled with hatred and anger.


    In their family, it was not Indra who had the deepest hatred for their dear father, Hagoromo. No, it was Izanami. To her, Hagoromo was not a trustworthy father but rather a petty and arrogant individual.


    Kishijoten Otsutsuki Izanami¡¯s mother died during childbirth when Izanami was born. Yes, due to her appearance, Ashura and Indra managed to have their mother¡¯s love and care for at least 2 years.


    One could also say Izanami¡¯s arrival broke that happy family. With Kishijoten Otsutsuki¡¯s death, Hagoromo lost his second love. And with the fact that Izanami had a huge resemblance to Kaguya, Hagoromo didn¡¯t want to accept Izanami into his life.


    Although he didn¡¯t mistreat her, he still had an air of indifference towards her. One could even say that Izanami had a similar childhood to Naruto. Fortunately, there was no Danzo to cause trouble, so apart from the fatherly love, Izanami wasn¡¯t mistreated like Naruto in the original story.


    But even so, as Izanami grew older, her treatment didn¡¯t get any better. In fact, it even began to worsen. Unlike her older brothers, Izanami had no cheats like Sharingan or even Sage Body. If she didn¡¯t have a big resemblance to her grandmother and the huge amount of chakra, Hagoromo might even think she wasn¡¯t his daughter due to how ordinary she was.


    And in that era, girls didn¡¯t really get much freedom due to the deep traditional culture. So Izanami, for her whole life, had to live with a lot of restrictions. She couldn¡¯t train as much as her brothers since there was no one who would teach her or even try to spar with her.


    According to the adults in the village, women only need to worry about taking care of the household duties and becoming a devoted person for their husbands. So with such restraints, Izanami had to live the life of a rebellious teenager.


    Thankfully, she managed to find a way to stop all those stupid elders from interfering with her life. She just has to scream a bunch of curse words for the whole village to hear.


    This method proved extra effective as Hagoromo and those noisy elders immediately backed off. They are like Hiruzen, who values a reputation. This is particularly true for Hagoromo, who was renowned as the Sage of Six Paths.


    He didn''t want his foul-mouthed daughter to ruin his hard-earned reputation. He couldn''t even beat her, as even in that era, hitting a woman was frowned upon. So left with no option, he, like every wise man, completely ignored her existence, leaving her to her own devices.


    This came in Izanami¡¯s favor, as it was during that time that she managed to inherit her knowledge library. Using the new knowledge she got, she began researching her bloodline to see if she really didn¡¯t inherit anything from her stupid father.


    She was a frenzied researcher, conducting numerous bizarre experiments. Some on animals and some on herself. But she most of the time used toads for her experiments, so she was busted a few dozen times by that stupid toad Ganamaru, who would come to screw her over. But she ignored all those objections. Gamamaru couldn¡¯t push it as she was technically not doing anything crazy like human experiments for Hagoromo to intervene. Capturing toads isn¡¯t a crime.


    It was during this research that she met Hinami and began calming down her dangerous thoughts and experiments. Well, she still didn¡¯t try to get along with her father. And at the age of 15, she left home at the same time both Indra and Ashura left on her journey.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 20 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu


    ****

 123: Hagoromo’s thoughts

    It was nighttime, and the village was silent as everyone was sleeping peacefully at their homes. It had been two days since Indra and Ashura had left for their journey, so the village was a little melancholic.


    At this time, someone was sneaking through the night using the darkness as cover. She was none other than Izanami, who was dressed in a black full-body outfit that concealed her appearance.


    She scanned her surroundings warily as she moved like an expert. With practiced ease, Izanami arrived at the village gate, where there were two guards.


    Izanami looked at them and made some hand signs. Soon, her figure began to disappear, as if she were turning invisible.


    What Izanami used was the Second Tsuchikage¡¯s Dustless Bewildering Cover Technique to reflect the moonlight on herself to make herself invisible.


    This technique is very practical, as since this era, there are no ninjas who could be considered sensory ninjas. So without anyone to bother her, Izanami sneaked away from the village.


    After walking half a mile in secret, Izanami stopped and decided to rest on top of a treetop. She looked in the direction where the village was with a bit of complex emotions.


    Despite not getting any parental love from her cheap father, she still liked the village, as people in this era, except for the fact that they are very traditional, are a bunch of nice people.


    As these thoughts flooded Izanami''s mind, she quickly shook her head. Why was she acting so melancholy? It''s not like she couldn''t return back.


    She is just going out to train and become strong enough to make her own decisions.


    ¡°Sigh. It seems I still am quite attached to those guys despite everything, Izanami mumbled as she stood up. She isn''t sure whether her cheap father would notice her absence and be indifferent like usual, but she couldn''t take the chance of him doing something out of the ordinary.


    Who knows, maybe he had already planned one of those arranged marriages for her to ship her away forever.


    So in order not to be caught by him, Izanami quickened her pace. She decided that she would head at least 3 miles before she slowed down.


    ....


    After Izanami left, the space where she left twisted as a person walked out seemingly from nowhere.


    That person had short brown hair and two purple eyes that had ripples on them. And on his forehead, there was a red eye with ripples. On his forehead, there were two horns protruding out clearly. He wore a full-length cloak with a high collar, showing a necklace with six red magatama symbols.


    This man was Hagoromo Otsutsuki, the one who is titled the Sage of Six Paths. And most importantly, the father of Izanami Otsutsuki.


    Hagoromo looked at the retreating figure of his daughter with an inference different from his usual approachable look. In his eyes, there was a bit of struggle.


    Hagoromo Otsutsuki didn''t know what to do with his youngest child, who has a personality similar to Ashura and arrogance far worse than Indra.


    According to the visions he saw, she wasn¡¯t someone who was supposed to be born in this world. And worse yet, he couldn¡¯t see her destiny or future at all. Even his Ganamaru couldn¡¯t see through her at all.


    As an unknown variable, Izanami was too dangerous to exist in this world. Ganamaru had even advised him to either finish her off or seal her like what they did to his mother.


    At first, Hagoromo refused decisively. No matter how dangerous she is, she is still his daughter. But as she grew up, Hagoromo began wavering. Her resemblance to his mother was too much.


    He almost lost it when Ganamaru showed him her laboratory. He was just about to seal her right there but stopped in his tracks when he saw her face.


    At that time her face didn¡¯t show any signs of guilt or even anger. She just kept her expressionless face as she looked at him. It was like she was just waiting for him to do something and be done with it.


    It was then that Hagoromo finally realized that he may have let her down as a father. After further investigating this matter, he realized that she was not like his mother. For her experiments, she didn¡¯t use any humans or even any animals who had formed consciousness. Even for the animals she used, she first injected them with anesthesia to ensure they wouldn¡¯t feel any pain.


    So after taking all of these conditions into consideration, Hagoromo didn¡¯t punish her too badly. He just freed the toads that she captured to appease Ganamaru and let her do her own work. But what he couldn¡¯t understand was that after that incident he felt his daughter was getting more and more distant with him.


    And after that, Hagoromo kept an eye on her daughter¡¯s research. Although she was now using rats for her experiments, she still held her kindness. But as time went by, Hagoromo noticed how she was getting more and more restless and impatient.


    She even began to do some experiments on herself to speed up her research. Hagaromo couldn¡¯t tell what she was after, but he thought she must be after strength, as most of her research subjects are on the use of chakra.


    Hagoromo had to admit that his daughter was a genius no less than his eldest son, but he couldn¡¯t take it in his heart to praise her for that. In his heart, he couldn¡¯t accept her no matter what.


    Maybe it was because she resembled his mother, or maybe because her birth killed his wife, or maybe even the fact that she would change the destined future he wanted. Or maybe it was simply because he didn''t like her for not inheriting any of his bloodline powers.


    Hagoromo didn¡¯t know whether it was for any of these reasons. But he certainly had one thing in mind. His daughter is going to accomplish something his two other sons couldn¡¯t.


    This is also why he let Izanami leave the village. He knew she, like the rest of his children, needed to stretch their wings. And for this, they need to roam the world and learn. Just like he did in the past.


    ¡°I just hope you won¡¯t make me regret my decision, Izanami, ¡° Hagoromo said as he left the place with his space ninjutsu.


    ....


    Izanami, who was about 1 and a half miles away from the village, frowned as she looked back. She could swear she felt someone¡¯s gaze a second earlier.


    ¡®Maybe it is Black Zetsu; I should really find a way to learn Sage Mode,¡¯ Izanami thought as she increased her speed.


    One of the reasons why she left the village was that she needed to find a holy land to learn how to use Sage Mode. Although she didn¡¯t inherit any cheats, she still had her wish that allowed her to use natural energy.


    During these years she couldn¡¯t get in contact with natural energy no matter how many bizarre experiments she did. And since she obviously couldn¡¯t ask for someone¡¯s help (mainly Hagoromo or Ganamaru), she had to go on this journey.


    Although she didn¡¯t know why, her gut instincts were telling her that when she finally managed to make contact with natural energy, she would be able to do something very cool.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 20 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu


    ****

 124: The Big Festival

    Tsunade was busy in her office doing paperwork as usual when Nanami walked into her office unceremoniously without the obstruction of any Anbu ninjas. It was as if they didn''t even realize her presence.


    Tsunade only glanced at her before continuing her work and asked, ¡° What brings you to my office, Nanami? Did Izanami do something crazy again? "


    Nanami usually doesn''t go outside the mansion since technically she wasn''t supposed to be at Konoha. As Izanami''s secretary, supposed bodyguard, and the leader of the Yokai unit, she always tries to keep her presence as low as possible.


    But with Izanami being the person she is, that job is very hard. If you are not careful, before you know it, you may be in the limelight because Izanami did one of her usual crazy stunts.


    ¡°Danzo is dead. Our agents just verified this information, ¡° Nanami said directly. She was the type that would speak directly without beating around the bush.


    ¡°Wait, really? ¡° Tsunade paused and stood up in excitement. She had a very big smile, as if she had finally gotten her hands on the 500-year-old wine bottle she had been wanting for a long time.


    ¡°Yes, your Anbu ninjas would also get this message very soon. ¡° Nanami nodded in confirmation.


    ¡°Hahahaha, finally that old bastard is dead, ¡° Tsunade laughed like a madman. She felt the huge pressure she had on her shoulders lessened considerably.


    It has been more than a year since she took office as the Fifth Hokage, and every day she has always been in constant anxiety. Firstly, it was Danzo¡¯s presence. You know the reason why the whole mess with the Daimyo started is because of Danzo. So if Danzo someday went crazy and went public, Konoha¡¯s reputation would be lost.


    This is something Tsunade wanted to avoid at all costs. The backlash from this would undoubtedly destroy both internally and externally. A huge civil war may happen because of this. And other villages would definitely not miss such an opportunity to cause trouble.


    ¡®Thankfully that bastard is finally dead.'' Tsunade laughed again. She then asked, ¡° Can I know who was the person who killed Danzo? I want to offer him my heartfelt gratitude. ¡°


    Nanami paused at this. Should she really say that the person who delivered the final blow was none other than Orochimaru, who joined Akatsuki recently? But considering Akatsuki¡¯s goal, Tsunade may not be too happy. Especially if she knew how many of the members have a deep connection to Konoha.


    Seeing Nanami¡¯s hesitation, Tsunade immediately said, ¡°Forget it; it seems like knowing this would definitely cause trouble for me. So is that all you want to say to me?"


    ¡°Ah no, the matriarch also said you must throw a big party for the whole village to celebrate Danzo¡¯s death. She also said she would pay for the expenses, and you can disguise the party as a farewell party for her since she will be leaving Konoha in a few days, ¡° Nanami said as she looked at Tsunade with a strange gaze.


    ¡®Did Tsunade somehow become a little smarter? Maybe being with the matriarch may have awakened her survival instincts to avoid trouble, ¡® Nanami thought inwardly.


    .......


    ¡°Hey, have you heard? ¡° one villager asked as he elbowed his best friend from the vegetable stall.


    ¡°Heard what? ¡° the friend asked, aback, as he continued to choose his vegetables.


    ¡°Did you know tomorrow there will be a big festival in the whole village? ¡° The gossip-loving friend said with a smile.


    ¡°Huh, wait, what? I thought the new year was supposed to be in five months. ¡° The friend who was picking up vegetables paused and asked in astonishment.


    ¡°You idiot, of course, the new year is supposed to be in five months. I¡¯m talking about a new festival." The villager really wanted to slap his best friend for being so stupid. The vegetable stall owner who was eavesdropping on their conversation also wanted to do that.


    ¡°Okay, okay, jeez, don¡¯t get too excited for a small mistake. So tell me, what is this new festival that will happen in the village tomorrow? ¡° The friend asked as he coughed a bit in embarrassment.


    ¡°Well, there would be a big festival in the whole village dedicated to Lady Izanami¡¯s departure. ¡° Not wanting to embarrass his friend any further, the guy finally said.


    ¡°Wait, Lady Izanami is leaving? ¡° the guy asked in shock.


    ¡°Yeah, of course, she is leaving. Unlike us, she isn¡¯t a native of Konoha. And besides, I heard that her mansion in the Land of Iron is more luxurious than the one here in Konoha, ¡° the villager said as he added the last part in a low voice.


    ¡°Damn, I completely forgot about that, ¡° the guy said as he slapped himself on the forehead.


    Well, most of the villagers, like him, also forgot about this. After all, not all important guests who come to Konoha stay here for a whole year. Most of them would only stay at most 3 months.


    ¡°Wait, how did you know Lady Izanami is leaving? ¡° the friend suddenly asked. Usually, such matters would not be disclosed to the public.


    ¡°You really need to get your head checked, ¡° the guy said helplessly. ¡°Didn¡¯t you hear me saying there would be a festival in the village tomorrow? That festival is for Lady Izanami from the Hokage. And everything about it is already on the notice board in front of the Hokage building."


    ¡°Oh. ¡° The guy shrank his neck in embarrassment. It seems he should listen to his wife¡¯s advice of seriously thinking before he opens his mouth.


    ....


    Similar conversations were happening all around Konoha. After all, Izanmi was kind of a celebrity in Konoha. Not only is she beautiful and cute, but she is not as snobbish as those nobles. And most importantly, she was crazy rich and isn¡¯t stingy when spending.


    Due to her lavish spending, Konoha¡¯s economy increased significantly. Her auction, ¡®The Red Fox,'' is very famous worldwide for its amazing goods. It is said that anything bought at Red Fox Auction House can be sold for a fortune in the outside world.


    So when such a person with that much influence was said to be leaving, everyone was notified. Especially with Tsunade issuing an announcement about a festival that would be held for her.


    While the whole village was busy discussing the upcoming festival, the ninja school was also very lively. Especially Naruto¡¯s class. With most of the kids coming from ninja clans, they were already informed about the recent news as soon as it was released to the public.


    ¡°Hey, Dobe, is it true that big sis Izanami is leaving Konoha? ¡° Sasuke asked Naruto during their school lunch break.


    ¡°Yeah, ¡° Naruto said with a bit of sadness. She wished big Izanami would stay with him forever, but his parents explained how impossible it is. And due to his identity as a minor and Jinchuriki, he couldn¡¯t go with her either. So he was a bit grumpy these days.


    ¡°Really? That¡¯s sad, ¡° Choji, who was beside Naruto, said with sadness. Izanami would sometimes invite all of them to a barbecue restaurant where they could eat all they wanted.


    ¡°Yeah,¡° Ino also joined in. She also liked Izanami very much. Izanami would take them on a shopping spree from time to time.


    ¡°... ¡° Shikamaru was silent, but he too had a sad expression. Unlike others, he didn¡¯t feel troubled when talking with Izanami. He even felt like she was a comrade in arms.


    Sakura, who was with them, didn¡¯t know how to respond. She wasn¡¯t that familiar with this Izanami person since she only recently became friends with these guys.


    ****


    If you want to read up to 20 advanced chapters go to my Patreon Account.


    /Nauty_Manu


    ****